Home

SYSMAC CQM1H Series

Contents

1. Consumption Weight 200 grams max 230 grams max Contauieion gt i Output gt i Output OUTO LED LED enn OUTO OUT15 Tacs b Oa a CESTA E Internal Hee ae Internal ips ae Circuits amp 7 ol eT Circuits iS ol gt t o eee o EEA COMO l COM Maximum Maximum Output 250 V AC 2 A 250 V AC 2 A gt LED 24V DC 2A 24VDC 2A OUT7 Internal j Wee ee alt Circuits QL TOT es SOR COM7 Terminal OUTO gt OUTO fa Connections R HB0 LOMO a9 DUT 45 outi an ouT2 an nw id ey N B1 ACOM om l Sours at eur p2 e a B2 ACOM n2 l HUTS 22 x m OUT3 z B3 m outs es _COM3 a3 NSE ourz 43 outa Ba m outs G 2 f_ ai a aes OR A4 Foii OUTS a4 aie OUTS __ ps f e5 E5 a5 oom fag Se FS Sasa oe _ouT B Loum a 6s Q COM6 a6 TEuTI3 a6 OUT7 gt 67 L m outa z COM GT 4 Touts O ael e com ea ael gt l Jem ao Note The values for relay service life in the above table represent the minimum val ues The following chart gives reference values for the actual service life 59 Output Unit Specifications Section 2 3 Relay Servi
2. to 4 ay j pksa OUT3 r NPT LOAD 2 O d Os L e070 a COMO Internal Fuse 2A 100 to 240 V AC Circuits our4 to SE eng ia SAN e ovr7 Q an LOAD l 7 O il 1 4 coM1 Parnes y 7 nanan 100 to 240 V AC Terminal Connections Site a z TN COMO ao ae ouTt a 4 covo La OUTA B2 Como 22 5 La OUuT3 B3 a COMO a3 L OUTA Ba COMO and COM1 are not con CoM lA nected internally LD outs GA com a8 Sa Ea ouTe Ge com a8 ee LO OUTT B7 Ky COM GT SS 73 Output Unit Specifications Section Item CQM1 OA222 Name 6 point Triac Output Unit Max Switching Capacity 0 4 A at 100 to 240 V AC 50 60 Hz Min Switching Capacity 100 mA at 10 V AC 50 mA at 24 V AC 10 mA at 100 V AC 10 mA at 240 V AC Leakage Current 1 mA max at 100 V AC and 2 mA max at 200 V AC Residual Voltage 1 5 V max 0 4 A ON Delay 1 ms max OFF Delay Load frequency of 1 2 cycle 1 ms max No of Outputs 6 points 4 points common 1 circuit 2 points common 1 circuit Inrush current 6 A at 100 ms 15Aat10ms Internal Current Consumption 250 mA max at 5 V DC
3. 158 Programming Console Operations Section 7 3 8 The first operand of ADB 50 as an unsigned BCD integer as follows a Specify input of an unsigned integer using the following keys The CONT Key is required to specify input of a constant instead of a memory address Sere Jee b Input the value of the a from 0 to 65535 Cc F is s JL Note If an error is made press the CLR Key to restore the status prior to the input Then enter the correct input c Return to the hexadecimal display using the following keys 7 i Note If an input is made outside of the permissible range a buzzer will sound and the hexadecimal display will not be displayed WRITE 9 Input the second operand of ADB 5 as a signed BCD integer as follows a Specify input of an signed integer using the following keys The CONT Key is required to specify input of a constant instead of a memory ad dress i b Input the value of the operand from 32 768 to 32 767 Use the SET Key to input a positive number and use the RESET Key to input a negative number B A is RESET 1 0 Note If an error is made press the CLR Key to restore the status prior to the input Then enter the correct input c Restore the hexadecimal display oe WAITe 10 Input the third operand of A
4. N Caution Before changing the contents of I O memory be sure that the changes will not cause equipment to operate unexpectedly or dangerously In particular take care when changing the status of output bits The PC continues to refresh I O bits even if the PC is in PROGRAM mode so devices connected to output points on Output Units may operate unexpectedly 168 Programming Console Operations Section 7 3 1 2 3 1 Monitor the status of the desired word according to the procedure described in 7 3 12 Bit Digit Word Monitor lf two or more words are being monitored the desired word should be leftmost on the display Word monitor 2 Press the CHG Key to begin hexadecimal BCD data modification CHG 3 Input the new PV and press the WRITE Key to change the PV The operation will end and the normal monitoring display will return when the WRITE Key is pressed 7 3 20 Binary Data Modification N Caution 1 2 3 This operation is used to change the contents of memory area words includ ing timer counter present values when the word is monitored using the pro cedure described in 7 3 13 Binary Monitor It is possible in MONITOR or PROGRAM mode only RUN MONITOR PROGRAM Bits SR 25300 to SR 25507 and timer counter flags cannot be changed Before changing the contents of I O memory be sure that the changes will not cause equipmen
5. N o Jo JA fo n gt N om Jo a Jo v w Q O OOOOOOE o o The COM terminals are internally con nected but they all must be wired T is Oo oOo N N wo wo A A oa oa Details of Changes Output elements have been changed from NPN transistors to field effect tran sistors FET Part of the circuit configuration has been changed There are no changes in performance characteristics as a result of these improvements Manufacturing Numbers 00z9 e Year Last digit of calendar year e g 1999 9 2000 0 Month 1 to 9 January to September X October Y November Z December i Day 01 to 31 67 Output Unit Specifications Section 2 3 Item CQM1 0D214 Name 16 point PNP Transistor Output Unit Max Switching Capacity 50 mA at 4 5 V DC to 300 mA at 26 4 V see diagram below Leakage Current 0 1 mA max Residual Voltage 0 8 V max ON Delay 0 1 ms max OFF Delay 0 4 ms max No of Outputs 16 points 16 points common 1 circuit Internal Current Consumption 170 mA max at 5 V DC Fuse 3 5 A one per common two used Fuse is not user replaceable Service Power Supply 60 mA min at 5 to 24 V DC 10 3 5 mA x number of ON points Weight 210
6. Fuse 5 A at 250 V one per common two used Fuse is not user replaceable Weight 240 grams max Circuit Configuration Output LED a a OUTOO gt f Ay O Tae i OUTO3 yy VA z 100 to 240 V AC Wi s o o o COMO Fuse Internal A OUT04 Circuits EO Ay D f il J OUTOS YVR F 69100 to 240 V AC Ws a COMI Fuse al on Eo 5A Terminal Connections outTo en como Go out1 GD __Como an lt l ouT2 A 4 COMO AD S la ouT3 3 a COMO Ga 2 L OUTA 1 4 COMO and COM1 are not con COMI nected internally ES AN la OUTS es Efe OM A5 NC ae B6 NC A6 NC a a eo NC a7 Ne Hee NCI ag 74 SECTION 3 Units This section provides details on functions and nomenclature for the Units that make up the CQM1H and provides information on Programming Devices and communications specifications 32M CPU Units nigerian tad se a neni E lea ee tate a hear ene eee eek Tae ee Belek ImdiCators renee en tel a R dank bee i dace ant Stage heey 3 1 2 Battery Compartment Cover 0 0 eee ee cece eee 32153 Battery siete ere ake tale Foe oe Teak BAe AA ere ee a ie JAA DIPS witehs ou 58 gos Sots Pees Ma a es a lea 3 1 3 Memory Cassettes vio acto ee cent seeks gien E p EERE ORT SEO RE REEF 3 1 6 Serial Communications Ports 0 0 eee eee ee eee 3 1 7 Peripheral Port ss 00 0s esii ga oh Sie
7. Note The values for relay service life in the above table represent the minimum val ues The following chart gives reference values for the actual service life 61 Output Unit Specifications Section 2 3 Relay Service Life for CQM1 OC224 Service life x 10 000 operations 012 3 45 6 7 8 9 10 Switching current A 62 Output Unit Specifications Section 2 3 2 3 2 Transistor Output Units Item CQM1 0D211 Name 8 point Transistor Output Unit Max Switching Capacity 2 A at 24 V DC 10 _15 5 A Unit Leakage Current 0 1 mA max Residual Voltage 0 7 V max ON Delay 0 1 ms max OFF Delay 0 3 ms max No of Outputs 8 points 8 points common 1 circuit Internal Current 90 mA max at 5 V DC max Consumption Fuse 7 A one per common one used Fuse is not user replaceable Service Power Supply 15 mA min at 24 V DC 10 _45 1 9 mA x number of ON points Weight 200 grams max Circuit Configuration Ei gt a V Output LED l D OUT Internal Fa 2 1 Circuits ee My Ny L OUTO7 ji ERNER IS 1 Sa QW Ww Ha 24VDC Fuse l 7A Terminal Connections ouTo GD Nest 80 Got l l ouT2 GD Sout3 lt Note 1 Do not reverse the polarity of the Tapus oes load power supply If the load lane ae power supply is connected Te are ae incorrectly the load
8. Note 1 An Analog Power Supply Unit is counted as one Unit the same as I O Units and Dedicated I O Units 2 The Units that can be connected to the CPU Block and Expansion I O Block are also limited by power supply capacity as shown in the following table Blok Max current consumption CPU Block 3 0 A See note 2 5 0 A total see note 1 Expansion I O Block 2 0 A See note 3 Note 1 If the CQM1 PA203 Power Supply Unit is used the maximum current con sumption total is 3 6 A 2 Includes current consumed by the CPU Unit Communications Unit and Inner Boards 3 Includes current consumed by the I O Control Unit 1 2 4 Inner Boards Specifications Model number High speed Counter Board Pulse inputs high speed counter 4 points CQM1H CTB41 single phase 50 kHz 500 kHz switchable phase difference 1x 2x 4x multiplication ratio 25 kHz 250 kHz switchable External outputs 4 points Pulse I O Board Pulse inputs high speed counter 2 points CQM1H PLB21 single phase 50 kHz phase difference 25 kHz Pulse outputs 2 points 50 kHz fixed duty factor and variable duty factor supported Absolute Encoder Interface Board Absolute encoder gray code binary inputs 2 points 4 kHz CQM1H ABB21 Analog Setting Board Analog settings 4 points CQM1H AVB41 Analog I O Board Analog inputs of 0 to 5 V 0 to 20 mA 10 to 10 V 4 points CQM1H MAB42 Analog outputs of 0 to 20
9. 02000 T001 Flicker output 10 counts 10000 ON Self holding bit 02000 TIM 001 0010 1 second timer TIM 002 0020 2 second timer CP 10 count counter CNT 000 0010 OFF l Programming Example Note Section 7 4 The mnemonic list for the example program is shown in the following table The steps required to enter this program from a Programming Console are described in 7 4 4 Programming Procedures Address Instruction Data Programming example procedures in 7 4 4 Programming Procedures 00000 LD 00000 1 Self holding bit 00001 OR 02000 00002 AND NOT Cc 000 00003 OUT 02000 00004 LD 02000 2 1 second timer 00005 AND NOT T 002 00006 TIM 001 0010 00007 LD 02000 3 2 second timer 00008 AND NOT T 002 00009 TIM 002 0020 00010 LD 02000 4 10 count counter 00011 AND T 001 00012 LD NOT 02000 00013 CNT 000 0010 00014 LD 02000 5 Flicker output 10 counts 00015 AND NOT T 001 00016 OUT 10000 00017 END 01 6 END 01 instruction 7 4 4 Programming Procedures The example program will be written to the CQM1H according to the mnemonic list in 7 4 3 Example Program The procedure is performed beginning with the initial display Clear the memory before entering a new program If an error occurs while inputting the program with the Programming Console refer to the table on pag
10. Analog inputs 4 inputs max Analog outputs D 2 outputs max Pulse outputs also supported from Transistor Features Section 1 1 Distributed Control with Compact PCs with Network Communications to the communications specifications of the external device allowing data trans fers with general purpose devices to be executed with a single PMCR instruc tion Essentially any device with a serial port can be communicated with such as temperature controllers bar code readers and dedicated numeric controllers Serial communications Serial Communications Board The following serial commu nications modes are available e Protocol Macro e Host Link e No protocol e 1 1 Data Link e NT Link 1 1 mode 1 N mode RS 232C L RS 422A 485 Bar code reader Dedicated controller Temperature controller l General purpose external devices with RS 232C or RS 422A 485 port A Controller Link Unit can be included in the CQM1H Data can be exchanged between several PCs using a Controller Link Network Data links are supported to create shared data areas and message communications are supported to en able sending required data and commands using network communications instructions The Controller Link Network can be easily constructed using twisted pair cable Data exchange is also supported with C200HX HG HE CS1 CVM1 and CV series PCs as well as with personal
11. It is possible to retain or clear the data in the EM Area just as it is for the other areas but the procedure is slightly different The following procedure shows how to change the specification This specification is used as part of the above proce dure Partial Clear The SHIFT and DM Keys are used to specify the EM Area Note The EM area will be displayed for the CQM1H CPU61 only 1 Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display 2 Press the SET NOT and then the RESET Key to aoa the operation ogoi l 3 Press the SHIFT and EM DM KaT to access the selena display The bank number will be displayed on the bottom line If the clear operation is per formed with the bank number displayed the EM Area will be cleared sHiet DM E 4 To clear the bank number so that the EM Area will not be cleared press the 0 Key The bank number will disappear A i 5 Press the SHIFT and EM DM Keys to return to the previous memory clear display and complete the operation as described above in Partial Clear 1 The Up and Down Keys can be used to switch between the displays instead of the SHIFT and EM DM Keys 2 EM will still be displayed on the Memory Clear Display even if the bank num ber has been deleted from the EM Clear Display As long as the bank num 153 Programming Console Operations Section 7 3 ber has been deleted from the EM Clear Display the EM Area w
12. 0 0 0 eee eee eee T324 Force Set Resets nean dg se GG OS A IE E oes 71 3225 Clear Force Set Reset esto oaen its Sa eS RAO Ra ESS 7 3 26 Hex ASCII Display Change 0 0 cee eee eee 7 3 27 Reading and Setting the Clock 0 eee eee eee 7 3 28 Displaying the Cycle Time 0 0 eee eee eee Programming Example ss eegen trannie Os a Wad HE le ESA eee os 7 4 1 Preparatory Operations 00 cee eee eee eee 7 4 2 Programming Console Error Messages 0 002 eee eee eee eee 7 4 3 Example Program pse ess bbe ha cise Bea aw ss ee eal BA 7 4 4 Programming Procedures 00 cece cee eee eee eee n ences 7 4 5 Checking the Program 0 0 0 eee nee 7 4 6 Test Run in MONITOR Mode 0 0 eee eee eee 141 Connecting the Programming Console Section 7 2 7 1 Programming When using Programming Consoles for a CQM1H series PC for the first time use the following procedure 1 2 3 1 Turn OFF the power supply to the Power Supply Unit 2 Set the DIP switch on the front of the CPU Unit as follows Pin 7 OFF for Programming Console connection Pin 3 ON for English language displays Note Always turn OFF pin 7 before connecting the Programming Console 3 Connect the Programming Console to the peripheral port on the CPU Unit Set the mode switch on the Programming Console to PROGRAM 5 Turn ON the power supply to the Power Supply Unit A Note Any program i
13. EM Area Specification 1 2 3 Note pressing SET NOT and RESET Any data area that still appears on the display will be cleared when the MONTR Key is pressed The HR Key is used to specify both the AR and HR Areas the CNT Key is used to specify the entire timer counter area and the DM Key is used to specify the DM Area and the Shift and DM Keys are used to specify the EM Area see next pro cedure It is also possible to retain a portion of the Program Memory from the first memory address to a specified address After designating the data areas to be retained specify the first Program Memory address to be cleared For example input 030 to leave addresses 000 to 029 untouched but to clear addresses from 030 to the end of Program Memory As an example follow the procedure below to retain the timer counter area and Program Memory addresses 000 through 122 Refer to the next procedure in this section to change the specification for the EM Area 1 Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display 2 Press the SET NOT and then the RESET Key to begin the operation 3 Press the CNT Key to remove the timer counter area from the data areas shown on the display Counter PVs will not be cleared CNT Note The EM area will be displayed for the CQM1H CPU61 only 4 Press 123 to specify 123 as the starting program address B C D EEI 5 Press the MONTR Key to clear the specified regions of memory
14. m ERR Red Lit when there is an error in the PC Set up for analog I O or when an error has occurred during analog conversion RDY Green Lit when analog I O can be performed Section 8 5 8 5 6 Pin Arrangement of Connectors CN1 and CN2 CN1 Analog Input Pin arrangement Name Function 8 1 V4 Analog input 4 voltage input Seo 15 2 V4 Analog input 4 common voltage input current ot input O O O 3 V3 Analog input 3 voltage input O 4 V3 Analog input 3 common voltage input current O A O input O O 5 V2 Analog input 2 voltage input O O 6 V2 Analog input 2 common voltage input current O input 9 7 V1 Analog input 1 voltage input 1 8 Vi Analog input 1 common voltage input current input 9 14 Analog input 4 current input 10 NC Not used 11 13 Analog input 3 current input 12 NC Not used 13 12 Analog input 2 current input 14 NC Not used 15 11 Analog input 1 current input Hood NC Not used Analog I O Board Section 8 5 CN2 Analog Output Pin arrangement Pin No Name Function 8 1 NC Not used A 15 2 NC Not used O o i 3 12 Analog output 2 common current output O O i 4 V2 Analog output 2 common voltage output O O i 5 NC Not used O O 6 NC Not used O O 7 l1 Analog output 1 common
15. 13 2B Counter 2 input B 14 2A Counter 2 input A 15 2A Counter 2 input A Hood NC Not used 186 High speed Counter Board Section 8 1 CN2 Pulse Input 3 and 4 Pin arrangement Pin No Name Function 8 1 3Z Counter 3 input Z 15 2 3Z Counter 3 input Z O i 3 3B Counter 3 input B O O 4 3B Counter 3 input B O O 5 3A Counter 3 input A O O 6 3A Counter 3 input A O O 7 4OUT External output 4 O O 8 3OUT External output 3 9 4Z Counter 4 input Z 1 3 10 4Z Counter 4 input Z 11 4B Counter 4 input B 12 4B Counter 4 input B 13 4A Counter 4 input A 14 4A Counter 4 input A 15 DC Power supply for external outputs 1 to 4 0 V Hood NC Not used Note Refer to Appendix A Preparing Cables for Inner Boards for information about us ing a compatible connector XM2D 1501 Socket with XM2S 1511 Hood to construct a cable 8 1 7 Wiring Examples Pulse Input Connections Connect the encoder outputs to CN1 and CN2 as shown below according to the port s Input Mode CN1 pins CN2 pins Signal name Encoder output Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4 Differential Pulse Direction Up Down Mode Phase Mode Mode 8 7 15 14 6 5 14 13 Encoder input A Encoder phase Pulse input Increment pulse A input input 6 5 13 12 4 3 12 11 Encoder input B Enco
16. current output O O 8 Vi Analog output 1 common voltage output 9 NC Not used 1 AO ss 10 12 Analog output 2 current output 11 V2 Analog output 2 voltage output 12 NC Not used 13 NC Not used 14 1 Analog output 1 current output 15 V1i Analog output 1 voltage output Hood NC Not used Note Refer to Appendix A Preparing Cables for Inner Boards for information about us ing a compatible connector XM2D 1501 Socket with XM2S 1511 Hood to construct a cable 8 5 7 Wiring Examples Analog Input The input signal connections to CN1 depend on whether the input signals are Connections voltage inputs or current inputs The following diagrams show the correct wiring in each case Voltage Inputs Current Inputs 10 to 10 V 0 to 10 V or 0 to 5 V 0 to 20 mA Analog I O Board Analog I O Board cN1 Pin No l Hon 1 v4 Analog input 4 eo S 2 v4 3 V3 4 V3 5 V2 6 V2 T Analog input 2 2 Analog input 2 ki 7 Wi 8 vi Analog input 1 ok Analog input 1 at Shield IT Shica 217 Analog I O Board Analog Output Connections Section 8 5 The output signal connections to CN2 depend on whether the output signals are voltage outputs or current outputs The following diagrams show the correct wir ing in each case Voltage Outputs 10 to 10 V Analog I O Board CN2 Pin No 11
17. 3 Input the 2 second timer TIM 002 T E or TIM Ea 4 Input the SV for TIM 002 0020 2 0 s c A k 2 0 4 Inputting the 10 count The following key operations are used to input the 10 count counter Counter 1 2 3 1 Input the normally open condition IR 02000 tp fc A A A i 2 Input the normally open AND condition TIM 001 It isn t necessary to input leading zeroes AND B TIM WRITE 3 Input the normally closed condition IR 02000 LD c A A A i 4 Input the counter 000 A WRITE 5 Input the SV for counter 000 0010 10 counts B fa 5 Inputting the Flicker Output 1 2 3 1 Input the normally open condition IR 02000 LD Cc A A A i 179 Programming Example Section 7 4 2 Input the normally closed AND condition TIM 001 It isn t necessary to input leading zeroes Fa nor m eet WRITE 3 Input the OUT instruction IR 01000 It isn t necessary to input eng zeroes ol Jo Jf Jf J WRITE 6 Inputting the END 001 Input END 01 The display shows three digits in the function code but only the Instruction last two digits are input for CQM1H PCs FUN A B 7 4 5 Checking the Program Check the program syntax in PROGRAM mode to make sure
18. 500 kHz setting 194 The counting operation at 500 kHz is not reliable Encoder inputs A and B Waveform of terminal Relationship between phases A and B when phase differential input is used T1 T2 T3 T4 1 0 us min At least 1 0 us must be provided to allow Phase A Phase B change Waveform of encoder input Z Sensor input Pulse width must be 90 us min 90 us min High speed Counter Board Section 8 1 External Output Specifications Item Specifications Number of external outputs 4 transistor outputs Four outputs set together for sinking or sourcing outputs Set in PC Setup Function The target comparison or range comparison results of high speed counters 1 to 4 output four user defined 4 bit external bit patterns An OR is taken of corresponding bits in these bit patterns and the result is output on external outputs 1 to 4 Note External outputs 1 to 4 can be turned ON using IR 21300 to IR 21303 and AR 0600 to AR 0603 External power supply 5 to 24 V DC 10 Switching capacity 16 mA 4 5 V DC to 80 mA 26 4 V see note Leakage current 0 1 mA max Residual voltage 0 8 V max Response for target matching 0 1 ms This is the time required from completing target comparison until the external outputs are turned ON or OFF The response time listed below must also be added Response time ON response 0 1 ms max OFF response 0 4 ms max Note The switching c
19. outs AA Eo F 4 outs C DHE OUT10 E B5 4 out 48 l OUT12 gt e L BE MOUTI3 as 4 Doum 67 POUT15 ar 4 DC a Bs EM gt eles Ss 64 Output Unit Specifications Section 2 3 Item CQM1 0D213 Name 32 point Transistor Output Unit Max Switching Capacity 16 mA at 4 5 V DC to 100 mA at 26 4 V see diagram below Leakage Current 0 1 mA max Residual Voltage 0 8 V max ON Delay 0 1 ms max OFF Delay 0 4 ms max No of Outputs 32 points 32 points common 1 circuit Internal Current Consumption 240 mA max at 5 V DC Fuse 3 5 A one per common one used Fuse is not user replaceable Service Power Supply 110 mA min at 5 to 24 V DC 10 3 4 mA x number of ON points Weight 180 grams max 65 Output Unit Specifications Circuit Configuration 66 Section 2 3 CQM1 0D213 Units manufactured on or before December 28th 1999 manufacturing numbers 28Z9 or earlier O 4 5 to 26 4 VDC Units manufactured on or after January 5th 2000 manufacturing numbers 0510 or later O 4 5 to 26 4 VDC Output Unit Specifications Section 2 3 Item CQM1 0D213 Terminal Connections Wd m 1 OC Note Do not reverse the polarity of the load power supply If the load power supply is con nected incorrectly the loads may not operate correctly
20. Mode Switch The mode switch controls the CQM1H s operating mode The key can be re moved when the switch is set to RUN or MONITOR but it cannot be removed when the switch is set to PROGRAM 147 Connecting the Programming Console Section 7 2 Contrast Control The display contrast can be adjusted with the control on the right side of the Pro gramming Console Contrast control Buzzer The C200H PRO27 E s buzzer volume can be adjusted with the lever on the right side of the Programming Console The CQM1H PROO1 E or CQM1 PRO01 E s buzzer volume cannot be adjusted Low volume High volume C200H PRO27 E Note The buzzer can be turned ON and OFF with a key operation See 7 3 4 Buzzer Operation for details 7 2 2 Changing the CQM1H s Mode with the Mode Switch Once the Programming Console has been connected its mode switch can be used to change the CQM1H s operating mode The mode display lt PRO GRAM gt lt MONITOR gt or lt RUN gt will appear on the Programming Console screen e No key operations can be performed while the mode display is displayed on the Programming Console screen Press CLR to clear the display so that key operations can be performed e If the SHIFT Key is pressed while the mode switch is turned the original dis play will remain on the Programming Console s screen and the mode display won t appear 148 Connecting the Programming Console Section 7 2 e The CQM1H will en
21. e Locations close to power supplies The operating environment of the PC System can have a large effect on the lon gevity and reliability of the system Improper operating environments can lead to malfunction failure and other unforeseeable problems with the PC System Be sure that the operating environment is within the specified conditions at installa tion and remains within the specified conditions during the life of the system Application Precautions Z N WARNING Z N Caution Observe the following precautions when using the PC System Always heed these precautions Failure to observe the following precautions could lead to serious or possibly fatal injury e Always ground the system to 100 Q or less when installing the Units Not con necting to a ground of 100 Q or less may result in electric shock e Always turn OFF the power supply to the PC before attempting any of the fol lowing Not turning OFF the power supply may result in malfunction or electric shock e Assembling the Units e Connecting cables or wiring the system e Connecting or disconnecting the connectors e Setting DIP switches e Replacing the battery Failure to observe the following precautions could lead to faulty operation of the PC or the system or could damage the PC or PC Units Always heed these pre cautions e Fail safe measures must be taken by the customer to ensure safety in the event of incorrect missing or abnormal signals caused
22. oo208 enoo 7 3 11 Checking the Program This operation checks for programming errors and displays the program ad dress and error when errors are found It is possible in PROGRAM mode only RUN MONITOR PROGRAM 1 2 3 1 Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display 2 Press the SRCH Key An input prompt will appear requesting the desired check level i 3 Input the desired check level 0 1 or 2 The program check will begin when the check level is input and the first error found will be displayed A Note Refer to 7 4 5 Checking the Program for details on check levels and the errors that may be detected when the program is checked 4 Press the SRCH Key to continue the search The next error will be dis played Continue pressing the SRCH Key to continue the search The search will continue until an END instruction or the end of Program Memory is reached A display like this will appear if the end of Program Memory is reached A display like this will appear if an END instruction is reached If errors are displayed edit the program to correct the errors and check the pro gram again Continue checking the program by pressing SRCH Key until all er rors have been corrected 162 Programming Console Operations Section 7 3 7 3 12 Bit Digit Word Monitor Note Program Read then Monitor 1 2 3 Bit Monitor 1 2 3 Wor
23. 230 An operand that is used to designate the bit or bits of a word to be used by an instruction A number that indicates the location of a bit within a word Bit 00 is the rightmost least significant bit bit 15 is the leftmost most significant bit An instruction that is used to control the status of an individual bit as opposed to the status of an entire word See logic block and instruction block A PC that is constructed from individual components or building blocks With building block PCs there is no one Unit that is independently identifiable as a PC The PC is rather a functional assembly of Units A communications path used to pass data between any of the Units connected to it The line leading down the left and sometimes right side of a ladder diagram Instruction execution proceeds down the bus bar which is the starting point for all instruction lines A unit of data equivalent to 8 bits i e half a word A process by which instruction execution shifts from the main program to a sub routine The subroutine may be called by an instruction or by an interrupt A flag that is used with arithmetic operations to hold a carry from an addition or multiplication operation or to indicate that the result is negative in a subtraction operation The carry flag is also used with certain types of shift operations A device that is capable of storing programs and data and executing the instruc tions contained in th
24. High speed Counter Board D at D Rotary Encoder Four encoders can be connected Single phase 50 kHz 500 kHz switchable 25 kHz 250 kHz switchable Better Connections to Machine Components with Serial Communications Two encoders can be connected D Single phase 50 kHz phase dif Motor driver Servomotor or Stepping Motor phase difference 1 2 4 multiplication factor Absolute Encoder Inputs Absolute Encoder Interface Board Section Absolute Encoder Two encoders can be connected 4 kHz max gray code binary Analog Settings Analog Setting Board Set with Philips screwdriver The 4 settings are stored in the AR area inside the CPU Unit These values can be used for timer settings or other purposes Oooo Connections can be easily made to general purpose machine components and dedicated controllers The Serial Communications Board an Inner Board sup ports a protocol macro function You can create macros for protocols according or Analog I O Analog I O Board Output Unit 20 Hz to 1 KHz max CPU Unit built in inputs High speed counter 1 only Single phase 5 kHz phase difference 2 5 kHz Rotary encoder w IP 1 only Interrupts inputs 4 inputs max 5 Example Photo microsensor
25. 3 Tighten the terminal screws to a torque of 0 8 N m 4 LGA A Noise filter neutral terminal Short circuit the LG terminal and GR terminals using the attached short circuit bar and ground them at a resis tance of less than 100 Q to reduce noise and prevent electric shock 5 GR Protective earth terminal Connect to a separate ground wire of at least 2 mm to ground the terminal at a resistance of less than 100 Q to prevent electric shock 6 To satisfy the EC directives low voltage directive provide reinforced in sulation or double insulation for the power supply Note Wiring and Connections Section 4 7 Wiring Precautions for Wire the grounding wires according to the diagram below Ground Wiles In order to improve the electromagnetic compatibility EMC connect the LG 1 or terminal to the screw on the end plate using the DIN track connecting cable provided Short circuit bar Supplied with the CQM1H PC DIN track cable Supplied with the CQM1H PC 3 Grounding wire Use a wire of at least 2 mm2 to ground at a resistance of less than 100 Q Note Definition of EMC The EMC refers to the capacity of equipment represented in terms of emission which indicates the degree to which electromagnetic waves produced by equip ment do not affect other communications equipment and also in terms of immu nity which indicates the degree of resistance against electromagnetic distur
26. A timer within the system that ensures that the scan time stays within specified limits When limits are reached either warnings are given or PC operation is stopped depending on the particular limit that is reached 243 Glossary WDT word word address work area work bit work word write protect switch write protect 244 See watchdog timer A unit of data storage in memory that consists of 16 bits All data areas consists of words Some data areas can be accessed only by words others by either words or bits The location in memory where a word of data is stored A word address must specify sometimes by default the data area and the number of the word that is being addressed A part of memory containing work words bits A bit in a work word A word that can be used for data calculation or other manipulation in program ming i e a work space in memory A large portion of the IR area is always reserved for work words Parts of other areas not required for special purposes may also be used as work words A switch used to write protect the contents of a storage device e g a floppy disk If the hole on the upper left of a floppy disk is open the information on this floppy disk cannot be altered A state in which the contents of a storage device can be read but cannot be altered Numbers 1 1 Data Link 1 1 NT Link 1 N NT Link A B AC Input Units specifications applications precautio
27. Constant cycle time 1 to 9 999 ms Unit 1 ms Cycle time monitoring When the cycle time exceeds 100 ms the Cycle Time Over Flag turns ON and operation continues A setting can be made in the PC Setup so that this error is not generated When the cycle time exceeds the cycle monitor time operation is stopped Cycle monitor time settings 0 to 990 ms in 10 ms units 0 to 9 990 ms in 100 ms units 0 to 99 s in 1 s units Note The maximum and current values of the cycle time are stored in the AR area I O refreshing Cyclic refreshing refreshing by IORF 097 direct output refreshing set in the PC Setup interrupt input refreshing The inputs that are refreshed can be set separately for input interrupts high speed counter interrupts and interval timer interrupts in the PC Setup I O memory Depends on the ON OFF status of the I O Hold Bit SR 25212 holding when changing operating modes Load OFF All outputs on Output Units can be turned OFF when the CPU Unit is operating in RUN MONITOR or PROGRAM mode Used for stopping output in emergencies for debugging etc User customized A pin setting on the DIP switch on the front of the CPU Unit is stored in AR 0712 This setting can be DIP switch used as an ON OFF condition e g to switch between trial operation and actual operation setting Mode setting at Possible power up Debugging Control set reset differential monitoring dat
28. PC I O wiring PC power supply and general control circuit wiring Power lines ka Ground to 100 Q or less If the I O wiring and power cables must be placed in the same duct they must be shielded from each other using grounded steel sheet metal PC power supply Steel sheet metal and general PC I O wiring control wiring Power lines 1 Ground to 100 Q or less 106 Mounting Dimensions Section 4 3 Improving Noise Reduce the effects of noise by observing the following points Rosistancg e Do not mount the PC in a control panel containing high voltage equipment e Install the PC at least 200 mm 6 5 feet from power lines Power lines 200 mm min CQM1H 200 mm min e Ground the mounting plate between the PC and the mounting surface PC Orientation When installing the CQM1H in the control panel always mount the Units so that the ventilation openings are facing up Also there must be at least a 20 mm space both above and below the PC Correct 4 3 Mounting Dimensions The following diagram shows a CQM1H PC consisting of a Power Supply Unit Communications Unit CPU Unit and I O Units Be sure to connect an End Cov er to the right side of the Unit on the opposite end of the PC from the CPU Unit 107 Mounting Dimensions Section 4 3 External Dimensions for CPU Block Unit mm The following table lists the total width W of the PC n No of I O Units No o
29. Preassembled Cables The following examples show applications for preassembled OMRON Cables Contact your OMRON representative for details 1 2 3 1 Connecting to a terminal block CQM1 ID213 CQM1 ID213 CQM1 0D213 CQM1 0D216 XW2Z D Connecting Cable for Connector Terminal Block Conversion Unit XW2Z B Connecting Cable for Connector Terminal Block Conversion Unit 16 inputs Connector Terminal Block Conversion Unit with Flat Cable GD i Connector Terminal Block XW2B 40G5 M3 5 terminal screws 16 inputs Conversion Unit common type XW2B 40G4 M2 5 terminal screws XW2C 20G5 IN16 2 Connecting to a Relay Terminal CQM1 ID213 CQM1 0D213 G79 ILJC L Connecting Cable for Relay Terminals For I O Units with PC32 64 point connectors G79 OLIC L Connecting Cable for Relay Terminals For I O Units with PC32 64 point connectors G7TC OCLH G70D or G70A Output Relay Terminals G7TC IL116 Input Relay Terminals 124 I O Unit Wiring Precautions Section 4 8 4 8 I O Unit Wiring Precautions N Caution Do not remove the protective label from the top of the Unit until wiring has been completed This label prevents wire strands and other foreign matter from enter ing the Unit during wiring procedures Remove the label after the completion of wiring to ensure proper heat dissipation Leaving th
30. SECTION 4 Installauion 6534 60i eee s tasein ne Sa ee wwe Ree 4 1 Failsafe Circuits 24sec caged ba hated aid el ae ee dteeavtady i eee ds 4 2 Installation Precautions 0 e ec eee eee ae 4 3 Mounting Dimensions 0 cece eee nee 4 4 Connecting PC Components 0 cece eee nee 4 5 Inner Board Installation gt sses osen 00 ee cece nee 4 6 DIN Track Installation seias ar a a a cece eae 4 7 Wiring and Connections ssc sse secre pere soog rio tiendan eect een eae 4 8 TO Unit Wiring Precautions 00 cece 4 9 Connecting Programming Devices 0 0 cee eee eee 4 10 Connecting Programmable Terminals 0 0 0 cece eee eee eee SECTION 5 Overview of Operation eeeeeee eees3seeeee0e0eo0esee3 ee e3s55 5veeee e e ee 5 1 Internal Structure of CPU Unit 0 00000 ccc cece eens 5 27 Operating Mod s oss n eh a ee eh a Ree SRG EL SECTION 6 Switch Settings eeeeeeees3s 4eee0e0eoe3aeo3neveo3ene53aeo3wesxoeee3uwovwoeex3usweeee eee 6 1 DIP Switch Setings gt scis 5 ke ped chews soe Meal e eben debs Pei f Mee ehaegiate es 6 2 Communications Port and Startup Modes Settings 00000 vii TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION 7 Using a Programming Console 006 ded Programming 27g sacar gh enact e sak ae a Ae ve ae ee 7 2 Connecting the Programming Console 0 0 0 c eee eee eee 7 3 Programming Console Operations 0
31. The product will be destroyed if 200 to 240 V AC is supplied while the metal jumper is attached e A ground of 100 Q or less must be installed when shorting the GR and LG ter minals on the Power Supply Unit e Use crimp terminals for wiring Do not connect bare stranded wires directly to terminals Connection of bare stranded wires may result in burning e Do not apply voltages to the Input Units in excess of the rated input voltage Excess voltages may result in burning e Do not apply voltages or connect loads to the Output Units in excess of the maximum switching capacity Excess voltage or loads may result in burning XV Application Precautions 5 xvi e Install external breakers and take other safety measures against short circuit ing in external wiring Insufficient safety measures against short circuiting may result in burning e Always use the power supply voltages specified in the operation manuals An incorrect voltage may result in malfunction or burning e Take appropriate measures to ensure that the specified power with the rated voltage and frequency is supplied Be particularly careful in places where the power supply is unstable An incorrect power supply may result in malfunction e Disconnect the functional ground terminal when performing withstand voltage tests Not disconnecting the functional ground terminal may result in burning e Check switch settings the contents of the DM Area and other preparat
32. Use an AC power supply between 100 and 240 V AC Noise filter neutral terminal see note 4 Protective earth terminal see note 5 The following diagram shows the terminal blocks for the AC Power Supply Units CQM1 PA206 A AC Use an AC power supply input between 100 and 240 V AC m m LG Noise filter neutral terminal ie see note 4 A GR Protective earth terminal see note 5 Use the 24 V DC 0 5 A ter minals to supply power to DC Input Units OIOIOIOIOI Use an AC power supply of 100 or 230 V AC Voltage selector see note 6 Short 100 V AC Open 230 V AC Protective earth terminal see note 5 Use the 24 V DC 0 5 A terminals to supply power to DC Input Units Note 1 Aa OO ND The wire used should be at least 2 mm2 Provide the grounding point as close to the CQM1H PC as possible Tighten the terminal screws to a torque of 0 8 N m LG or A Noise filter neutral terminal Short circuit the LG 1 or A terminal and GR terminals using the short circuit bar and ground them at a resistance of less than 100 Q to reduce noise and prevent electric shock GR Protective earth terminal Connect to a separate ground wire of at least 2 mm to ground the terminal at a resistance of less than 100 Q to prevent electric shock When supplying voltage at 100 V AC with the CQM1 PA216 the voltage se lector terminals must be shorted
33. e CQM1H MAB42 Analog I O Board Applicable Connector on the Cable Use the following products or equivalents for the connector on the cable Socket XM2D 1501 OMRON Hood XM2S 1511 OMRON Two of each of the above products are provided as standard accessories for the CQM1H CTB41 PLB21 ABB21 MAB42 Inner Boards Cable Use shielded twisted pair wire for the cable Wiring and Assembly The following illustrations show the procedure for wiring and assembly of the connectors First pass the signal wires through heat shrinking tubes and solder them to the socket pins Soldering iron Fold back the shield Heat shrinking tube Inner diameter 1 5 mm 10 Note Always check the wiring before supplying power After soldering all of the necessary pins slide the heat shrinking tubes over the soldered areas of the respective wires Then shrink the tubes by heating them with a jet of hot air Heat shrinking tube Assemble the socket and hood as shown in the illustration below At the connector on the CQM1H side wrap alu minum tape around the twisted wire as shown in the illustration and secure the wire to the hood R Tee feck Sri es E Aluminum foil tape Dy Sere 4 End connected to FG 227 DM 1 1 link ACP add count input address AND area area prefix arithmetic shift ASCII AR Area AUTOEXEC BAT back up basic instruction
34. 00 c eee ee eens W232 ZONGIVIEW Eb etiaekel tiation at ee te haere 123 2 Clearing Memory sschast hie eh ae adie a roe Bas 7 3 3 Reading Clearing Error Messages 00 000 eee eee eee ee 7 3 4 Buzzer Operation 0 0 cc cee eens 7 3 5 Reading and Assigning Expansion Instruction Function Codes 7 3 6 Setting and Reading a Program Memory Address and Monitoring Bit Status 7 3 7 Entering or Editing Programs 0 0 0 eee eee eee eee 7 3 8 Instruction Search 0 ce eee eee eee ees 7 3 9 Bit Operand Search ccd ees ee ee ee PG ee a eee eee 7 3 10 Inserting and Deleting Instructions 0 0 00 eee eee eee 7 3 11 Checking the Program 0 eee nee 7 3 12 Bit Digit Word Monitor 0 eee ee eee ee nee eee 7 3 13 Binary Monitor ser reederi cee ct oe ee Vote eee Shoe bee 7 3 14 Three word Monitor 0 0 0 eee eee eee nee 7 3 15 Signed Decimal Monitor 00 0 eee eee 7 3 16 Unsigned Decimal Monitor 0 0 eee eee eee eee 7 3 17 Differentiation Monitor 00 eee eee eee 7 3 18 Changing Timer Counter SV 0 eee eee 7 3 19 Hexadecimal BCD Data Modification 0 0 0 c ccc eee eee 7 3 20 Binary Data Modification 0 0c eee eee 7 3 21 Signed Decimal Data Modification 0 00 7 3 22 Unsigned Decimal Data Modification 00 0000 cee eee eee 7 3 23 Three word Data Modification
35. 1 2 or 4 words CompoBus D DeviceNet I O Link Unit CompoBus D Slave 32 points 16 inputs and 16 outputs CQM1 DRT21 1 word 1 word 15 System Configuration Section 1 2 1 2 11 Accessories DIN Track Specifications Model number DIN Track Track length 1 m PFP 100N Track length 50 cm PFP 50N Track length 1 m PFP 100N2 DIN Track Brackets Mounting brackets fastened on both PFP M sides of the PC to prevent it from sliding left or right Two are provided with the CPU Unit Maintenance Name Model number Accessories Backup Battery CPM2A BAT01 End Cover CQM1H TERO1 Inner Board Connectors Inner Board Name of Model number Remarks connector on cable High speed Socket XM2D 1501 Standard Counter Board accessories for Pulse I O Board each Board Absolute Encoder Hood XM2S 1511 Interface Board Analog I O Board Cables for Connecting Pulse I O Boards to OMRON Servo Drivers Inner Board Relay Cable Servo Relay Unit Cable Servo Driver Pulse I O Board XW2Z J A3 XW2B 20J6 3B For U series Servo Drivers R88D UP pulse outputs XW2Z J B1 For M series Servo Drivers R88D MT XW2Z J B2 For H series Servo Drivers R88D H XW2Z J B3 Cables for Connecting Inner Board Cable Compatible OMRON Absolute Encoder Absolute Encoder
36. 232 rightmost digits Port 2 IR 235 leftmost digits and IR 234 rightmost digits Data format 8 digit BCD Linear Mode F8388608 to 8388607 Leftmost digit is F Hex for negative numbers Ring Mode 00000000 to 00064999 Control Target value Up to 48 target values and interrupt subroutine numbers registered method Range comparison Up to 8 upper limits lower limits and interrupt subroutine numbers registered Counter reset method Phase Z Signal Software Reset A counter is reset on the first phase Z signal input after its Reset Bit see below is turned ON Software Reset A counter is reset when its Reset Bit see below is turned ON Reset Bits Port 1 SR 25201 Port 2 SR 25202 205 Pulse I O Board Section 8 2 Pulse Input Specifications Item Specifications 2 inputs Ports 1 and 2 Pulses 1 to 2 Number of pulse inputs Signal names Encoder inputs A encoder input B pulse input Z Input voltage Switched by means of connector pins Can be specified separately for phases A B and Z 12 V DC 10 24 V DC 10 Input current Phase A B Phase Z Phase A B Phase Z 5 mA typical 12 mA typical 5 mA typical 12 mA typical ON voltage 10 2 V DC min 20 4 V DC min OFF voltage 3 0 V DC min 4 0 V DC min Min response pulse Encoder inputs A and B Waveform of encoder inputs A and B Input rise
37. 3 0 V DC max 5 0 V DC max ON Delay Default 8 ms max can be set between 1 and Default 8 ms max can be set between 1 and 128 ms in PC Setup see note 128 ms in PC Setup see note OFF Delay Default 8 ms max can be set between 1 and Default 8 ms max can be set between 1 and 128 ms in PC Setup see note 128 ms in PC Setup see note No of Inputs 8 points independent commons 16 points 16 points common 1 circuit Internal Current Consumption 50 mA max at 5 V DC 85 mA max at 5 V DC Weight 180 grams max 180 grams max Circuit Input p x Input Configuration LED INO oan LED l s E YL fis 39 sme L gi ae xs k Mtema i ai Diki nak arc Internal a Takis 560 Q sT T7 N Circuits T l T com 560 Q STET al Circuits Input S LED IN7 2 2 kQ gt i 500M Note The input power supply polarity may be con Gr l ls de intemal i nected in either direction i Ae 56093 BG Circuits COM7 Sed i Note The input power supply polarity may be con nected in either direction Terminal Connections jo Bo 4 GoOmo a z AO mi m B1 toe a NS EML at ea e2 EOM a2 ins AA 0O B3 46 Gom3 D 7 a3 tm Gp Os
38. 3 1 Contact Output Units 2 eee eee 2 3 2 Transistor Output Units 0 eee eee 2 3 3 Triac Output Units se ke shee be a ee aw tals De ek has oe 43 Output Unit Specifications Section 2 1 2 1 Unit Specifications 2 1 1 Power Supply Units Item CQM1 PA203 CQM1 PA206 CQM1 PA216 CQM1 PD026 Supply voltage 100 to 240 V AC 50 60 Hz 100 or 230 V AC 24 V DC selectable 50 60 Hz Allowable voltage range 85 to 264 V AC 85 to 132 V AC or 170 20 to 28 V DC to 264 V AC Operating frequency 47 to 63 Hz range Power consumption 60 VA max 120 VA max 50 W max Inrush current 30 A max Output capacity 5VDC 3 6A 5VDC 6A 5 V DC 6 A 30 W 18 W 24VDC 0 5A 30 W total Insulation resistance 20 MQ min at 500 V DC between AC external terminals and GR 20 MQ min at 500 V terminals see note 1 DC between AC external terminals and GR terminals see note 1 Dielectric strength 2 300 V AC 50 60 Hz for 1 min between AC external and GR terminals See note 1 leakage current 10 mA max 1 000 V AC 50 60 Hz for 1 min between DC external and GR terminals see note 1 leakage current 20 mA max Noise immunity Conforms to IEC61000 4 4 2 kV power lines Vibration resistance 10 to 57 Hz 0 075 mm amplitude 57 to 150 Hz acceleration 9 8 m s see note 2 in X Y and Z directions for 80 minutes each Time coefficient of 8 minutes x coefficient factor of 10 total time o
39. 3 mA bypass current 5 V DC power supply Pulse I O Board Motor driver for 5 V input 24 V DC input Load current Approx 4 mA 5 V DC input CCW pulse output CW pulse pl output ET EN 4 mA ___ Shielded twisted pair cable e The transistors of the internal circuits of the pulse output section are OFF when pulse output is stopped ON Output transistor cat eo I A T OFF During pulse output 203 Pulse I O Board Section 8 2 Example Configurations Using OMRON Servo Driver Cables 204 Cable for connecting to Servo Driver Servo Driver U series Connecting Cable Pulse I O Board XW2B 20J6 3 M series Connecting Cable XWeZ M series R88D MT J B3 H series Connecting Pulse I O Board Section 8 2 8 2 8 Specifications Item Specifications Name Pulse I O Board Model number CQM1H PLB21 Compatible CPU Units CQM1H CPU51 61 Unit classification CQM1H series Inner Board Mounting locations and number of Boards One in Inner Board slot 2 right slot Pulse inputs 2 inputs Refer to High speed Counter Pulse Inputs below for details Pulse outputs 2 outputs Refer to Pulse Outputs below for details Setting section None
40. 4 1 High speed Counters 0 0 0 eee ene 1 422 PulseOutputs cc anaintiged stig ow ee es ed ot sew be kane EBRR E E EAEE ES 1 5 CQMI1 CQMIH Comparison 0 cee cee e eee n ences 1 6 Overview Application Procedure 0 ec neeee eee Features Section 1 1 1 1 Features Flexible System Configuration Note Higher Speeds and Greater Capacity The CQM1H is a compact Programmable Controller PC that supports commu nications and other advanced functions It is a package type PC that is mounted to DIN Track to control small to medium size machines A flexible system configuration is enhanced by serial communications with a protocol macro function user installed boards called Inner Boards network communications a wide range of monitoring and setting methods higher speed and larger capacity These features enable added value machine con trol e Mount up to two Inner Boards to add communications or control functions Communications Functions Serial Communications Board Control Functions High speed Counter Board Pulse I O Board Absolute En coder Interface Board Analog Setting Board and Analog I O Board e Mount a Controller Link Unit to connect to a Controller Link Network e Connect simultaneously to both a Programming Device and a Programmable Terminal PT e Obtain higher speed and capacity in comparison to the CQM1 1 25 times fast er twice the program capacity 15 2 Kwords twice the I O ca
41. A Jo N W The COM terminals and 0 V outputs are internally connected but they all must be wired 24vpc Note Do not reverse the polarity of ae the load power supply If the load power supply is con nected incorrectly the loads may not operate correctly Note If the output current of any output exceeds the detection current the output will be turned OFF At the same time the alarm output ALM will turn ON Low If an alarm output turns ON eliminate the problem that caused the detection cur rent to be exceeded The internal temperature of the element will drop and the alarm will automatically be cleared 72 Output Unit Specifications Section 2 3 2 3 3 Triac Output Units Name 8 point Triac Output Unit Max Switching Capacity 0 4 A at 100 to 240 V AC Leakage Current 1 mA max at 100 V AC and 2 mA max at 200 V AC Residual Voltage 1 5 V max 0 4 A ON Delay 6 ms max OFF Delay 1 2 cycle 5 ms max No of Outputs 8 points 4 points common 2 circuits Internal Current 110 mA max at 5 V DC Consumption Fuse 2 A one per common two used Fuse is not user replaceable Weight 240 grams max Circuit Configuration a Output LED
42. B4 iia ie foo atl 75 5 N5 H ee ai oo coms as ZL n MP 0 0 S B6 come Ge 1 T IN7 OO ea ee ae W oo Gomr 45 Nc gg Ne a5 hak ol wW O gt So ol En O fe 53 Output Unit Specifications Section 2 2 Item CQM1 1D111 Name 12 V DC 16 point Input Unit Input Voltage 12 V DC 10 _15 Input 1 8 KQ Impedance Input Current 6 mA typical at 24 V DC ON Voltage 8 0 V DC min OFF Voltage 3 0 V DC max ON Delay Default 8 ms max can be set between 1 and 128 ms in PC Setup see note OFF Delay Default 8 ms max can be set between 1 and 128 ms in PC Setup see note No of Inputs 16 points 16 points common 1 circuit Internal Current 85 mA max at 5 V DC Consumption Weight 180 grams max Circuit ar l Configuration INO OG LED l to 4 8kQ an n 1 00 MW oe eee i j nternal Z BF Gay L T COM 620 a RF Circuits l Q Note The input power supply polarity may be con nected in either direction Terminal INO Connections 54 Output Unit Specifications Section 2 2 CQM1 ID112 Name 12 V DC 32 point Input Unit Input Voltage 12 V
43. CPU Unit RS 232C port Re ii Hood XM2S 0913 Socket XM2A 0901 9 pin male Recommended cable Hood xM28 0911 E ie Socket XM2D 0901 9 pin female Provided with CPU Unit Recommended Cables Fujikura Ltd UL2464 AWG28 x 5P IFS RVV SB UL product AWG 28 x 5P IFVV SB non UL product Hitachi Cable Ltd UL2464 SB MA 5P x 28AWG 7 0 127 UL product CO MA VV SB 5P x 28AWG 7 0 127 non UL product 101 SECTION 4 Installation This section describes how to install the CQM1H PC including how to mount Units wire I O and connect Programming Devices Installation precautions and mounting dimensions are also provided Follow the instructions carefully to ensure proper operation Improper installation can cause the PC to malfunction Aa Failsafe Circuits 23 oop daete geass N tone hay ene SEE Ae a aap ee aa AS 4 2 Installation Precautions s sosse saa ee RG 8 a NSS Re eh eh Poa eae Ea ea 4 3 Mounting Dimensions 0 0 ce eee teens 4 4 Connecting PC Components 00 eee eee ee 4 5 Inner Board Installation 0 0 e aa E N eects 4 6 DIN Track Installation sis e a 0 cece eee nee 4 7 Wiring and Connections o s nres cc a eb cee a eta ee eee eae aE 4 7 1 Power Supply Unit Wiring 0 0 0 eee ee eee 4 7 2 Connecting the CPU Block and Expansion I O Block 4 7 3 YO Unt WENS essers argelat oboe Se Ne Oke AHR Lees Rhee e Rees 4 7 4 Preparing Cables
44. CPU Unit will continue operating Not lit CPU Unit is operating normally or a watchdog timer error has occurred INH Yellow Lit Output OFF Bit SR 25212 has been turned ON The outputs from all Output Units will turn OFF Not lit Output OFF Bit SR 25212 is OFF PRPHL Yellow Lit CPU Unit is sending or receiving via the peripheral port Not lit CPU Unit is not communicating via the peripheral port COMM Yellow Lit CPU Unit is sending or receiving via the built in RS 232C port Not lit CPU Unit is not communicating via the built in RS 232C port 77 CPU Units Section 3 1 3 1 2 Battery Compartment Cover To open the battery compartment cover insert your fingertip or a small screw driver in the gap at the bottom of the cover and open upwards Battery Compartment Cover Battery DIP switch Memory Cassette mounting slot inside the compartment 3 1 3 Battery The CPU Unit has an internal battery The following data is backed up using the battery e O memory including PC Setup e User program e Clock data when a Memory Cassette with a clock is mounted The battery life at an ambient temperature of 25 C is 5 years When the battery expires the ERR ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will light Replace with a new battery within one week Replacement Battery Set CPU Unit Model number CPM2A BAT01 Backup Memory Cassette 78 CPU Units Section 3 1 Note Do not remove the batter
45. CompoBus D Slaves with and reduced wiring 1 0 Link Unit Slaves 16 inputs and 16 outputs using distributed control of CPU Unit through the Master Conforms to the DeviceNet multivender bus providing data compatibility with devices from other companies Reducing wiring B7A Interface Remote I O Five types of Unit are available Unit communications to be used according to the scale Example Simple communications between PCs connections between PC robots etc of control Connections possible with B7A Link Terminal at distance of up to 500 m 34 Functions Listed by Purpose Detection sensor input Purpose Reducing wiring and space required for sensor output Unit Board Sensor Unit Function Input function for Optic Fiber Photoelectric Module Photoelectric Module with Separate Amplifier and Proximity Module with Separate Amplifier amplifier function Section 1 4 Details Up to four Sensor Modules amplifier sections of three kinds of sensor fiber photoelectric sensor photoelectric sensor with separable amplifier and proximity sensor with separable amplifier can be mounted to a single Sensor Unit Sensor Modules can be selected and combined according to the object to be detected and the distance Analog sensor input Reading analog voltage or current signals from sensors or measuring devices and outputting analog signals to inverters or analog control devices Analog
46. ID112 160 g max CQM1 ID211 180 g max CQM1 ID212 CQM1 ID213 160 g max AC Input Units CQM1 1A121 210 g max CQM1 1A221 Contact Output Units CQM1 0C221 200 g max CQM1 0C222 230 g max CQM1 0C224 270 g max Transistor Output Units CQM1 0D211 200 g max CQM1 0D212 180 g max CQM1 0D213 160 g max CQM1 0D214 210 g max CQM1 0D215 240 g max AC Output Units CQM1 0A221 CQM1 OA222 1 O Control Unit CQM1H IC101 131 g max I O Interface Unit CQM1H 1I101 211 g max including the end cover 89 Inner Boards Section 3 4 Note For details on Dedicated I O Units refer to the CQM1 Dedicated I O Units Op eration Manual W238 3 3 I O Units There are two basic types of I O Unit Those with terminal blocks and those with connectors The following diagram shows the basic components of I O Units Indicators PELE 6 MEERE CQM1 0C224 Output Unit with Terminal Block 3 4 High speed Counter Board Indicate the ON OFF status of I O terminals The RDY indicator Inner Boards lights when power is turned ON Terminals Other I O Units with Terminal Blocks other than CQM1 0C224 I O Units with Connectors The Inner Boards listed in the following table are available These must be mounted in Inner Board slot 1 or slot 2 of a CQM1H CPU51 or CQM1H CPU61 CPU Unit The slots that can be used are determined by the shape of the Board Model number CQM1H CTB41
47. Indicators Front 12 LEDs 1 each of Ready RDY and Error ERR 2 each of phase A ALI phase B AL phase Z ZL CW pulse CWL and CCW pulse CCWL Front connection section Connectors CN1 and CN2 Compatible connector Sockets amp Hoods provided as standard accessories Current consumption Supplied from Power Supply Unit 5 V DC 160 mA max Dimensions 25 x 110 x 107 mm W x H x D Weight 90 g max Standard accessories Sockets XM2D 1501 OMRON x 2 Hoods XM2S 1511 OMRON x 2 High speed Counter Specifications Counter Specifications Specifications Number of counters 2 counters ports Input Modes Set for each port in the PC Setup Differential phase input Pulse Direction input Up Down pulse input Input pin Port 1 Port 2 5 No 3 10 3 10 A phase input Direction input Decrement pulse input 4 11 4 11 B phase input Pulse input Increment pulse input 2 9 2 9 Z phase input Reset input Reset input Input method Phase difference multiple of 4 Fixed Single phase pulse direction Single phase pulse x 2 Count frequency 25 KHz 50 KHz 50 KHz Count value Linear Mode 8388608 to 8388607 Ring Mode 0 to 64999 Maximum value can be set between 1 and 65000 with CTBL 63 Storage location of counter PV Port 1 IR 233 leftmost digits and IR
48. Key to bring up the initial display 2 Press the SET and then the RESET Key A confirmation message will ap pear Note If you mistakenly press the wrong key press CLR and start again from the beginning 3 Press the NOT Key to clear the force set reset status of bits in all data areas 7 3 26 Hex ASCIl Display Change This operation is used to convert word data displays back and forth between 4 digit hexadecimal data and ASCII It is possible in any mode RUN MONITOR PROGRAM Note Displays of timer and counter present values cannot be changed 1 2 3 1 Monitor the status of the desired word s according to the procedure de scribed in 7 3 12 Bit Digit Word Monitor Multiple address monitor 2 Press the TR Key to switch to ASCII display The display will toggle between hexadecimal and ASCII displays each time the TR Key is pressed Note 1 If more than one word is being monitored under the Multiple Address Moni toring operation of the Bit Digit or Word Monitor Operation only the con tents of the word on the left will be changed 2 If more than one word is being monitored under the Three word Monitor Op eration all three words will be changed 3 The present value can be changed during ASCII display but the new value must be input as a 4 digit hexadecimal number 173 Programming Console Operations Section 7 3 7 3 27 Reading and Setting
49. ME04K 4 Kwords without clock CQM1 ME04R 4 Kwords with clock CQM1 ME08K 8 Kwords without clock CQM1 ME08R 8 Kwords with clock CQM1 MPO8K 8 Kwords 16 Kwords or 32 Kwords without clock CQM1 MP08R 8 Kwords 16 Kwords or 32 Kwords with clock CQM1H ME16K 16 Kwords without clock CQM1H ME16R 16 Kwords with clock Note 1 Data can be read and written for an EEPROM Memory Cassette with a Pro gramming Device 2 Data can be read from a EPROM Memory Cassette with a Programming Device but must be written with a PROM Writer 3 The CQM1H ME16K and CQM1H ME16R cannot be used in CQM1 PCs 79 CPU Units Section 3 1 4 The effective life of the EEPROM and flash memory is 50 000 writes Data may become unstable if the memory is used after exceeding the effective life Mounting EPROM Chips One of the following EPROM Chips must be purchased separately and mounted to a EPROM Memory Cassette Model ROM version Capacity Access speed ROM ID B 27128 or equivalent 8 Kwords 150 ns ROM JD B 27256 or equivalent 16 Kwords 150 ns ROM KD B 27512 or equivalent 32 Kwords 150 ns Before mounting the EPROM Chip set the switches on the Memory Cassette according to the type of Chip The switches are set as follows EPROM type Mount the EPROM Chip to the EPROM Memory Cassette as shown below Align the notch in the EEPROM Chip with the notch on the socket on the Memory Cas
50. Memory Capacity Clock see Saveable data saved together Reading note User Data Expansion Writing programs memory instruction read only information areas PC Setup CQM1H ME16K_ Flash 16 Kwords No Yes Yes AR area memory Memory CQM1H ME16R Yes Cassette lt gt CPU CQM1H MEO8K EEPROM _ 8 Kwords No comparison available CQM1H ME08R Yes Automatic transfer at CQM1H ME04K 4 Kwords No power ON Memory OEN EME Yes Cassette gt CPU CQM1H MPO8K EPROM 8K 16 No Yes Yes Yes Read only Kwords Memory o Cassette gt Accordin CQM1H MP08R Ms Switch Yes CPU setting Note The accuracy of the clock is affected by the ambient temperature as shown in the following table Ambient temperature Accuracy by month 3 to 0 min 1 min 2 to 0 min 11 System Configuration Section 1 2 1 2 7 Power Supply Units Name Specifications Model number Supply voltage Operating Output capacity Service power voltage range supply AC Power Supply 100 to 240 VAC 85 to 265 VAC 5VDC 3 6A None CQM1 PA203 Units 50 60 Hz wide 18 W range 5 V DC 6A 24VDC 0 5A CQM1 PA206 24VDC 0 5A 30 W total 100 or 230 VAC 5V DC 6A CQM1 PA216 selectable 24VDC 0 5A 50 60 Hz 30 W total DC Power Supply 24 V DC 20 to 28 V DC 30 W None CQM1 PD026 Units 5VDC 6A 1 2 8 Products for Expansion I O Blocks Name Model Specifications 1 O Control Unit CQM1H IC101 Connected to righ
51. Memory Cassette EEPROM flash memory To aes User program PC Setup etc CPU Unit The Power Supply Units Basic I O Units and Dedicated I O Units for the CQM1 can be used in the CQM1H Consequently Dedicated I O Units like Temperature Control Units Sensor Units B7A Interface Units and CompoBus D DeviceNet Link Units can all be used In addition user programs used on the CQM1 Pro gramming Consoles for the CQM1 and conventional Memory Cassettes can also be used A conversion adapter is necessary to use the Programming Con sole System Configuration Section 1 2 1 2 System Configuration 1 2 1 Basic Configuration CQM1H CPU51 61 The PC configuration depends on the model of CPU Unit being used and on whether or not an Expansion I O Block is connected Examples are shown below Up to two Inner Boards can be mounted and one Communications Unit can be connected with the CQM1H CPU51 or CQM1H CPU61 CPU Unit The configu ration is shown below CPU Block Onl Power Supply Unit Communications Unit CPU Unit I O Units i Dedicated I O Units VY End Cover One Communications Unit hea 2 connectable Two Inner Boards Up to eleven Units con mountable nectable as required 16 inputs built into CPU Unit CPU Block and Expansion I O Block Power Supply Unit 1 O Control Unit get iss I O Units or Communications Unit Dedicated CPU Unit 1 0 Units End Cover Up to five Unit
52. Monitoring Bit Status 1 2 3 Note This operation is used to display the specified program memory address and is possible in any mode The ON OFF status of any displayed bit will be shown if the PC is in RUN or MONITOR mode RUN MONITOR PROGRAM When inputting a program for the first time it is generally written to Program Memory starting from address 000 Because this address appears when the display is cleared it is not necessary to specify it When inputting a program starting from other than 000 or to read or modify a program that already exists in memory the desired address must be desig nated 1 Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display 2 Input the desired address It is not necessary to input leading zeroes c A A 5 3 Press the Down Arrow Key The ON OFF status of any displayed bit will be shown in the upper right corner if the PC is in RUN or MONITOR mode 4 Press the Up and Down Arrow Keys to scroll through the program The MONTR Key can be pressed to switch to the Bit Digit Word Monitor Opera tion When finished with the Bit Digit Word Monitor Operation the CLR and Down Keys can be pressed to return to Setting and Reading a Program Memory Address and Monitoring Bit Status Operation 7 3 7 Entering or Editing Programs 156 This operation is used enter or edit programs It is possible in PROGRAM mode only RUN MONITOR PROGRA
53. N mode 5m XW27Z 500S female NT20M RS 232C port Host Link 2m XW2Z 200S NT600M D Sub 25 pin NT610G female NT612G 5m XW2Z 500S NT610C Note For details of connections to the RS 422A 485 port on the Serial Communica tions Board refer to the relevant operation manual Automatic Mode Change When the PC is in RUN mode with a Programming Console connected to the peripheral port of the CPU Unit if a PT is connected to the CPU Unit s built in RS 232C port or either of the ports of a CQM1H SCB41 using Host Link mode the following message will be displayed at the Programming Console indicating that a password is required to continue operation using the Programming Con sole This is because in order to write data to the CPU Unit the PT changed the operation mode from RUN mode to MONITOR mode To continue operation using the Programming Console it is necessary to input the password again Inputting the Password e The mode will not be changed if the PT is connected via an NT Link e When a Programming Device installed on a computer is connected to the peripheral port the display at the computer for the CPU Unit s operation mode will simply change from RUN to MONITOR 129 SECTION 5 Overview of Operation This section gives a general overview of CQM1H operation and includes details on the internal structure of the CPU Unit and describes the di
54. OFF only as long as the key is held down the original status will return one cycle after the key is re leased 3 Press the SHIFT SET or SHIFT RESET Keys to maintain the status of the bit after the key is released In this case the force set status is indicated by an S and the force reset status is indicated by an R To return the bit to its original status press the NOT Key or perform the Clear Force Set Reset operation Refer to 7 3 25 Clear Force Set Reset for de tails Forced status will also be cleared in the following cases a When the PC s operating mode is changed although the forced status will not be cleared when the mode is changed between PROGRAM and MONITOR if SR 25211 is ON Programming Console Operations Section 7 3 b When the PC stops because a fatal error occurred c When the PC stops because of a power interruption 7 3 25 Clear Force Set Reset This operation is used to restore the status of all bits which have been force set or reset It is possible in MONITOR or PROGRAM mode only RUN MONITOR PROGRAM N Caution Before changing the contents of I O memory be sure that the changes will not cause equipment to operate unexpectedly or dangerously In particular take care when changing the status of output bits The PC continues to refresh I O bits even if the PC is in PROGRAM mode so devices connected to output points on the Output Units may operate unexpectedly 1 2 3 1 Press the CLR
55. PC System Glossary output point output signal overflow overseeing overwrite parity parity check PC PC configuration PC System PCB PC Setup Peripheral Device peripheral servicing port positive delay Power Supply Unit present value printed circuit board PROGRAM mode Programmable Controller The point at which an output leaves the PC System Output points correspond physically to terminals or connector pins A signal being sent to an external device Generally an output signal is said to exist when for example a connection point goes from low to high voltage or from a nonconductive to a conductive state The state where the capacity of a data storage location has been exceeded Part of the processing performed by the CPU Unit that includes general tasks required to operate the PC Changing the content of a memory location so that the previous content is lost Adjustment of the number of ON bits in a word or other unit of data so that the total is always an even number or always an odd number Parity is generally used to check the accuracy of data after being transmitted by confirming that the number of ON bits is still even or still odd Checking parity to ensure that transmitted data has not been corrupted See Programmable Controller The arrangement and interconnections of the Units that are put together to form a functional PC With building block PCs all of the Units c
56. Procedure Use the following procedure to replace the battery You must complete this pro cedure within five minutes after turning OFF the power to the CQM1H to ensure memory backup 1 2 3 1 o Turn OFF the power to the CQM1H If the CQM1H has not been ON turn it ON for at least five minutes and then turn it OFF Note If power is not turned ON for at least five minutes before replacing the battery the capacitor that backs up memory when the battery is removed will not be fully charged and memory may be lost before the new battery is inserted Open the compartment on the upper left of the CPU Unit and carefully draw out the battery Remove the battery connector Connect the new battery place it into the compartment and close the cover The battery error will automatically be cleared when a new battery is inserted N WARNING Never short circuit the battery terminals never charge the battery never disassemble the battery and never heat or incinerate the battery Doing any of these may cause the battery to leak burn or rupturing resulting in injury fire and possible loss of life or property 225 Appendix Preparing Cables for Inner Boards This appendix describes methods for creating CN1 and CN2 cables for the following Inner Boards The methods are the same for all the Boards e CQM1H CTB41 High speed Counter Board e CQM1H PLB21 Pulse I O Board e CQM1H ABB21 Absolute Encoder Interface Board
57. SHIFT Key first 146 Connecting the Programming Console Section 7 2 Key Functions Key Normal input Function code The following table lists the basic uses of the Programming Console keys SHIFT Key input SFT SFT 10 instruction NOT NC condition or differentiated instruction SHIFT Shift mode AND instruction OR instruction COUNTER instruction CNT or counter address Q gt 4 Lo L TR bits x m z rc D LR address Indirect EM address HR address AR address Normal input SHIFT Key input LD instruction OUT instruction OUT 04 TIMER instruction TIM TIM or timer address em DM address EM address DM cu_ Indirect DM address IR SR address xDM cont Constant Bit address EXT Expansion function Data change 5 o x O Search operation SET Force setting a bit DEL Deletion Monitoring D lt 3 g m z J Force resetting a bit Insertion INS Clearing the display or CLR canceling an operation Verifications Hoe VER Writing Moving to previous memory bit or word address Upward differentiation Moving to next memory bit or word address Downward differentiation n gt ao o z m Inputting digits 0 to 9 Inputting hexadecimal digits A to F
58. Specifications Four pulse inputs and four external outputs Mountable slot Slot 1 left slot Slot 2 right slot Pulse I O Board CQM1H PLB21 Two pulse inputs and two pulse outputs Absolute Encoder Interface Board CQM1H ABB21 Two absolute encoder inputs Analog Setting Board CQM1H AVB41 Four analog settings YES See note YES See note Analog I O Board CQM1H MAB42 Four analog inputs and two analog outputs No YES Serial Communications Board 90 CQM1H SCB41 One RS 232C port and one RS 422A 485 port YES No Inner Boards Section 3 4 Note The Analog Setting Board cannot be mounted in both slots at the same time CQM1H CTB41 CQM1H PLB21 CQM1H ABB21 High speed Counter Board Pulse I O Board Absolute Encoder Interface Board CN1 i Pulse inputs 7 CN1 CNI anche ph Encoder input 1 Encoder input 1 CN1 6 Pulse inputs CN1 CN1 Sang Encoder input 2 Encoder input 2 CQM1H AVB41 CQM1H MAB42 CQM1H SCB41 Analog Setting Board Analog I O Board Serial Communications Board g CN1 Analog inputs RS 232C port Analog setting 0 1to4 Anal ing 1 pared oe ae nalog setting Analog outputs Analog setting 3 1 and2 RS 422A 484 port CQM1H CPU51 CPU61 CPU Unit 91 Products for Expansion I O Blocks Section 3 5 3 5 Products for Expansion I O Blocks An Expansion I O Block can be connected to enable connecting more than 11 Units or tw
59. Unit Wiring Input Devices When connecting an external device with a DC output to a DC Input Unit wire the device as shown in the following table 120 Wiring and Connections 4 7 Device Circuit Diagram Contact output NPN open collector Sensor power supply Output OV NPN current output Constant current circuit Output Use the same power supply for the input and sensor Sensor power OV supply PNP current output Sensor power supply Voltage output KL lov Output Sensor power Terminal Block I O Units with Terminal Block supply The I O Unit s terminal blocks are removable Make sure that the connector tabs are locked in the vertical position as shown in the following diagram Although 121 Wiring and Connections Section 4 7 Note Crimp Connectors Note N Caution O Units with Connectors 122 the terminal block position of the CQM1 0C224 is different the removal method is the same Confirm that the terminal block is securely locked before use To remove the terminal block push the connector tabs to the sides and lift the terminal block off the connector as shown in the following diagram Open this tab as widely as necessar
60. V DC 19 _4 50 30 MA min NPN open collector 30 mA 5 to 24 V DC 10 NPN open collector 7 mA 5 to 24 V DC 10 0 1 mA max 0 4 V max Max output frequency External power supply Max switching capacity Min switching capacity Leakage current Residual voltage Pulse output specifications Min pulse width ON OFF Pulse Switching current Load power supply voltage frequency 7 to 30 mA 5 V DC 10 7 to 30 MA 24 V DC 10 _15 tON tOFF tON tOFF 10 kpps max 49 5 us min 48 5 us min 49 6 us min 46 0 us min 30 kpps max 19 5 us min 18 5 us min 19 6 us min 16 0 us min 50 kpps max 9 5 us min 8 5 us min 9 6 us min 6 0 us min 8 3 Absolute Encoder Interface Board 8 3 1 Model 8 3 2 Functions Absolute High speed Counter with Interrupt Function Note Specifications ee Encoder a e H ABB21 2 inputs for absolute encoders Interface Board The Absolute Encoder Interface Board is an Inner Board that counts two gray binary code inputs from an absolute ABS rotary encoder The Absolute Encoder Interface Board reads binary gray codes inverted binary codes input from an absolute encoder through ports 1 and 2 at a maximum counting rate of 4 kHz and performs processing according to the input values Operating Modes BCD Mode and 360 Mode Resolutions One of the following can be set 8 bits 0 to 255 10 bits 0 to 1023 or 12 bi
61. V2 4 V2 wetter eee 15 VI 8 vi 8 5 8 Specifications _ Analog output 2 Analog output 1 Current Outputs 0 to 20 mA Analog I O Board CN2 Pin No 10 12 3 12 ne Analog output 2 14 11 7 it _ Analog output 1 I shies Item Specifications Name Analog I O Board Model number CQM1H MAB42 Applicable CPU Unit CQM1H CPU51 61 Unit classification CQM1H series Inner Board Mounting locations and number of Boards 1 Board in Inner Board slot 2 right slot Analog inputs 4 inputs Refer to Analog Inputs below for a details Analog outputs 2 outputs Refer to Analog Outputs below for a details Isolation method Between inputs and PC Photocoupler isolation Between inputs No isolation Settings None Indicators 2 LED indicators on front panel Ready RDY and Error ERR Front connection section Connectors CN1 and CN2 Compatible connector Sockets amp connectors provided as standard accessories Current consumption Supplied from Power Supply Unit 5 V DC 400 mA max Dimensions 25 x 110 x 107 mm W x H x D Weight 100 g max Standard accessories 218 Sockets XM2D 1501 OMRON x 2 Hoods XM2S 1511 OMRON x 2 Analog I O Board Section 8 5 Analog Inputs Item Specifications Input signals
62. and 1 1 Data Link CQM1 CPU11 21 EV1 communications CQM1 CPU40 EV1 also CQM1H CPU11 None supports 1 1 Data Link NT Note Programming Con Hinke 1 t mode sole functions sup Note CQM1 CPU40 EV1 ported from a PT ex supports Program cept when pin 7 on the ming Console func DIP switch is OFF tions from a PT Serial Com Host Link no protocol 1 1 None munications Data Link NT Link 1 1 Board avail mode 1 N mode and able sepa protocol macro rately communications supported 1 RS 232C port and 1 RS 422A 48 5 port Serial communications No protocol modes Up to 256 bytes can be sent or received with special instruction Header codes and end codes can be set Transmission delay time setting available Host Link All of the CPU Unit s I O memory areas and the user s program can be accessed using Host Link commands NT Link 1 1 mode 1 N mode Data transfer is possible without program between the PC and an OMRON PT The ratio of PCs to PTs can be one to one or one to many The 1 N mode NT Link connections are possible only for the RS 232C port or RS 422A 485 port on the Serial Communications Board NT Link 1 1 mode only CQM1 CPU4 EV1 only Protocol macro Protocol macro communications supported using the RS 232C port or RS 422A 485 port on the Serial Communications Board CQM1H CPU51 61 only Sending and receiving data is possible using one instru
63. and words are being monitored the bits and words that do not appear on the display can be displayed by pressing the MONTR Key If the MONTR Key is pressed alone the display will shift to the right If more than six bits and words are input monitoring of the bit or word input first will be canceled 4 Press the CLR Key to stop monitoring the leftmost bit or word and clear it from the display CLR 5 Press the SHIFT CLR Keys to Note 1 The monitoring states can be retained for 6 bits and words 2 The PC s operating mode can be changed during the Bit Digit Word Moni tor Operation without changing the display by pressing the SHIFT Key first and then changing the mode end monitoring altogether 7 3 13 Binary Monitor This operation is used to monitor the ON OFF status of any word s 16 bits It is possible in any mode RUN MONITOR PROGRAM 1 2 3 1 Monitor the status of the desired word according to the procedure described in 7 3 12 Bit Digit Word Monitor The desired word should be leftmost on the display if 2 or more words are being monitored Word monitor 164 Programming Console Operations Section 7 3 2 Press the SHIFT and then the MONTR Key to begin binary monitoring The ON OFF status of the selected word s 16 bits will be shown along the bottom of the display A 1 indicates a bit is ON and a 0 indicates it is OFF SHI
64. baud rate BCD BCD calculation binary binary calculation binary coded decimal bit bit address Glossary Indirectly addressed DM area See indirect address and DM area A link created between two PCs to create common data in their LR areas See add count input An input signal used to increment a counter when the signal changes from OFF to ON A number used to identify the location of data or programming instructions in memory A logic operation whereby the result is true if and only if both premises are true In ladder diagram programming the premises are usually ON OFF states of bits or the logical combination of such states called execution conditions See data area and memory area A one or two letter prefix used to identify a memory area in the PC All memory areas except the IR and SR areas require prefixes to identify addresses in them A shift operation wherein the carry flag is included in the shift Short for American Standard Code for Information Interchange ASCII is used to code characters for output to printers and other external devices A PC data area allocated to flags and control bits An MS DOS file containing commands automatically executed at startup A copy made of existing data to ensure that the data will not be lost even if the original data is corrupted or erased A fundamental instruction used in a ladder diagram The data transmission speed between two devices in a system measured
65. by broken signal lines momentary power interruptions or other causes Application Precautions 5 e Fail safe measures must be taken by the customer to ensure safety in the event that outputs from Output Units remain ON as a result of internal circuit failures which can occur in relays transistors and other elements e Always turn ON power to the PC before turning ON power to the control sys tem If the PC power supply is turned ON after the control power supply tempo rary errors may result in control system signals because the output terminals on DC Output Units and other Units will momentarily turn ON when power is turned ON to the PC Do not turn OFF the power supply to the PC when data is being transferred In particular do not turn OFF the power supply when reading or writing a Memory Card Also do not remove the Memory Card when the BUSY indicator is lit To remove a Memory Card first press the memory card power supply switch and then wait for the BUSY indicator to go out before removing the Memory Card If the I O Hold Bit SR 25212 is turned ON the outputs from the PC will not be turned OFF and will maintain their previous status when the PC is switched from RUN or MONITOR mode to PROGRAM mode Make sure that the exter nal loads will not produce dangerous conditions when this occurs When op eration stops for a fatal error including those produced with the FALS 07 instruction all outputs from Output Unit will be t
66. code assignments F G fail safe circuits flicker output example force set reset clearing Programming Console Programming Console function codes reading and changing expansion instruction assignments ground precautions 245 H hexadecimal data converting displays Programming Console High speed Counter Board configuration connectors count modes external outputs functions installation pulse inputs specifications counters external outputs inputs Host Link Host Link System I O memory initializing T O Unit components types T O Units dimensions models terminal block removal weight inductive load surge suppressor initialization I O memory input devices wiring inrush current installation DIN Track fail safe circuits precautions instructions inserting and deleting Programming Console searching Programming Console J M Japanese messages change to English leakage current input maintenance battery replacement memory See I O memory user memory memory areas clearing Programming Console partial clear Memory Cassettes required EEPROMs 246 Index messages reading clearing mode changing the PC mode modifying binary data Programming Console data Programming Console hexadecimal BCD data Programming Console signed decimal data Programming Console SV Programming Console unsigned decimal data Programmi
67. computers Note Data links can be created with another CQM1H or with a CQM1 CPM1 CPM1A CPM2A CPM2C SRM1 C200HX HG HE or C200HS simply by making a 1 1 connection between the built in RS 232C ports in the CPU Units Network communications instructions such as SEND RECV and CMND ima Controller Link Unit Controller Link Unit CQM1H Data link CQM1H y L Ao Message com munications Controller Link Network Baud rate 2 Mbps transmission distance 1 km when baud rate is 500 kbps max No of nodes 32 A maximum of 8 000 words per node can be sent for the CQM1H Data exchange supported for CQM1 CQM1H CS1 C200HX HG HE and CVM1 CV series PCs Features Section 1 1 High speed Long distance Communications with CompoBus S A Wide Range of HMI Monitoring and Setting Methods A CompoBus S Master Unit can be included in the CQM1H High speed or long distance remote I O communications can be performed with CompoBus S Slaves The CompoBus S Master Unit is a Dedicated I O Unit for the CQM1H CompoBus S Master Unit CQM1H CompoBus S high speed or long distance remote 1 0 CompoBus S Slaves Remote 1 O Terminals Connector Terminals Sensor Terminals Analog Terminals etc Programming Devices and Programmable Terminals PTs can be connected to up to four ports two ports on the CPU Unit and two ports on a Serial Communica tions Board It is thus possible to set up a
68. connected and the maximum number of I O points i e allocated words that can be controlled are listed in the following table CPU Block Only CPU Unit No of I O Units and No of No of Inner Max I O points Dedicated I O Units Communications Boards allocated words Units CQM1H CPU61 11 max 1 max 2 max 512 32 words CQM1H CPU51 CQM1H CPU21 Connection not Connection 256 16 words CQM1H CPU11 supported not supported Note Number of I O points Number of input points lt 256 Number of output points lt 256 Communications Unit 11 Units max es CPU Unit i 1 j J jc Jj Jj 1 0 Jj Jj C Jj Jj 1 0 1 C N gt Q a 5 3 D D z Oo qp Sd e i Inner Boards 16 built in inputs 2 slots 1 word 18 System Configuration Section 1 2 CPU Block and Expansion I O Block CPU Unit No of I O Units and Dedicated I O No of No of Inner Max I O points Units see note 1 Communications Boards see note 2 CPU Block Expansion I O Units allocated Block words CQM1H CPU61 5 max 11 max 1 max 2 max 512 32 words CQM1H CPU51 CQM1H CPU21 Connection not Connection not 256 16 words CQM1H CPU11 supported supported Note 1 An Analog Power Supply Unit is counted as one Unit the same as I O Units and Dedicated I O Units 2 I O points I
69. contents of the Program Memory Displays the status of the 156 address and monitoring bit currently displayed bit in PROGRAM and MONITOR modes status Entering or editing programs Overwrites the contents of the current Program Memory to either input a 156 program for the first time or to change a program that already exists Instruction search Finds occurrences of the specified instruction in the program 160 Bit operand search Finds occurrences of the specified operand bit in the program 160 Inserting and deleting Inserts or deletes instructions from the program 161 instructions Checking the program Checks for programming errors and displays the program address and 162 error when errors are found Bit digit word monitor Monitors the status of up to 16 bits and words although only 3 can be 163 shown on the display at one time Multiple address monitor Monitors the status of up to 6 bits and words simultaneously 164 Binary monitor Monitors the ON OFF status of any word s 16 bits 164 Three word monitor Monitors the status of three consecutive words 165 Signed decimal monitor Converts the contents of the specified word from signed hexadecimal 166 two s complement format to signed decimal for display 151 Programming Console Operations Section 7 3 Function Differentiation monitor Monitors the up or down differentiation status of a parti
70. counters 1 to 4 Signals Encoder inputs A and B pulse input Z Input voltage Switched by means of input voltage switch on the Board Specified separately for phases A B and Z 24 V DC 10 RS 422A line driver AM26LS31 or equivalent Phase A and B Phase Z 10 mA typical 13 mA typical Phase A and B Phase Z 5 mA typical 8 mA typical Input current ON voltage 19 6 V DC min 18 6 V DC min OFF voltage 4 0 V DC min 4 0 V DC min 193 High speed Counter Board Section 8 1 Item Specifications Min response pulse 50 kHz setting Encoder inputs A and B Waveform of encoder inputs A and B Input rise fall time 3 us max 50 kHz pulse with duty factor of 50 3 us max 3 us max Relationship between phases A and B when phase differential input is used T1 T2 T3 T4 4 5 us min At least 4 5 us must be provided to allow Phase A Phase B change 20 us min Phase A Phase B T2 T4 Waveform of encoder input Z Sensor input Pulse width must be 90 us min 90 us min Encoder inputs A and B Waveform of terminal 50 kHz pulse with duty factor of 50 Relationship between phases A and B when phase differential input is used T1 T2 T3 T4 4 5 us min At least 4 5 us must be provided to allow Phase A lt Phase B change Phase A Phase B Waveform of encoder input Z Sensor input Pulse width must be 90 us min 90 us min
71. data in a word to unsigned decimal for display The operation can be executed while using I O monitor ing multiple address monitoring or three word monitoring RUN MONITOR PROGRAM 1 Monitor the word that is to be used for decimal monitor without sign During multiple address monitoring the leftmost word will be converted Multiple address monitoring 2 Press the SHIFT TR NOT Keys to display the leftmost word as unsigned decimal 3 Press the EXT Key to display double word data The following display would appear if IR 201 contained 000 At this point the contents of the displayed word can be changed with an un signed decimal input Refer to 7 3 22 Unsigned Decimal Data Modification Section 7 3 Programming Console Operations 4 Press the CLR Key or the SHIFT TR Keys to end the unsigned decimal dis play and return to normal monitoring You will need to press the CLR Key twice if double word monitoring has been used 7 3 17 Differentiation Monitor 1 2 3 This operation is used to monitor the up or down differentiation status of a particular bit When detected the up or down differentiation will be displayed and the buzzer will sound It is possible in any mode RUN MONITOR PROGRAM 1 Monitor the status of the desired bit according to the procedure described in 7 3 12 Bit Digit Word Monitor lf 2 or more bits are being monitored the de sire
72. each IL 02 has a unique ILC 03 Although this error message will appear if more than one IL 02 is used with the same ILC 03 the program will executed as written Make sure your program is written as desired before proceeding JMP JME ERR JMP 04 and JME 05 are not used in pairs Make sure your program is written as desired before proceeding SBN RET ERR RET 93 has not been used properly or the relationship between SBN 92 and RET 93 is not correct Correct the program 181 Programming Example Section 7 4 Message Meaning and appropriate response COIL DUPL The same bit is being controlled i e turned ON and or OFF by more than one instruction e g OUT OUT NOT DIFU 13 DIFD 14 KEEP 11 SFT 10 or the same timer or counter number has been used more than once Although controlling bit status from more than one instruction is allowed for certain instructions check instruction requirements to confirm that the program is correct or rewrite the program so that each bit is controlled by only one instruction JMP UNDEFD _ JME 05 has been used with no JMP 04 with the same jump number Add a JMP 04 with the same number or delete the JME 05 that is not being used SBS UNDEFD A subroutine exists that is not called by SBS 91 Program a subroutine call in the proper place or delete the subroutine if it is not required 7 4 6 Test Run in MONITOR Mode Switch the CQM1H in MONI
73. fall time 3 usec max 50 kHz pulse with duty factor of 50 20 us min 10 us min 3 us max 3 us max Relationship between phases A and B when phase differential input is used Phase B OF Pulse Output Specifications Pulse Output Functions 206 20 us min Pulse input Z Pulse width must be 0 1 ms min 0 1 ms min T1 T2 T3 T4 4 5 us min At least 4 5 us must be allowed between Phase A and Phase B changes Pulse output functions are determined by the output method as indicated below Item Specifications Fixed duty factor Variable Without Same Separate duty factor trapezoidal acceleration acceleration acceleration deceleration deceleration deceleration rates rates Instruction PULS 65 PLS2 PULS 65 PWM SPED 64 ACC Output 10 Hz to 50 kHz 0 Hz to 100 Hz to 91 6 Hz frequency 10 Hz to 20 kHz for 50 KHz 50 KHz 1 5 KHz stepping motor 5 9 KHz Output 1 or 10 Hz 10 Hz frequency pitch Duty factor 50 fixed 1 to 99 No of output pulses 1 to 16777215 Acceleration Deceleration rate 10 Hz to 2 kHz every 4 08 ms Absolute Encoder Interface Board Section 8 3 Output Specifications Item Specifications No of pulse outputs Signal names 2 outputs Ports 1 and 2 Pulse outputs 1 and 2 CW and CCW pulse output 50 kHz 20 kHz with stepping motor connected 5 V DC 5 30 mA min 24
74. following Programming Devices can be used with the CQM1H e Programming Consoles e Support Software CX Programmer V1 2 or higher see note 1 SYSMAC CPT see note 2 SYSMAC Support Software SSS see note 2 Note 1 None of the CQM1H series CPU Units can connect to CX Programmer V1 1 or lower 2 Refer to Restrictions when Using Support Software under 3 6 2 Support Software when using the SYSMAC CPT or SYSMAC Support Software 3 6 1 Programming Consoles There are two Programming Consoles that can be used with the CQM1H The CQM1H PROO1 E CQM1 PROO01 E and C200H PRO27 E These Program ming Consoles are shown below CQM1H PRO01 E Programming Console LCD area Peripheral port Mode switch Operation keys 93 Programming Devices Section 3 6 CQM1 PRO01 E Programming Console Connection LCD area Mode switch A ae Nee cee Operation keys E4 F5 6 set peL wom b1 02 93 mest ns 9 BRE ver ware y CQM1 PROO1 E Programming Console Peripheral port Cable included with CQM1 PROO01 E Programming Console CS1W CN114 cable length 0 05 m C200H PRO27 E Programming Console CQM1 PRO27 Cable provided with Pro gramming Console lt i CS1W CN114 CQM1H Peripheral port Cable length 0 5 m LCD area Mode switch Operation keys CS1W CN224 Cable length 2 0 m CS1W CN624 Cable length 6 0 m Casette jacks
75. for 32 point Input and Output Units 0 4 8 I O Unit Wiring Precautions 0 00 eects 4 9 Connecting Programming Devices 00 cece eects 4 10 Connecting Programmable Terminals 0 00 c eee ee eee eee 103 Fail safe Circuits Section 4 1 4 1 Fail safe Circuits Z N WARNING Supply Power to the PC before Outputs Managing PC Errors Managing Output Malfunctions Emergency Stop Circuit 104 Note You must set up safety circuits outside of the PC to prevent dangerous condi tions in the event of errors in the PC or external power supply Take any safety measures necessary outside of the PC to ensure the safety of the system in the event of an error due to PC malfunction or external factors Observe the following precautions Failure to do so could lead to serious or possibly fatal injury e Provide interlock circuits limit circuits emergency stop circuits and similar safety measures in external circuits i e not only in the Programmable Con troller e Operation will stop and all outputs will turn OFF when the PC detects an error or when a FALS 07 fatal error instruction is executed You must take any safety measures necessary outside of the PC to ensure the safety of the sys tem in the event that all outputs turn OFF e It is possible for an output to remain ON or OFF due to a malfunction in the internal circuits of an Output Unit such as a relay or trans
76. is mounted to the CQM1H Remote Console Connected to a Sensor Unit for the CQM1 TU001 adjustment of the sensitivities of the modules incorporated by the Sensor Unit reading and changing of the set value and teaching Cable length 3 m 14 System Configuration Section 1 2 Model number Specifications Input words Output words allocated allocated Temperature Control Units 2 thermocouple inputs K J ON OFF or advanced PID control transistor NPN output 2 loops CQM1 TCO001 from IR 001 1 or 2 words from IR 100 1 or 2 words 2 thermocouple inputs K J ON OFF or advanced PID control transistor NPN output 2 loops CQM1 TC002 1 or 2 words 1 or 2 words 2 platinum resistance thermometer inputs Pt JPt ON OFF or advanced PID control transistor NPN output 2 loops CQM1 TC101 1 or 2 words 1 or 2 words 2 platinum resistance thermometer inputs Pt JPt ON OFF or advanced PID control transistor NPN output 2 loops CQM1 TC102 1 or 2 words 1 or 2 words 2 thermocouple inputs K J T L R S B ON OFF or advanced PID control transistor NPN output 4 loops CQM1 TC201 1 word 1 word 4 thermocouple inputs K J T L R S B ON OFF or advanced PID control transistor PNP output 4 loops CQM1 TC202 1 word 1 word 4 platinum resistance thermometer inputs Pt JPt ON OFF or advanced PID control transistor
77. max Dimensions 25 x 110 x 107 mm Wx Hx D Weight 90 g max Standard accessories Sockets XM2D 1501 OMRON x 2 Hoods XM2S 1511 OMRON x 2 High speed Counter Specifications Counter Specifications Item Specifications Number of counters 4 counters ports Input Modes Set in the PC Setup Differential Phase Inputs Up Down Pulse Inputs Pulse Direction Inputs Input Port1 Port2 Ports 8 7 15 14 6 5 Phase A input Increment pulse input Pulse input 6 5 13 12 4 3 Phase B input Decrement pulse input Direction input 4 3 11 10 2 1 Phase Z input Reset input Reset input Input method Switching between inputs using phase difference multiples of 1x 2x or 4x Set in the PC Setup 2 single phase inputs Single phase pulse and direction inputs Count frequency Set for each port in the PC Setup 25 kHz default or 250 kHz 50 kHz default or 500 kHz 50 kHz default or 500 kHz Count value 192 Linear Mode Ring Mode 8388608 to 8388607 BCD F8000000 to O7FFFFFF Hex 00000000 to 08388607 BCD 00000000 to 07 FFFFFF Hex Maximum value can be set to within the range 1 to 08388607 BCD 1 to O7FFFFFF Hex with CTBL 63 High speed Counter Board Section 8 1 Item Specifications Storage location of counter PV When mounted in slot 1 Port 1 IR 2
78. occur when the program is first started 175 Programming Example Section 7 4 7 4 2 7 4 3 176 Programming Console Error Messages Error messages will be displayed on the Programming Console whenever an er ror is made in operation Refer to the following table for operation errors and corrections Refer to the operation manual for messages from other Program ming Devices Error message Correction CHK MEM ROM Pin 1 of the CPU Unit s DIP switch is ON write protect Turn OFF pin 1 to enable writing PRGM OVER The last program memory address is not NOP making further program input impossible Clear the program after the END 01 instruction ADR OVER The set address exceeds the last address in the UM Area Reset the address SET ERROR FALS 00 has been input 00 cannot be input Reinput the instruction correctly 1 0 No ERR I O data has been input outside the permissible range Confirm the input ranges for the instructions and input the correct values Example Program The following ladder program will be used to demonstrate how to write a pro gram with the Programming Console This program makes output IR 10000 flicker ON OFF one second ON one second OFF ten times after input IR 00000 is turned ON Start input 00000 C000 00000 02000 02000 T002 00004 02000 T002 00007 02000 T001 m Count input 00010 Reset input 00014 00017
79. of the CQM1H to the host computer using TXD instructions to initiate communications from the PC This mode is supported by the peripheral port and the RS 232C port on the CPU 23 Expanded System Configuration Section 1 3 No protocol Communications 1 1 Data Link System 24 Note Unit as well as the RS 232C port and RS 422A 485 port on the Serial Commu nications Board Host computer PT For details on cables required to connect the host computer to the CQM1H in Host Link Mode refer to 3 6 Programming Devices The TXD and RXD instructions in the ladder program can be used with no communications protocol or conversion to transfer data with a general pur pose external device equipped with an RS 232C port It is possible to attach a start code to the beginning and an end code to the end of data or specify the amount of data when sending receiving Unlike protocol macro it is not pos sible to construct a communications frame message according to the commu nications specifications of the communications partner Also there are no pro cedures for retry processing data format conversion processing or branch proc essing for receiving data This communications mode is thus used for simple data transmissions such as inputting bar code data and outputting printer data This mode is supported by the peripheral port and the RS 232C port on the CPU Unit as well as the RS 232C
80. of the inductive load current Inductive load This time lag between the moment The reversed dielectric strength value the circuit is opened and the moment of the diode may be two to three times the load is reset caused by this larger than the supply voltage if the method is longer than that caused by surge protector is applied to electronic the CR method circuits with low circuit voltages Varistor method The varistor method prevents the imposition of high voltage between the contacts by using the constant voltage characteristic of the varistor There is time lag between the moment the circuit is opened and the moment the load is reset Inductive load If the supply voltage is 24 or 48 V insert the varistor in parallel with the load If the supply voltage is 100 to 200 V insert the varistor between the contacts xix Conformance to EC Directives 6 XX When switching a load with a high inrush current such as an incandescent lamp suppress the inrush current as shown below Countermeasure 1 Countermeasure 2 R OUT OUT K R cs i COM COM Providing a dark current of approx Providing a limiting resistor one third of the rated value through an incandescent lamp SECTION 1 Introduction This section describes the CQM1H s special features and functions describes the system configurations and outlines the st
81. port and RS 422A 485 port on the Serial Commu nications Board pee TXD or RXD instructions Bar code reader Printer If two PCs are linked one to one by connecting them together through their RS 232C ports they can share up to 64 words of LR area One of the PCs will serve as the master and the other as the slave One of the following three ranges of words can be set to be linked LR 00 to LR 63 LR 00 to LR 31 or LR 00 to LR 15 A 1 1 Data Link communications system can be created between the CQM1H and another CQM1H or between the CQM1H and the CQM1 C200HX HG HE C200HS CPM1 CPM1A CPM2A CPM2C or SRM1 V2 The link area will always be LR 00 to LR 15 16 words for 1 1 Data Link commu nications with the CPM1 CPM1A CPM2A CPM2C or SRM1 V2 CQM1H Master Unit CQM1H Slave Unit Master area Master area sending receiving Slave area Slave area receiving sending Expanded System Configuration Section 1 3 NT Link System This mode is supported by the RS 232C port on the CPU Unit as well as the RS 232C port and RS 422A 485 port on the Serial Communications Board CQM1H CQM1H or another C series PC ol h t t eee RS 232C cable Wiring Connect the Units with the cables wired as shown below CQM1H CQM1H or another C series PC Signa
82. puua i Keys to specify the i Hk Ea mm e comt AR area Hk Ea GE comt l ett i 5 DEL MONTR ES e i e fey a es apes E Ry ES Fe cee Sree ee weet e Different Keys The following keys are labeled differently on the CQM1H PROO1 E CQM1 PROO01 E and the C200H PRO27 E but the operation of the keys in each pair is identical CQM1 PRO01 E Keys C200H PRO27 E Keys Note To specify the AR area use SHIFT HR Keys for the C200H PRO27 E and use SHIFT AR HR Keys for the CQM1H PROO1 E or CQM1 PROO1 E Using Programming Programming Console keys are used either individually or in combination with Console Keys the SHIFT Key The normal and SHIFT Key input of each key is written on the key Input with SHIFT Key Input with SHIFT Key AR A FUN Normal input HR Normal input 0 Normal input Normal Input The normal input for the key is written in the middle or at the bottom of the key SHIFT Key Input The input for the key after the SHIFT Key has been pressed is written at the top of the key or in the upper left corner of the key It is not necessary to keep the SHIFT Key pressed down when pressing the next key A shift symbol will be displayed in the upper right corner of the display when the SHIFT Key is pressed The shift input can be cleared by pressing the SHIFT Key again Shift input p symbol The operating mode can be changed without changing the display by pressing the
83. sent to a computer from the PC Host Link commands FINS commands Commands can be sent to a computer from the PC Protocol macro General purpose external devices Sending and receiving messages communications frames according to the communications specifications of external devices SYSMAC PST is used to create protocols by setting various parameters PMCR instruction No protocol communications General purpose external No protocol TXD and RXD devices communications with instructions general purpose devices 1 1 Data Link C series PCs Shared link words between None PCs NT Link 1 1 OMRON Programmable High speed one to one None Terminals communications with a Programmable Terminal using direct access NT Link 1 N OMRON Programmable High speed one to one or None Terminals one to many communications with Programmable Terminals using direct access Note The peripheral bus mode is used for Programming Devices other than Programming Consoles e g CX Programmer Host Link System SYSMAC WAY Mode 1 N The Host Link System allows the I O memory of the PC to be read written and the operating mode to be changed from a host computer personal computer or Programmable Terminal by executing Host Link commands Other Program ming Devices can also be connected via a computer using this mode Alterna tively it is also possible to send data from the CPU Unit
84. serial com Note munications and there is no data compatibility between them The CX Protocol is used to create sets of data transmission procedures called protocols for general purpose external devices according to the communica tions specifications of the general purpose external devices Communications must be half duplex and must use start stop synchronization The protocols that have been created are recorded in a Serial Communications Board enabling data to be sent to and received from the external devices by simply executing the PMCR instruction in the CPU Unit Protocols for data communications with OMRON devices such as Temperature Controllers Intelligent Signal Proces sors Bar Code Readers and Modems are supported as standard protocols see note 1 These protocols can be changed to suit user needs Protocol mac ros are supported by the RS 232C port and RS 422A 485 port on the Serial Communications Board see note 2 1 The standard protocols are provided as standard features with the CX Pro tocol and Serial Communications Boards Expanded System Configuration Section 1 3 2 Protocol macros not supported by the CPU Unit s built in ports Eas PMCR instruction User defied messages Communications frames fe et Serial Communications Board General purpose external device Note CompoWay F Host Function A CQM1H CPU Unit can operate as a host to send CompoWay F commands to OMRON compo
85. sette Write protecting EEPROM or Flash Memory Cassettes EEPROM Memory Casettes EEPROM Memory Cassettes have a write protect switch that can be used to prevent data on the Cassette from being deleted or overwritten The switch is 80 CPU Units Section 3 1 shown in the following diagram Turn ON the switch to write protect the Cas sette Turn OFF the switch to write data Writable Write protected Note 1 Turn OFF power to the CQM1H and remove the Memory Cassette to change the switch setting 2 AR 1302 will be ON when the Memory Cassette is write protected 3 The effective life of the EEPROM is 50 000 writes Data may become unsta ble if the memory is used after exceeding the effective life Flash Memory Casettes Flash Memory Cassettes have a write protect switch that can be used to prevent data on the Cassette from being deleted or overwritten The switch is shown in the following diagram Turn ON the switch to write protect the Cassette Turn OFF the switch to write data Pin 1 Protect Switch ON Write protected OFF Writable Pin 2 Leave set to OFF Note 1 Turn OFF power to the CQM1H and remove the Memory Cassette to change the switch setting 2 AR 1302 will be ON when the Memory Cassette is write protected 3 The effective life of the flash memory is 50 000 writes Data may become unstable if the memory is used after exceeding the effective life Mounting a Memory Slide the Memory Cass
86. the Clock This operation is used to read or set the CPU s clock in CQM1H CPU Units that are equipped with an internal clock The clock can be read in any mode but can be set in MONITOR or PROGRAM mode only Operation RUN MONITOR PROGRAM Read clock OK OK OK No OK OK Set clock 1 2 3 1 Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display 2 Press the FUN Key SHIFT Key and then the MONTR Key to display the date and time SHIFT MONTR 3 Press the CHG Key to change the date and or time CHG The digit that can be changed will flash If necessary input a new value with the Up and Down Arrow Keys or Numeric Keys Press the CHG Key to move the cursor to the next digit The following table shows the setting ranges for each value m Month Day Hour Minute Second Day otweek 00 to 99 01 to 12 01 to 31 00to23 00to 59 00to 59 Oto6 SUN to SAT 4 Press the WRITE Key to write the new value WRITE Press the CLR Key to return to the initial display 7 3 28 Displaying the Cycle Time This operation is used to display the current average cycle time scan time It is possible only in RUN or MONITOR mode while the program is being exe cuted RUN MONITOR PROGRAM 1 2 3 1 Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display 2 Press the MONTR Key to display the cycle time MONTR There might be differences in displayed va
87. ultimately stored in binary form four binary bits are often used to represent one decimal digit via a system called binary coded decimal Decreasing a numeric value usually by 1 A value automatically set by the PC when the user does not specifically set another value Many devices will assume such default conditions upon the application of power A number used as an operand for an instruction but that serves to define the instruction itself rather that the data on which the instruction is to operate Defin ers include jump numbers subroutine numbers etc The location where an instruction places the data on which it is operating as opposed to the location from which data is taken for use in the instruction The location from which data is taken is called the source An instruction that is executed only once each time its execution condition goes from OFF to ON Non differentiated instructions are executed for each scan as long as the execution condition stays ON An instruction used to ensure that the operand bit is never turned ON for more than one scan after the execution condition goes either from OFF to ON for a Differentiate Up instruction or from ON to OFF for a Differentiate Down instruc tion A unit of storage in memory that consists of four bits An operand that is used to designate the digit or digits of a word to be used by an instruction A rail designed to fit into grooves on various devices to allow the devices t
88. with PID 0 to 20 mA 0 to 10 V 33 Functions Listed by Purpose Purpose Unit Board Function Section 1 4 Details Serial Changing protocols CPU Unit STUP communications during operation e g to Host Link via modem Sending and receiving Serial Protocol macro messages according to Communications function the communications Board protocol of the communications partner Making one to one data CPU Unit or 1 1 data link links with other PCs Serial a Sending and receiving So No protocol data without protocol gar TXD 48 and no conversion RXD 47 Sending unsolicited PC initiated messages to a host communications computer TXD 48 Performing data NT Link 1 1 transfer with PT mode or 1 N Programmable Terminal mode available Network Making data links Controller Link Data links communications shared data area via Unit FA network Performing message Message communications communications sending and receiving SEND 90 data when necessary RECV 98 and via FA network CMND Remote programming Remote or monitoring of another programming PC on the network via a monitoring Host Link or a peripheral bus 1 O Reducing wiring using CompoBus S CompoBus S Acts as CompoBus S Master communications high speed ON OFF Master Unit Master with up to 64 inputs and bus in machine 64 outputs Machine modularization CompoBus D CompoBus D Act as
89. z014 N14 i O Kee oO Saz 17 MSs i E COM fg Ty COM y nc 19 19 Nc ne 20120 no 55 Output Unit Specifications CQM1 ID213 Section 2 2 CQmM1 ID214 Name 24 V DC 32 point Input Unit 24 V DC 32 point Input Unit Input Voltage 24V DC 10 _15 24 V DC 10 _4 5 Input 5 6 kQ 3 9 KQ Impedance Input Current 4 mA typical at 24 V DC 6 mA typical at 24 V DC ON Voltage 14 4 V DC min 15 4 V DC 3 5 mA min Current OFF Voltage 5 0 V DC max 5 0 V DC 1 mA max Current ON Delay Default 8 ms max can be set between 1 and Default 8 ms max can be set between 1 and 128 ms in PC Setup 128 ms in PC Setup OFF Delay Default 8 ms max can be set between 1 and Default 8 ms max can be set between 1 and 128 ms in PC Setup 128 ms in PC Setup No of Inputs 32 points 32 inputs common 1 circuit 32 points 32 inputs common 1 circuit Number of simultaneously ON inputs is limited by ambient temperature See diagrams after table Internal 5 V DC 170 mA max 5 V DC 170 mA max Current Consumption Weight 160 g max 160 g max Circuit i COM Configuration AE aA INOO eoe AIO As INO7 INO8 5 6 KQ ID213 LED y 3 9 KQ ID214 Inter nal 620 Q Circuit nt zg oO oO IN15 oO oO 5 6 kQ ID213 3 9kQ ID214 56 Outpu
90. 0 cece ccc eee eee TA Programming Example secs i eis oe GR aah Ris we eRe Ree ea SECTION 8 Inner Boards se Gado eee secs e ee eee eee sees 8 1 High speed Counter Board 0 0 0 cc eee ES 8522 Pule NO Board erre d a Ne ole a Gos bee le E a aa kb theg a a i 8 3 Absolute Encoder Interface Board n n annuun nunnana 8 4 Analog Setting Board 2 cece teens 8 5 Analog TO Board seeders arena Pee a Seb a a Fee eS Ge Se ood 8 6 Serial Communications Board 00 0 0 ccc eee eee eens SECTION 9 Battery Maintenance cs4 s20aisewsdvasra cas owars 9 1 Battery Replacement lt 5 c0 0e 58 08 soe cial es pe Do a eee ne egies 9 2 Battery Lite s rendieren oae enea tae teh ia ia i nt dl ach Bed 9 3 Replacement Procedure scires e a e e a AE Ar AE O Appendices A Preparing Cables for Inner Boards 0 0 00 Glossary Ca E E E E E E E E E O E E O E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E Index eeeeeeeee eoe55o5o oeeee0eee0e8 e0ecse0ec amp e3eoe53sc5c neeoee3eo0ee3eoeo3oxve3e3uexo3ee3ueoeee Revision History ssssssssssssssssseseseee viii About this Manual The CQM1H is a compact high speed Programmable Controller PC designed for advanced control operations in systems requiring from 16 to 256 I O points per PC There are two manuals describing the setup and operation of the CQM1H The CQM1H Operation Manual this manual and the CQM1H Pro gramming Manual Also available is the CQM1 series De
91. 01 leftmost digits and IR 200 rightmost digits Port 2 IR 203 leftmost digits and IR 202 rightmost digits Port 3 IR 205 leftmost digits and IR 204 rightmost digits Port 4 IR 207 leftmost digits and IR 206 rightmost digits When mounted in slot 2 Port 1 IR 233 leftmost digits and IR 232 rightmost digits Port 2 IR 235 leftmost digits and IR 234 rightmost digits Port 3 IR 237 leftmost digits and IR 236 rightmost digits Port 4 IR 239 leftmost digits and IR 238 rightmost digits Data format 8 digit BCD or 8 digit Hex Set in the PC Setup Bits 00 to 03 of DM 6602 DM 6611 Linear Mode F8388608 to 8388607 BCD Leftmost digit is F Hex for negative numbers F8000000 to O7FFFFFF Hex Ring Mode 00000000 to 08388607 BCD 00000000 to O7FFFFFF Hex Up to 48 target values and external internal output bit patterns registered Up to 16 upper limits lower limits and external internal output bit patterns registered Phase Z Signal Software Reset A counter is reset on the first phase Z signal input after its Reset Bit see below is turned ON Software Reset A counter is reset when its Reset Bit see below is turned ON Reset Bits IR 21200 to IR 21203 For ports 1 to 4 in slot 1 AR 0500 to AR 0503 For ports 1 to 4 in slot 2 Control Target value match method Range comparison Counter reset method Pulse Input Specifications Number of pulse inputs 4 inputs Ports 1 to 4 High speed
92. 10 to 10 V 0 to 20 mA D A conversion time See note 2 1 7 ms max 2 points Resolution 1 4 095 1 2 047 Analog output setting storage words Analog output 1 IR 236 Analog output 2 IR 237 External output impedance 2 KQ min 350 Q max Setting data 12 bit binary data 10 to 10 V F800 to 07FF Hex Note Negative voltages outputs 10 V lt output voltage lt 0 V need to be stored as two s complements 11 bit binary data 0 to 20 mA 0000 to 07FF Hex 2342 C Overall precision 0 5 of FS See note 2 0 to 55 C Note 1 1 0 of FS Different terminals are used for each output allowing output signal ranges to be selected for each output The D A conversion time is the time taken to convert the data in the CPU Unit and output it At least one cycle is required to transfer the data from the CPU Unit to the Analog I O Board The overall precision is the precision with respect to full scale 219 Analog I O Board Section 8 5 8 5 9 Internal Circuit Configuration Analog Inputs Analog I O Board Connect only when itd 250 using current input ne i v 220 Analog Outputs Analog I O Board 0 v lt b v na Voltage output Common for each output l Saci Qupu 4 Serial Communications Board Section 8 6 8 6 Serial Communications Board This section provides an introduction to the Serial Communications Board De t
93. 12 V DC Pulse input 10 Encoder input A 12 V DC 11 Encoder input B 12 V DC 12 Common output 0 V Pulse output 13 CCW pulse output with 1 6 kQ resistance 14 CW pulse output PWM output with 1 6 kQ resistance 15 Power supply for output Hood Not used Note Refer to Appendix A Preparing Cables for Inner Boards for information about us ing a compatible connector XM2D 1501 Socket with XM2S 1511 Hood to construct a cable 199 Pulse I O Board Section 8 2 8 2 7 Wiring Examples Pulse Input Connections port Input Mode Connect the encoder output to CN1 and CN2 as shown below according to the CN1 pins CN2 pins Signal name Encoder output Port 1 Port 2 Differential Pulse Direction Up Down Mode Phase Mode Mode 3 10 3 10 Encoder input A Encoder Phase A Directional signal Decrement pulse input input input 4 11 4 11 Encoder input B Encoder Phase B Pulse input Increment pulse input input Differential Phase Mode Pulse Direction Mode Up Down Mode Encoder input A 1 Encoder input A Encoder input A Phase A Direction input DOWN input 1 Encoder Input B y Encoder input B M Encoder input B Phase B Pulse input v v y v y UP input v v vey VN ve ee oe 1 2 3 2 1 T 7 H 2 1 12345678765432 ra Noe Ne Ne Increment Decrement Increment Decrement Increment Decrement Note The function of encoder inputs A and B in Pulse Direction Mode and Up D
94. 2 Mei Mo Motor counterclockwise This circuit prevents outputs MC1 and MC2 from both being ON at the same time even if IR 10001 and IR 10002 are both ON so the motor is protected even if the PC is programmed improperly or malfunctions 4 2 Installation Precautions When installing the CQM1H in a control panel observe the following points 105 Installation Precautions Section 4 2 Ambient Temperature Fan Control panel K N Louver The ambient temperature range in which the CQM1H can be used is 0 to 55 C 0 to 45 C if a Programming Console is connected to the CPU Unit Use the CQM1H in a well ventilated area Do not mount the CQM1H directly above heaters transformers large capacity resistors or any other devices that radiate a large amount of heat energy If the ambient temperature is higher than 55 C install a fan or cooler as shown in the above diagram so that the temperature is maintained at a maximum of 55 C Maintenance Do not install the CQM1H close to high voltage or power devices External Wiring Observe the following precautions for external wiring e When multi conductor signal cable is being used avoid combining I O wires and other control wires in the same cable e If wiring racks are parallel allow at least 300 mm 12 inches between the racks e Run CQM1H power supply lines and power cables 400 V 10 A max or 220 V 20 A max as shown in the following diagram Low current cables
95. 256 points and the data memory capacity to 6 Kwords of DM and 6 Kwords of EM from 6 Kwords of DM only Features Increased Functionality with Inner Boards Note e A 16 Kword Memory Cassette can be mounted in the CQM1H to handle large user programs or more data These features ensure a higher level of machine control and greater ease of use The CQM1H features Inner Boards that allow serial communications multi point high speed counter rotary encoder inputs simple positioning trapezoi dal acceleration deceleration pulse outputs soeed changes PWM variable duty factor pulse outputs absolute rotary encoder inputs analog I O 4 inputs 2 outputs and analog settings A Serial Communications Board High speed Counter Board Pulse I O Board Absolute Encoder Interface Board Analog I O Board and Analog Setting Board are available These Inner Boards can be combined mounted and used as re quired for the machine being controlled There are mounting restrictions for some of the Inner Boards The CPU Unit also provides16 built in inputs as well as high speed counter and input interrupt functions Pulse outputs are also supported using a standard Transistor Output Unit Simple Positioning Simple Speed Control High speed Counting Pulse I O Board D es E fa Rotary Encoder ference 25 kHz Lp SFLEP LA Two pulse outputs 50 kHz max High speed Counter
96. 26 Hex ASCII Display Change for details 3 Press the CLR Key to end three word monitoring and return to the normal monitoring display The rightmost word on the three word monitor display will be monitored 165 Programming Console Operations Section 7 3 7 3 15 Signed Decimal Monitor 1 2 3 This operation converts the contents of the word being monitored from signed hexadecimal two s complement format to signed decimal for display The operation can be executed while using I O monitoring multiple address monitoring or three word monitoring RUN MONITOR PROGRAM 1 Monitor the word that is to be used for decimal monitor with sign During mul tiple address or three word monitoring the leftmost word will be converted Multiple address monitor 2 Press the SHIFT TR Keys to display the leftmost word as signed decimal 3 Press the EXT Key to display double word data The following display would appear if DM 0201 contained FFFF At this point the contents of the displayed word can be changed with a signed decimal input Refer to 7 3 21 Signed Decimal Data Modification 4 Press the CLR Key or the SHIFT TR Keys to end the unsigned decimal dis play and return to normal monitoring You will need to press the CLR Key twice if double word monitoring has been used 7 3 16 Unsigned Decimal Monitor 166 1 2 3 This operation is used to convert hexadecimal
97. 4 High speed Counter Board Section 8 1 8 1 4 Applicable Inner Board Slots The High speed Counter Board can be installed in either slot 1 left slot or slot 2 right slot of the CQM1H CPU51 61 CPU Unit Both slots can be used at the same time Slot 1 Slot 2 ain a Le High speed Counter Board 8 1 5 Names and Functions One High speed Counter Board provides two connectors that accept high speed pulse inputs CN1 is used for inputs 1 and 2 and CN2 is used for inputs 3 and 4 CQM1H CTB41 High speed Counter Board CN1 Pulse input 1 Compatible connector Pulse input 2 Socket XM2D 1501 OMRON Hood XM2S 1511 OMRON CN2 Two Socket Hood sets are provided as Pulse input 3 standard accessories Pulse input 4 LED Indicators RDY Operational Green m Lit when pulse inputs can be received Pulse Inputs Orange A1 A2 A3 A4 Lit when phase A input is ON in port 1 2 3 or 4 B1 B2 B3 B4 Lit when phase B input is ON in port 1 2 3 or 4 Z1 Z2 Z3 Z4 Lit when phase Z input is ON in port 1 2 3 or 4 External Outputs Orange OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 Lit when the corresponding output 1 2 3 or 4 is ON _ ERR Error Red Lit when an error is detected in the PC Setup settings for the input pulse function or when an overflow or underflow occurs in the high speed count er s present value 185 High sp
98. 4 Analog Setting Board casas d sanan cnet eee eens gl OMode litinak ei aes E stan eae eee opie hd ae Pate ae as S422 PUNCHOR AAEE AE AE NEE a ee tl teh ate eo nanos Bae ina tdi 8 4 3 Applicable Inner Board Slots 0 0 0 0 c eee cee ee eee 8 4 4 Names and Functions 00 eee eee ee 8 4 5 Specieations 2 5 ee ae ee a ole es Se ae eed 857 Analog V O Boatd ay steers hha e a Soars om eG ee Oa RSA Eee eek Sa TAA IMOd el saith e E Sais nt aici eine tas Sis E O crag har 8 5 27 Functions a a i wk Sek is SEN BN BE BA Wan uh Brae Hae eS ag ae lace 8 5 3 System Configuration 0 ee eee 8 5 4 Applicable Inner Board Slot 0 0 eee ee eee 8 5 5 Names and Functions 0 00 ee cee eee nee 8 5 6 Pin Arrangement of Connectors CN1 and CN2 00 000005 8 5 7 Witing Examples sner seiirt sess soa Ro knee eee ee ee ees 8 5 8 Specifications i 0 ee nace eb othe ete ee nh bated ie 8 5 9 Internal Circuit Configuration 0 0 eee eee eee 8 6 Serial Communications Board 0 0 0 cece teens 8 6 1 Model Number e e eect ee 8 6 2 Serial Communications Boards 0 0 00 ccc eee eee 8 623 Features i eniem edt blade ten biden pe tee Lhe hee Ga 8 6 4 System Configuration 0 eee cee eee 183 High speed Counter Board Section 8 1 8 1 High speed Counter Board 8 1 1 Model Modei Specification High speed Counter Board CQM1H CTB41 Fou
99. 60 Hz 200 to 240 V AC 10 _15 50 60 Hz Input 20 KQ 50 Hz 17 KQ 60 Hz 38 KQ 50 Hz 32 kQ 60 Hz Impedance Input Current 5 mA typical at 100 V AC 6 mA typical at 200 V AC ON Voltage 60 V AC min 150 V AC min OFF Voltage 20 V AC max 40 V AC max ON Delay 35 ms max 35 ms max OFF Delay 55 ms max 55 ms max No of Inputs 8 points 8 points common 1 circuit 8 points 8 points common 1 circuit Internal Current 50 mA max at 5 V DC 50 mA max at 5 V DC Consumption Weight 210 grams max 210 grams max Circuit INO Input Ng Input Configuration peo LED TEE LED S w7 470 68kQ gt i S in7 8202 220kQ gt i g ms I adis Internal wy fan ene Internal Y eas K Circuits Y eZ d Circuits com l Eea com ee 0 15 uF 2 7 kQ 0 082 uF 8 2 kQ The polarity of the input power supply can be either The polarity of the input power supply can be either plus or minus The polarity of all the commons plus or minus The polarity of all the commons however must be the same however must be the same Terminal Cime lt Connections 2 0 a ee 00 od pra o AO A0 r B1 too Nt B1 SoM Ha ee ae Al IN4 B2 4 SO IN4 4 po
100. AAs Sas el sa ese a a 3 1 8 Built in RS 232C Port 0 cece eens 3 1 9 Inner Board Slots land2 0 eee ee 3 1 10 Built in Inputs s 05 6 ca eek penn tiie eR eas eal ea eee ale oa 3 2 Power Supply Unit es 3 6 eked eee that doit Sosa cdg etd ak n 3 2 1 Power Supply Unit Components 00 0 0 eee eee ee eee 3 2 2 Selecting a Power Supply Unit 0 0 00 eee eee 3 23 Umt Weights aoea eae a a aiel a ela ean a at 323 YOU DIS eri a eee fh SAREE ad SARS ER eae ore RA Ral A ES EE EDN JA Inner Boards es ds ta el oA Re AS ela teh ha aaa 3 5 Products for Expansion I O Blocks 0 0 0 eee eens 3 6 Programming Devices 0 0 cece eee een eee ene SE 3 6 1 Programming Consoles 0 00 eee eee eee eee 3 6 2 Support Softwares css ow bk ei ea ea ees SANSA e a ee 75 CPU Units Section 3 1 3 1 CPU Units There are four different CPU Units These are listed in the following table The four models can be thought of in two groups Those which support Inner Boards and a Communications Unit and those that do not There are also differences between the CPU Units in program capacity I O capacity the availability of EM and the availability of a built in RS 232C port Model 1 0 Program CPU DM EM Built in serial Inner Commu number capacity capacity Unit capacity capacity communications Boards nications points Kwords built in Kwords Kwords
101. AC WAY Note The Startup Mode in the above table is for when DM 6600 in the PC Setup is set to the default settings The Startup Mode depends on the type of cable used For details refer to 5 2 3 Startup Mode Peripheral port CPU Unit Connecting to Peripheral Port using RS 232C Cable When connecting an RS 232C cable to the peripheral port use the CS1W CN118 Connecting Cable as indicated below When the XW2Z 200S CV 500S CV is connected the Startup Mode when DM 6600 in the PC Setup is set to the default settings will be RUN mode Unit Port Serial Model number Length Comments Startup Mode communications see note mode CPU Unit Peripheral Peripheral bus or CS1W CN118 0 1 m Use aconnector RUN mode port Host Link XW2Z 200S CV 2mor5m for which ESD SYSMAC WAY 500S CV countermeasures have been taken with the XW2Z S CV CS1W CN118 PROGRAM XW2Z 200S V mode 500S V Note The Startup Modes in the above table are for when DM 6600 in the PC Setup is set to the default settings The Startup Mode depends on the type of connecting cable used For details refer to 5 2 3 Startup Mode TJ IBM PC AT or compatible computer CQM1H CPU Unit Peripheral port Connecting cables XW2Z 200S V CV 2 m Connecting to RS 232C Port using RS 232C XW2Z 500S V CV 5 m CS1W CN118 When connecting an IBM PC AT or compatible computer to the RS 232C po
102. Can be used as work bits when an Analog Setting Board is not mounted High speed Counter 0 PV note 1 32 bits IR 230 to IR 231 IR 23000 to IR 23115 Used to store the present values of high speed counter 0 Can be used as work bits when high speed counter 0 is not being used Inner Board slot 2 area IR 232 to IR 243 IR 23200 to IR 24315 These bits are allocated to the Inner Board mounted in slot 2 Can be used as work bits when a CQM1H CPU11 21 is being used or slot 2 is empty CQM1H CTB41 High speed Counter Board IR 232 to IR 243 12 words Used by the Board CQM1H ABB21 Absolute Encoder Interface Board IR 232 to IR 239 8 words Used by the Board IR 240 to IR 243 4 words Not used CQM1H PLB21 Pulse I O Board IR 232 to IR 239 8 words Used by the Board IR 240 to IR 243 4 words Not used CQM1H MAB42 Analog I O Board IR 232 to IR 239 8 words Used by the Board IR 240 to IR 243 4 words Not used SR 244 to SR 255 SR 24400 to SR 25515 These bits serve specific functions such as flags and control bits 46 HR 00 to HR 99 HR 0000 to HR 9915 These bits store data and retain their ON OFF status when power is turned off Section 2 1 Output Unit Specifications Data area Function AR area 448 AR 00 to AR 27 AR 0000 to AR 2715 These bits serve specific functions such as bits flags and control bits TR are
103. Cat No W363 E1 2 SYSMAC CQM1H Series CQM1H CPUL L Programmable Controllers CQM1H j_jLJLILIJ Inner Boards OPERATION MANUAL OMRON SYSMAC CQM1H Series CQM1H CPUL _ Programmable Controllers CQM1H OOUOUOL Inner Boards Operation Manual Revised May 2000 Notice OMRON products are manufactured for use according to proper procedures by a qualified operator and only for the purposes described in this manual The following conventions are used to indicate and classify precautions in this manual Always heed the information provided with them Failure to heed precautions can result in injury to people or dam age to property N DANGER Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which if not avoided will result in death or serious injury Z N WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided could result in death or serious injury Z N Caution Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided may result in minor or moderate injury or property damage OMRON Product References All OMRON products are capitalized in this manual The word Unit is also capitalized when it refers to an OMRON product regardless of whether or not it appears in the proper name of the product The abbreviation Ch which appears in some displays and on some OMRON products often means word and is abbreviated Wd in documentation in this sense The abbreviatio
104. Compatible connector Socket XM2D 1501 OMRON Hood XM2S 1511 OMRON Two Sockets and two Hoods are provided as standard with the Pulse I O Board CN2 Pulse input output 2 a le 198 Pulse I O Board Section 8 2 LED Indicators Ready green Lit when the pulse I O functions are ready Pulse output orange Refer to the following table Pulse input orange Refer to the following table Error red Lit when there is an error in the PC Setup settings for pulse I O or when operation is interrupted during pulse output Pulse Output Indicators Indicator Function Lit during CW pulse output to port 1 Lit during CCW pulse output to port 1 Lit during CW pulse output to port 2 Lit during CCW pulse output to port 2 Pulse Input Indicators Port1 Port2 Function Al A2 Lit when the phase A pulse input is ON a the port B1 B2 Lit when the phase B pulse input is ON at the port Z1 Z2 Lit when the phase Z pulse input is ON at the port 8 2 6 CN1 and CN2 Pin Arrangement The pin arrangements of connectors CN1 and CN2 are identical Pin Arrangement 1 Common input Pulse input Re 2 Pulse input Z 24 V DC O 3 Encoder input A 24 V DC O 4 Encoder input B 24 V DC O 5 CCW pulse output Pulse output O 6 CW pulse output PWM output O 7 5 V DC power supply for output 8 5 V DC power supply for output O 9 Pulse input Z
105. Controllers are used to automate control of external devices 239 Glossary programmed alarm programmed error programmed message Programming Console Programming Device PROM prompt protocol PV RAM RAS read only area refresh relay based control reserved bit reserved word reset response code response format response monitoring time 240 Although single unit Programmable Controllers are available building block Programmable Controllers are constructed from separate components Such Programmable Controllers are formed only when enough of these separate components are assembled to form a functional assembly An alarm given as a result of execution of an instruction designed to generate the alarm in the program as opposed to one generated by the system An error arising as a result of the execution of an instruction designed to gener ate the error in the program as opposed to one generated by the system A message generated as a result of execution of an instruction designed to gen erate the message in the program as opposed to one generated by the system The portable form of Programming Device for a PC A Peripheral Device used to input a program into a PC or to alter or monitor a program already held in the PC There are dedicated programming devices such as Programming Consoles and there are non dedicated devices such as a host computer Programmable read only memory a t
106. DB 5 as a word address as follows Input the final operand and then press the WRITE Key It isn t necessary to input leading zeroes EM DM WRITE 159 Programming Console Operations Section 7 3 7 3 8 Instruction Search 1 2 3 NOT 4 0 0 0 sRcH This operation is used to find occurrences of the specified instruction in the pro gram and is possible in any mode an momon PROGRAM The ON OFF status of any displayed bit will be shown if the PC is in RUN or MONITOR mode 1 Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display 2 Input the address from which the search will begin and press the Down Ar row aa It is not necessary to input eae zeroes 3 e Je instruction to a found and press the SRCH Key In this case the search is for OUT 01000 In this case the next OUT 01000 instruction is at address 200 as shown below 4 Press the Down Arrow Key to display the instruction s operands or press the SRCH Key to search for the next occurrence of the instruction 5 The search will continue until an END instruction or the end of Program Memory is reached In this case an END instruction was reached at ad dress 397 The total amount of memory used by the user program will also be displayed and is 0 4 Kwords in this case 7 3 9 Bit Operand Search 160 1 2 3 This operation is used to find o
107. DC 10 _s 5 0 Input Impedance 2 2 KQ Input Current 4 mA typical at 12 V DC ON Voltage 8 0 V DC min OFF Voltage 3 0 V DC max ON Delay Default 8 ms max can be set between 1 and 128 ms in PC Setup OFF Delay Default 8 ms max can be set between 1 and 128 ms in PC Setup No of Inputs 32 points 32 inputs common 1 circuit Internal current consumption 5 V DC 170 mA max Weight 160 g max Circuit Configuration COM e IN00 O LSN X 7509 BO A lt INO7 a COM o Input pie 2 2 KQ LED y IN15 O l Inter nal COM Circuit IN00 O FE lr N X 7509 Bo B lt INO7 Sale E COM Input S 2 2 KQ LED y IN15 O na Terminal Connections Wam A B Wd m 1 i soe T MSS X 4 SONI ole NISG 4 A pk 552 als N23 i 12VDC ooN Tg MNS 42VDC TF oomi s 5 Moo F The polarity of the input power supply ooN 6 e Moce can be either plus or minus The polar o oN 7 M55 i ity of all the commons however must See ale oP match M M r ag s 9 9 fNs E The COM terminals are internally con T 2n nee S T nected but they all must be wired 1 o oO a D ON E h 12VDC xen ea Noe 12V DC il OG pis lis Noe L Ty 66 444 14 NSO eT 1 WN1 N1Q 1 o 0715 15 o o
108. Device con ON Programming Devices other than a Programming Console can be connected to nected to pe the peripheral port ripheral port OFF Only a Programming Console can be connected to the peripheral port 8 see CX Protocol en ON Use CX Protocol for Serial Communications Board note 2 able OFF Do not use CX Protocol for Serial Communications Board 138 Note 1 When pin 4 is ON it is possible to change the assignment of function codes for expansion instruction If power is turned ON with pin 4 turned OFF after function code assignments have been changed the settings will return to the default settings and the information for the expansion instructions that were changed will be lost Also if pin 4 is OFF expansion instruction in formation will not be transferred from the Memory Cassette 2 Turn ON pin 8 to use the CX Protocol to create or modify protocol macros when using a port on a CQM1H SCB41 Serial Communications Board in the Protocol Macro serial communications mode Select C200HG CPU43 as the CPU Unit on the CX Protocol Communications Port and Startup Modes Settings Section 6 2 3 Turn OFF pin 8 before using a personal computer Programming Device Support Software for online operations 6 2 Communications Port and Startup Modes Settings Effect of Pin 5 and Pin 7 on Peripheral Port and RS 232C Port Operation Pin Function 5 7 Peripheral port Built in RS 232C port OFF OFF Progra
109. FT MONTR The status of force set bits is indicated by S and the status of a force reset bits is indicated by R as shown below Force set bit Force reset bit Note a The status of displayed bits can be changed at this point Refer to 7 3 20 Binary Data Modification for details b The Up or Down Arrow Key can be pressed to display the status of the previous or next word s bits 3 Press the CLR Key to end binary monitoring and return to the normal moni toring display 7 3 14 Three word Monitor 1 2 3 This operation is used to monitor the status of three consecutive words It is possible in any mode RUN MONITOR PROGRAM 1 Monitor the status of the first of the three words according to the procedure described in 7 3 12 Bit Digit Word Monitor If 2 or more words are being monitored the desired first word should be left most on the display Word monitor 2 Press the EXT Key to begin three word monitoring The status of the se lected word and the next two words will be displayed as shown below In this case DM 0000 was selected EXT The Up and Down Arrow Keys can be used to shift one address up or down The status of the displayed words can be changed at this point Refer to 7 3 23 Three word Data Modification If ASCII characters are being displayed three words of ASCII characters will be displayed Refer to 7 3
110. Functions Memory Cassettes for Program Data Management Clock Included Compatibility with CQM1 Units Math instructions such as floating point math exponential functions logarith mic functions and trigonometric functions a TOTALIZING TIMER TTIM instruction a CHANGE RS 232C SETUP STUP instruction and network communications instructions have been added In addition complete interrupt functions for the CPU Unit are supported including input interrupts high speed counter interrupts and interval timer interrupts with scheduled interrupts and one shot interrupts Interrupts from serial communications using a protocol macro interrupt notification are also supported These interrupts enable easier and more flexible machine control A Memory Cassette EEPROM or flash memory can be mounted in the front of the CPU Unit User programs data memory read only DM PC Setup and ex pansion instruction information can be saved and read in batch It is also pos sible to make settings so that data contained in the Memory Cassette is loaded automatically at startup This feature means that in the event of battery expira tion or careless programming monitoring operations data for user programs and data memory is not lost It also means that changes in user programs re quired for different controlled machines can be made easily Further by using a Memory Cassette with a clock times and dates can be used in the user program
111. G IR 00006 A3 IN7 IR 00007 Only usable as normal inputs to to to B7 IN14 IR 00014 A7 IN15 IR 00015 Note If INO through IN3 are set for use as input interrupts in the PC Setup the ON and OFF delays for input interrupts are fixed at 0 1 ms max and 0 5 ms max respec tively If IN4 through IN6 are set for use as high speed counter interrupts the delays for high speed counters are as shown in the following table Incrementing mode Differential phase mode 5 kHz 2 5 kHz Normal input ON 100 us min required OFF delay 500 us min required 51 Output Unit Specifications Section 2 2 The minimum response pulses will be as follows Input A IN4 Input B IN5 Incrementing Mode 5 kHz max 200 us min 90 us min 90 us min Differential Phase Mode 2 5 kHz max 400 us min ON Phase A 50 OFF ON Phase B 50 OFF J Ti T2 T3 T4 90 us min T T Ts Ty Input Z IN6 100 us min ON Phase Z OFF 500 us min 52 Output Unit Specifications Section 2 2 2 2 2 DC Input Units CQM1 ID211 CQM1 ID212 Name 12 to 24 V DC 8 point Input Unit 24 V DC 16 point Input Unit Input Voltage 12 to 24 V DC 10 15 24 V DC 10 _15 Input 2 4 KQ 3 9 kQ Impedance Input Current 10 mA typical at 24 V DC 6 mA typical at 24 V DC ON Voltage 10 2 V DC min 14 4 V DC min OFF Voltage
112. I O memory The operating mode that the CQM1H starts in when power is turned ON de pends on the following three factors The setting of pin 7 on the DIP switch on the front of the CPU Unit the PC Setup and whether or not a Programming Console is connected The startup mode for different combinations of these factors is shown in the following table PC Setup Operating mode Word Bits Value DM 6600 08to15 00 Hex See note below 01 Hex Operating mode last used before power was turned OFF 02 Hex Operating mode specified in bits 00 to 07 00 to 07 00 Hex PROGRAM mode 01 Hex MONITOR mode 02 Hex RUN mode The startup mode will depend on the setting of pin 7 on the DIP switch and the type of device connected in the way shown in the following table Operating Modes Section 5 2 Connected device at Pin 7 setting power ON OFF ON Nothing connected PROGRAM mode RUN mode Programming Console Determined by Programming Console mode switch PROGRAM mode Communications with Programming Console not possible PROGRAM mode Communications with connected device not possible Device other than Programming Console Either PROGRAM mode or RUN mode depending on connecting cable See note Note The following table shows the relationship between the startup mode and connecting cable when a device other than a Programming Device is con Connecting ca
113. INS a2 l x INS a2 7 soo E os too as _IN7 a3 Z IN7 a 3 No B4 NC B4 nel G NCI a4 NC Gs Nc B5 Nel as NE Cae ta URIA TURIA Ore ee aroe NC G7 NC gt G ES wa e Me ee NG aT NG aT com gg com gg SA COM a ot REM a8 ned 100 to 120 V AC gt x 200 to 240 V AC S 58 Section 2 3 Output Unit Specifications 2 3 Output Unit Specifications 2 3 1 Contact Output Units CQM1 0C221 CQM1 0C222 Name 8 point Contact Output Unit 16 point Contact Output Unit Max Switching 2A 250 V AC coso 1 2 A 250 V AC coso 1 Capacity 2 A 250 V AC coso 0 4 2 A 250 V AC coso 0 4 2A 24 V DC 16 A Unit 2 A 24 V DC 8 A Unit Min Switching 10 mA 5 V DC 10 mA 5 V DC Capacity Relay G6D 1A G6D 1A Service Life of Relay Electrical 300 000 operations resistive load 100 000 operations inductive load Mechanical 20 000 000 operations Electrical 300 000 operations resistive load 100 000 operations inductive load Mechanical 20 000 000 operations See note See note ON Delay 10 ms max 10 ms max OFF Delay 5 ms max 5 ms max No of Outputs 8 points independent commons 16 points 16 points common 1 circuit Internal Current 430 mA max at 5 V DC 850 mA max at 5 V DC
114. Input Unit or Analog Output Unit Power Supply Unit required Analog I O Analog input 4 points 0 to 20 mA 0 to 5 V 10 to 10 V Analog output 2 points 0 to 20 mA 10 to 10 V Reading distance data such as level differences and panel thicknesses by using in combination with displacement sensors Linear Sensor Interface Unit Input operation function for data from linear sensor amplifier High speed high precision measurement of voltage or current input from linear displacement sensors is performed and the measurements are converted to numeric data for comparative decision processing Input can be held according to external timing signals Sampling cycle 1 ms External timing sampling time 0 3 ms Temperature control functions Reading data from two temperature controllers with one Unit Temperature Controller Unit CQM1 TCOO CQM1 TC10 Reading data from two or four temperature controllers with one Unit Temperature Controller Unit CQM1 TC20 CQM1 TC30 Temperature control function Number of loops 2 Input Thermocouple K J or platinum resistance thermometer Pt JPt Output ON OFF or advanced PID control time proportional control Number of loops 4 or 2 heater burnout detection function Input Thermocouple K J L T R S B or platinum resistance thermometer Pt JPt Output ON OFF or ad
115. Interface Boards to OMRON Absolute Absolute Encoder E69 DC5 E6F AG5C C Encoders Interface Board E6CP AG5C C E6C2 AG5C C Connectors for 32 point I O Units 1 0 Unit Connector type Model number Set model number by Fujitsu from OMRON CQM1 ID112 213 Soldered Socket FCN 361J040 AU C500 CE404 Sor ane Standard accessory Connector cover FCN 360C040 J2 32 outputs Crimped Housing FCN 363J040 C500 CE405 Contact FCN 363J AU Connector cover FCN 360C040 J2 Pressure welded FCN 367J040 AU C500 CE403 Cables for 32 point I O Units Purpose 1 0 Unit Connecting cable Connector Terminal Block Conversion Unit For connections to CQM1 1D112 213 XW2Z B XW2B 40G5 M3 5 terminal screws Terminal Blocks 32 inputs CQM1 0D213 XW2B 40G4 M2 5 terminal screws 32 outputs CQM1 1D112 213 XW2Z D XW2C 20G5 IN16 Common type 32 inputs 16 System Configuration Section 1 2 Purpose I O Unit Connecting Cable I O Relay Terminal for input or output For connections to Relay CQM1 ID112 213 32 inputs G79 ILC Terminals G7TC IL16 CQM1 0D213 32 outputs G79 OLIC G7TC OCLILI G70D G70A 17 System Configuration Section 1 2 1 2 12 Maximum Number of I O Units and I O Points The maximum number of I O Units Dedicated I O Units Communications Units and Inner Boards that can be
116. M The same procedure is used to either input a program for the first time or to change a program that already exists In either case the current contents of Program Memory is overwritten Programming Console Operations Section 7 3 00002 1 2 3 TIM 000 0123 12 35 MOV 021 0100 LR 10 The program shown in the following diagram will be entered to demonstrate this operation aaaress nswucion Operands Poort O ooo D es E DB IR ooz asos SCS a E arr P0000 es a E fic 1 Clear the display and set the address as follows a Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display b Specify the address where the program will begin c Input the address where the program will begin and press the Down Ar row Key It is not necessary to input leading zeroes C IIL a Input the first instructio Write the first instruction to memory as follows LD c n and operand b Press the WRITE Key next program address will be displayed to write the instruction to Program Memory The WRITE lf a mistake was made inputting the instruction press the Up Arrow Key to return to the previous program address and input the instruction again The mistaken instruction will be overwritten Timer and counter Completion Flags can be input as bit operands by in putting the instruction e g LD LD NOT AND etc and then
117. M DM 6144 to DM 6568 and PC Setup DM 6600 to DM 6655 can be written from a Programming Device 2 Auto transfer ON Auto transfer enabled Heit ae User programs read only DM DM 6144 to DM 6568 PC Setup DM 6600 to DM aSsete 6655 and expansion instruction information stored on the Memory Cassette will be transferred to the CPU Unit automatically at start up If pin 4 is set to OFF however expansion instruction information will not be trans ferred and the default settings will be used OFF Auto boot disabled 3 Programming ON English Console display OFF The language stored in system ROM Messages will be displayed in Japanese language with the Japanese version of system ROM 4 Expansion ON Expansion instructions set by user Normally ON when using a host computer for instruction set programming monitoring See note 1 ting OFF Expansion instructions set to defaults 5 Serial commu ON Peripheral port and RS 232C port on CPU Unit controlled by standard settings nications port Host Link 1 start bit even parity 7 bit data 2 stop bit 9 600 bps semings If pin 7 is set to OFF however this setting is ignored for the peripheral port OFF Peripheral port controlled by PC Setup DM 6650 to DM 6654 and RS 232C port controlled by PC Setup DM 6645 to DM 6649 6 User deter ON The setting of pin 6 is stored as the ON OFF status of AR 0712 If pin 6 is ON AR mined setting OFF 0712 will be ON If pin 6 is OFF AR 0712 will be OFF 7
118. M1 DM 0000 to DM 6143 CPU4L1 EV1 DM 0000 to 6 144 words DM 6143 6 144 words CQM1H CPU21 11 CQM1 CPU11 21 EV1 DM 0000 to DM 3071 DM 0000 to DM 1023 3 072 words 1 024 words Can be written by program Can be written by program Read only DM 6144 to DM 6568 Read only DM 6144 to DM 6568 425 words 425 words Cannot be written by Cannot be written by program program Controller CQM1H CPU51 61 None Link DM DM 6400 to DM 6409 parameter 11 words asa CQM1H CPU11 21 None Routing table CQM1H CPU51 61 None area DM 6450 to DM 6499 50 words CQM1H CPU11 21 None Serial Com CQM1H CPU51 61 None munications DM 6550 to DM 6559 Board 10 words CQM1H CPU11 21 None Error history DM 6569 to DM 6599 Error history DM 6569 to DM 6599 area 31 words area 31 words PC Setup DM 6600 to DM 6655 PC Setup DM 6600 to DM 6655 56 words 56 words EM area 6 144 words EM area data can be read None or written in word 16 bit units Contents are retained when the power is turned OFF or the mode is changed Accessible using instructions from the program or Programming Devices Read write words EM 0000 to EM 6143 6 144 words Memory Cassette EEPROM or flash memory Mounted from the front of the CPU Unit Memory Cassettes are used to store and read the user s program DM read only data and PC Setup and expansion instruction information as one block of data It is possible
119. M1H ABB21 Absolute Encoder Interface Board is mounted Supported for CQM1 CPU44 EV1 CPU Unit Analog settings Supported if CQM1H AVB41 Analog Setting Board is mounted Supported for CQM1 CPU42 EV1 CPU Unit Analog I O Supported if CQM1H MAB42 Analog I O Supported for CQM1 CPU45 EV1 CPU Unit Board is mounted Protocol macros Supported if CQM1H SCB41 Serial Not supported Communications Board is mounted Communications Units CQM1H CPU51 61 1 Unit None Controller Link Supported if CQM1H CLK21 Controller Link Not supported Unit is connected Peripheral port con nections 38 Connect CS1W CN CQM1 CIF01 02 ioe aR Note Connection to personal computer also ls possible with CQM1 CIF01 02 via CS1W CN114 Conversion Cable computer Connect CQM1 PRO01 Programming Console Use CQM1 PRO01 Programming Console Use ing cable the cable provided with the Console or the cable provided with the Console tor Pro CS1W CN114 C200H PRO27 Programming Console nee C200H PRO27 Programming Console C200H CN222 422 CS1W CN224 624 Note Connection to Programming Console also possible with C200H CN222 422 via CS1W CN114 Conversion Cable CQMI1 CQMI1H Comparison Section 1 5 Interrupts Input in Input Interrupt Mode Interrupts are executed from the CPU Unit s built in input points 4 terrupts points in response to inputs from e
120. N Ignored standard settings Always turn ON pin 7 on the DIP switch when connecting Support Software run ning on a computer using a Host Link connection You will not be able to connect if pin 7 is OFF RS 232C Port Use the following settings for the standard communications settings in the PC Setup DIP switch pin 5 DIP switch pin 7 PC Setup DM 6645 OFF Ignored 0000 Hex Standard settings Use the following settings to make custom communications settings in the PC Setup DIP switch pin 5 DIP switch pin 7 PC Setup DM 6645 Ignored 0001 Hex Custom settings Set the baud rate data length etc in DM 6646 Use the following settings for communications according to pin 5 default set tings DIP switch pin 5 DIP switch pin 7 PC Setup DM 6645 ON Ignored Ignored standard settings 97 Programming Devices Section 3 6 Connecting Cables Connecting to Peripheral Port CQM1H CPU Unit IBM PC AT or compatible computer D Sub 9 pin male l Connecting cable CQM1 CIF02 CS1W CN114 Note 1 Connecting cables CS1W CN225 625 227 627 cannot be used with the CQM1H 2 The FIT 10 20 connecting cable CQM1 CIF 11 cannot be used with the CQM1H Connecting to RS 232C Port on CPU Unit or Serial Communications Board IBM PC AT or compatible computer D Sub 9 pin male CQM1H CPU Unit Connecting cable XW2Z 200S GV 2 m XW2Z 500S GV 5 m One to one Communications Use the following cabl
121. NPN output 4 loops CQM1 TC301 1 word 1 word 4 platinum resistance thermometer inputs Pt JPt ON OFF or advanced PID control transistor PNP output 4 loops CQM1 TC302 1 word 1 word 2 thermocouple inputs K J T L R S B ON OFF or advanced PID control transistor NPN output 2 loops heater burnout detection function CQM1 TC203 1 word 1 word 2 thermocouple inputs K J T L R S B ON OFF or advanced PID control transistor PNP output 2 loops heater burnout detection function CQM1 TC204 1 word 1 word 2 platinum resistance thermometer inputs Pt JPt ON OFF or advanced PID control transistor NPN output 2 loops heater burnout detection function CQM1 TC303 1 word 1 word 2 platinum resistance thermometer inputs Pt JPt ON OFF or advanced PID control transistor PNP output 2 loops heater burnout detection function CQM1 TC304 1 word 1 word Linear Sensor Interface Units Measure voltage or current inputs from linear sensors and convert the measurements to numeric data for comparative decision processing Standard type CQM1 LSE01 1 word 1 word With monitor output 9 999 V to 9 999 V CQM1 LSE02 1 word 1 word CompoBus S Master Unit 128 points 64 inputs and 64 outputs 64 points 32 inputs and 32 outputs or 32 points 16 inputs and 16 outputs selectable with a switch CQM1 SRM21 V1 1 2 0r4 words
122. Not used with the CQM1H C200H PRO27 E 94 Programming Devices Section 3 6 Programming Console Connections DIP switch Programming Console Cable Length Model number CPU Unit Built in peripheral port Turn OFF pin 7 CQM1H PROO1 E 2m Cable included with Programming Console CQM1 PRO01 E 2 m and 0 05 m Cable included with Programming Console and CS1W CN114 C200H PRO27 E 2 m and 0 05 m C200H CN222 and CS1W CN114 4 m and 0 05 m C200H CN422 and CS1W CN114 CS1W CN224 CS1W CN624 DIP Switch Settings 3 6 2 Support Software When connecting a Programming Console to the peripheral port turn OFF pin 7 on the DIP switch When pin 7 is OFF the setting of pin 5 and the PC Setup set tings are disabled as shown in the following table DIP switch pin 5 DIP switch pin 7 PC Setup DM 6650 Disabled OFF Disabled The different types of Support Software that can be used with the CQM1H are shown in the following table Name Model number Format CX Programmer WS02 CXP E CD ROM V1 2 or higher SYSMAC CPT WS01 CPTB1 E 3 5 inch floppy disks 1 44 MB and CD ROM SYSMAC C500 ZL3AT1 E 3 5 inch Support floppy Software SSS disks Computer IBM PC AT or com patible Note Functional limitations are shown in the following table Os Serial com Model Functional munica
123. ON The alarm output indicator will then turn off the alarm output will return to OFF and the contact s output will be restored 70 Output Unit Specifications Section 2 3 Item CQM1 0D216 Name 32 point PNP Transistor Output Unit Max Switching Capacity 0 5 A at 24 V DC 10 _15 5 A Unit Leakage Current 0 1 mA max Residual Voltage 0 8 V max ON Delay 0 1 ms max OFF Delay 0 3 ms max No of Outputs 32 points 32 points common 1 circuit Internal Current Consumption 240 mA max at 5 V DC max Fuse 7 A one per common one used Fuse is not user replaceable Service Power Supply 160 mA min at 24 V DC 10 _15 5 mA x number of ON points Weight 210 grams max Alarm Output 1 output PNP Turns ON when output short circuit or overcurrent is detected No of outputs Output Max switching capacity 50 mA at 24 V DC 10 _15 specifications Leakage current 0 1 mA max Residual voltage 0 8 V max Short circuit Protection see note Detection current 0 7 to 2 5 A Operation restored automatically after error cleared Circuit Configuration protection circuit Short circuit Fuse 7 A S Internal Circuits Short circuit protection circuit 71 Output Unit Specifications Section 2 3 CQM1 0D216 Terminal Connections N D a
124. Origin compensation Yes Current position can be designated as origin compensation is set in PC Setup Counting rate 4 kHz max Storage locations of counter PVs Port 1 IR 233 leftmost digits and IR 233 rightmost digits Port 2 IR 235 leftmost digits and IR 234 rightmost digits Data is stored as 4 digit BCD Note The range of values is determined by the operating mode BCD or 360 and the resolution 8 10 or 12 bits Control methods Target value match Up to 48 target values and interrupt subroutine numbers registered Range comparison Up to 8 upper limits lower limits and interrupt subroutine numbers registered Pulse Inputs Input voltage 24 V DC 10 15 Input impedance 5 4 KQ Input current 4 mA typical ON voltage 16 8 V DC min OFF voltage 3 0 V DC max 211 Analog Setting Board Section 8 4 8 3 9 Internal Circuit Configuration Name Encoder input Bit 211 of binary gray code from encoder Encoder input Bit 210 of binary gray code from encoder Encoder input Bit 21 of binary gray code from encoder Encoder input Bit 2 of binary gray code from encoder Common input Common input 8 4 Analog Setting Board 8 4 1 Model 8 4 2 Function 212 Name Model Specifications Analog Setting Board CQM1H AVB41 Four analog setting screws Each of the values set using the four variable resistors located on the front of the Analog S
125. Over Flag 100 ms Detecting the maximum AR area Maximum Cycle Time is stored in and current values of Maximum Cycle AR 26 and the Current Cycle the cycle time Time Current Time is stored in AR 27 Cycle Time Refresh method Refreshing an output CPU Unit PC Setup Set direct output refresh method whenever an OUTPUT instruction is executed Refreshing inputs when an interrupt occurs Output Refresh Method Direct in DM 6639 bits 00 to 07 Output is refreshed when OUT is executed in the user program PC Setup First Input Refresh Word and Number of Input Refresh Words for interrupts Set input refresh word for each interrupt in DM 6630 to DM 6638 The inputs for the specified words will be refreshed before the interrupt subroutine is executed when input interrupt interval timer interrupt or high speed counter interrupt occurs 28 Functions Listed by Purpose Purpose Unit Board Function Section 1 4 Details Debugging Turning OFF outputs CPU Unit SR area Output Turn ON SR 25215 from Output Units in OFF Bit any operating mode stopping output refreshing Detecting ON to OFF Differential and OFF to ON Monitoring from transitions in specified Programming bits Device Sampling specified I O Data Tracing Sampling can be set to be memory data performed at regular intervals at the end of each cycle or according to t
126. PRO27 E The key func tions for these Programming Consoles are identical Press and hold the SHIFT Key to input a letter shown in the upper left corner of the key or the upper function of a key that has two functions For example the CQM1H PROO1 E or CQM1 PRO01 E s AR HR Key can specify either the AR or HR Area press and release the SHIFT Key and then press the AR HR Key to specify the AR Area CQM1H PROO1 E CQM1 PRO01 E Connection Attached Attached Connecting LCD area Connecting LCD area Cable 2 m Cable 2 m Mode switch Mode switch Operation keys pi a a Operation key SET DEL MONTR 3 Resi INS CQM1H PROO01 E CQM1 PRO01 E 144 Connecting the Programming Console Section 7 2 C200H PRO27 E LCD area Mode switch Operation keys fe Casette jacks Not used with the CQM1H The following table shows the connecting cables that can be used to connect the C200H PRO27 E to the CQM1H Model number Connection C200H CN222 Connect to the Peripheral port of a CS1W CN114 C200H CN422_ Connecting Cable CS1W CN224 Connect directly to the CQM1H s peripheral port CS1W CN624 CQM1H PRO01 E CQM1 PRO01 E Key Sheet root ee eee ee eee eee ee eee eee 1 1 1 1 1 mare 1 1 1 1 1 F HE no GAHN i ee GaSe ee e SelB a a El Sau ete a 145 Connecting the Programming Console Section 7 2 C200H PRO27 E Key Sheet r a5
127. RAD SIN COS TAN ASIN SEND REC and MNP ACOS ATAN SQRT EXP and Floating point Instructions LOG FIX FIXL FLT FLTL F F F F Other instructi that DEG RAD SIN COS TAN ASIN ban ae PONS RAVAS S on ACOS ATAN SQRT EXP and the in r spect to the CQM1 can be used without LOG f transferring them as expansion instructions Memory displays Displayed for Memory will be displayed for the Memory will be displayed for the CQM1H CQM1 CPU43 i e to a maximum CQM1 CPU Units i e to a of 7 2 Kwords maximum of 7 2 Kwords DM verification None With the CQM1H CPU11 21 the Cannot be used Serial Communications Mode Characteristics Serial Communications Peripheral bus error message Verification Error will be displayed if a verification check results in a value other than 0000 for any data in DM 3072 to DM 6143 of the CPU Unit Mode A communications error will be generated the PC will be offline The two following serial communications modes are supported for connecting Support Software to the PC Features High speed communications are possible Usually this mode should be used when connecting with CX Programmer Only 1 1 connection is supported Host Link SYSMAC WAY DIP Switch and PC Setup Settings Peripheral Bus Connection Make the following settings when connecting Support Software to the peripheral 96 computer possible Basic protocol for commu
128. RD LER se s oR Rs cs c D sub 25 pin male The DIP switch settings of the NT AL001 E Link Adapter are shown below Always ON __ Turn ON at end of transmission path and turn OFF elsewhere Turn both pins OFF for 4 wire connection Turn OFF pin 5 and turn ON pin 6 for RS 232C CTS control Preparing RS 232C Cables Connecting to When connecting the RS 232C port to the CX Programmer set the communica CX Programmer tions mode to Host Link mode and connect in the following way CQM1H series CPU Unit IBM PC AT or compatible Signal Pin No Pin No Signal FG 1 1 CD SD 2 AY 2 RD RD 3 3 SD E RS 232C interface RS 4 3 ER _Jinterface CS N Ta 5 SG 5V 6 6 DR DR 7 7 RS ER 8 8 CS SG 9 9 CI D sub 9 pin male D sub 9 pin female When preparing an RS 232C cable to be connected to the RS 232C port use the following connector cables 100 Programming Devices Section 3 6 Applicable Connectors CPU Unit Connector Item Model number Specifications Socket XM2A 0901 9 pin male Used together One of each Hood XM2S 0911 E 9 pin millimeter provided with CPU screws Unit Personal Computer Connector Model number Specifications Socket XM2D 0901 9 pin female Used together Hood XM2S 0913 9 pin inch screws IBM PC AT or compatible 9 pin male connector P CQM1H
129. ST1 Reset input OUT 4 to 7 Input Input voltage 24 V DC 10 _15 specifications Input current 7 mA typical 24 V DC ON voltage 16 0 V DC min OFF voltage 5 0 V DC max Short circuit Protection Detection current 2 A minimum value 1 6 A typical see note Circuit Configuration p Output A D p a EO wg aS NE e 2 7 circuit x LG res a OUTO T EZ Da 1 Internal Alarm output OUTO 4 Circuits EZ LED We EZ A p ALMO ms sae JAM gt Alarm output se Ww sRSTO5 A amp 3 3 kQ RSTi J Reset output aee 560 Q Ly Sov 69 Output Unit Specifications Section 2 3 Terminal Connections Note Do not reverse the polarity of the load power supply If the load power supply is connected incorrectly the loads may not operate correctly Note If the output current of any output exceeds the detection current the outputs will be turned OFF at the four points OUTO to 3 or OUT4 to 7 which include that output At the same time the alarm output ALMO or ALM 1 will turn ON and the alarm indicator will light If an alarm output turns ON first eliminate the problem that caused the detection current to be exceeded Then turn from ON to OFF the reset input RSTO or RST1 on the side where the alarm output turned
130. TOR mode and check the operation of the program 1 2 3 1 Set the Programming Console s mode switch to MONITOR mode MONITOR CLR 3 Force set the start input bit IR 00000 from the Programming Console to start the program The cursor in the lower left corner of the display indicates that the force set is in progress The bit will remain ON as long as the Set Key is held down 4 The output indicator for output IR 01000 will flash ten times if the program is operating correctly The indicator should go OFF after ten one second flashes There is a mistake in the program if the output indicator doesn t flash In this case check the program and force set reset bits to check operation 182 Inner Boards This section describes hardware information for the following Inner Boards Serial Communications Board High speed Counter Board Pulse I O Board Absolute Encoder Interface Board Analog Setting Board and Analog I O Board Refer to the CQM1H Programming Manual for information on software application 8 1 High speed Counter Board 0 0 0 0 ect E eee Sadek M del erenn es cn i SO Ss at Sh RE a 8 l 2 CFUMCUONS s s c805 sod stale PSS Se ee NE Aah ig Means Aonh Deeds 328 Rahs BAR Eaten 8 1 3 Example System Configuration 0 00 e cece cece ete 8 1 4 Applicable Inner Board Slots 2 0 0 0 0 cece eee ee eee 8 1 5 Names and Functions eso eei oe o e
131. Unit including the replacement procedure The Appendix describes preparing cables for Inner Boards WARNING Failure to read and understand the information provided in this manual may result in personal injury or death damage to the product or product failure Please read each section in its entirety and be sure you understand the information provided in the section and related sections before attempting any of the procedures or operations given ix PRECAUTIONS This section provides general precautions for using the CQM1H series Programmable Controllers PCs and related devices The information contained in this section is important for the safe and reliable application of Programmable Control lers You must read this section and understand the information contained before attempting to set up or operate a PC system I Intended Audience ni cromo 6 2o 0 chat eb EY EOD On SEEN FOR EE Eee 2 General Precautions icc as kaa cake eae eee Meee eB ee PE ae ee eae hee AN 3 Safety Precautions nss etsanie ies nies Sh Cale bese ee Reb Ee EL ha EEES E E NRR Mee odes 4 Operating Environment Precautions 0 0 eee cece eee ee 5 Application Precautions 0 0 eee cence eee a 6 Conformance to EC Directives 0 cece tenet e ene ne neee 6 1 Applicable Directives 0 0 ee ccc E A E E 6 2 COMCEPIS 3 ocd a ek oh ake Seti ba eh aca eR et aus sh sats Sal aha 6 3 Conformance to EC Directives 20 0 eee eee
132. Units CQM1 ID112 CQM1 ID213 CQM1 ID214 and CQM1 0D213 CQM1 O0D216 as explained below Connector type Model by Fujitsu Set from OMRON Soldered Socket FCN 361J040 AU_ C500 CE404 Connector cover FCN 360C040 J2 Crimp Housing FCN 363J040 C500 CE405 Contact FCN 363J AU Connector cover FCN 360C040 J2 Pressure welded FCN 367J040 AU F C500 CE403 A soldered type socket and connector cover are provided with each I O Unit Recommended Wire Use AWG26 to 24 0 2 to 0 13 mm2 wire for connecting to all of the connector pins For details on pin arrangement and the internal circuitry of connectors at the CQM1H side refer to the sections on DC Input Units 32 points and Transistor Output Units 32 points in this manual The following illustrations show the procedure for wiring and assembly of solder type connectors First pass the electrical wires through heat shrinking tubes and solder them to the socket pins Heat shrinking tube LS Electrical wire O Connector After soldering all of the necessary pins slide the heat shrinking tubes over the soldered areas of the respective wires Then shrink the tubes by heating them with a jet of hot air Heat shrinking tube 123 Wiring and Connections Section 4 7 Finally assemble the socket and connector cover as shown below Connector cover Small screws 3 g Small screws 2 sete Cable clamp Connector lock screw Nuts 2
133. Voltage inputs Current inputs Number of analog input points 4 inputs Input signal ranges See note 1 10 to 10 V 0 to 20 mA Oto10V Oto5V Analog input storage words Analog input 1 IR 232 Analog input 2 IR 233 Analog input 3 IR 234 Analog input 4 IR 235 A D conversion time See note 2 1 7 ms max point Resolution 1 4 096 A D conversion output data 12 bit binary data 10 to 10 V F800 to 07FF Hex 0 to 10 V 0 to 5 V 0000 to OFFF Hex Note Negative voltages 10 V lt input voltage lt 0 V are stored as two s complements 12 bit binary data 0 to 20 mA 0000 to OFFF Hex External input impedance 1 MQ typical 250 Q typical Absolute maximum rated input 15 V 30 mA Overall precision 23 2 C 0 5 of FS eee notes 0 to 55 C 1 0 of FS Control Bits PC Setup settings are used to determine whether or not to convert analog signals into binary data for each input Note 1 Separate input signal ranges can be set for each input 2 The A D conversion time is the time taken for an analog signal to be stored in memory as digital data At least one cycle is required to transfer the data to the CPU Unit 3 The overall precision is the precision with respect to full scale Analog Outputs Item Specifications Output signals Voltage outputs Current outputs Number of analog output points 2 outputs Output signal ranges See note 1
134. a 8bits TROto TR7 These bits are used to temporarily store ON OFF status at program branches LR area note 1 1 024 LROOtoLR63 LR 0000 to LR 6315 Used for 1 1 data link through the RS 232 port bits or through a Controller Link Unit Timer Counter 512 TIM CNT 000 to TIM CNT 511 The same numbers are used for both timers area note 3 bits timer counter numbers and counters When TIMH 15 is being used timer numbers 000 to 015 can be interrupt re freshed to ensure proper timing during long cycles DM area Read 3 072 DM 0000 to DM area data can be accessed in word units write words DM 3071 only Word values are retained when the power is turned off 3 072 DM 3072 to Available in CQM1H CPU51 61 CPU Units only words DM 6143 Read 425 DM 6144 to E Cannot be written from the program only from only words DM 6568 a Programming Device note DM 6400 to DM 6409 10 words 4 Controller Link parameters DM 6450 to DM 6499 50 words Routing tables DM 6550 to DM 6559 10 words Serial Communications Board settings Error 31 DM 6569 to Used to store the time of occurrence and error history words DM 6599 code of errors that occur area note 4 PC 56 DM 6600 to Used to store various parameters that control Setup words DM 6655 PC operation note 4 EM area 6 144 EM 0000 to EM area data can be accessed in word units words EM 6143 only Word values are retained when the power is t
135. a Programming Console be sure to turn OFF pin 7 on the DIP switch factory setting If pin 7 is ON it will not be possible to use a Programming Console Programming Peripheral port Console 4 10 Connecting Programmable Terminals The different communications configurations available for communications with a Programming Terminal PT are shown in the following table Serial communications Serial PC to PT ratio Programming port communications Console mode functions CPU Unit s built in NT Link One to one only Supported RS 232C port 1 1 mode from PT Serial Com RS 232C NT Link One to one or No munications port port 1 1 1 mode one to many Board 1 N mode RS 422A 4 NT Link One to one or No 85 port 2 1 1 mode one to many 1 N mode Note 1 When communicating via a 1 1 mode NT Link connect to the port on the PT that supports this mode Communications will not be possible if connection is made to a port that supports only 1 N mode communications 2 When communicating via a 1 N mode NT Link connect to the port on the PT that supports this mode Communications will not be possible if connection is made to a port that does not support this mode e g the RS 232C port on the NT30 NT30C supports only 1 1 communications 3 The NT20S NT600S NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C and NT625C can not be used if the cycle time of the CPU Unit is 800 ms or longer even if only one of these PTs is u
136. a tracing scheduled each cycle or when instruction is executed Online editing User programs can be overwritten in program block units when the CPU Unit is in MONITOR mode With the CX Programmer more than one program block can be edited at the same time Program Write protection of user program data memory DM 6144 to DM 6655 read only DM and PC protection Setup DM 6600 to DM 6655 Set using pin 1 on the DIP switch Error check User defined errors i e user can define fatal errors and non fatal errors using the FAL 06 and FALS 07 instructions Note It is possible to stop operation using user programmed instructions for fatal errors User defined error logs can be created in specific bits logging when using user programmed instructions for non fatal errors Error log Up to 10 errors including user defined errors are stored in the error log Information includes the error code error details and the time the error occurred Serial Built in peripheral port Programming Device including Programming Console connections Host communications ports Links no protocol communications Built in RS 232C port Programming Device excluding Programming Console connections Host Links no protocol communications NT Links 1 1 mode 1 1 Data LInks RS 232C port and RS 422A 485 port on Serial Communications Board sold separately Programming Device excluding Programming Console connections Host Links no proto
137. ailed information can be found in the Serial Communications Board Operation Manual W365 8 6 1 Model Number Nae Moda Model Specifications Sxarconnenr mea oaa OE Communications Board CQM1H SCB41 One RS 232 e a l One RS 422A 485 e a l 8 6 2 Serial Communications Boards The Serial Communications Board is an Inner Board for the CQM1H series PCs One Board can be installed in Inner Board slot 1 of a CQM1H series CPU Unit The Board cannot be installed in slot 2 The Board provides two serial communications ports for connecting host com puters Programmable Terminals PTs general purpose external devices and Programming Devices excluding Programming Consoles This makes it pos sible to easily increase the number of serial communications ports for a CQM1H series PC Port 1 RS 232C war Port 2 RS 422A 485 8 6 3 Features The Serial Communications Board is an option that can be mounted in the CPU Unit to increase the number of serial ports without using an I O slot It supports protocol macros which are not supported by the ports built into the CPU Units allowing easy connection to general purpose devices that have a serial port Inside controlled machine Serial Communications Board Beam ee LUU Temperature controller or other device 0 LS Bar code reader Dedicated controller or other device Or other device External device wi
138. al instructions CQM1 CPU11 21 EV1 117 14 basic 103 special instructions CQM1 CPU41 42 43 44 45 EV1 137 14 basic 123 special instructions Instruction execution times LD instruction 0 375 us MOV instruction 17 6 us LD instruction 0 5 us MOV instruction 23 5 us Overseeing time 0 70 ms 0 80 ms 37 CQM1 CQMI1H Comparison Section 1 5 CPU Unit built in input points 16 points Maximum number of Units see note The number of I O Units and Dedicated I O Units that can be connected to a CQM1H CPU Unit is as follows CPU Block only 11 Units max CPU Block and Expansion I O Block CPU Block 5 Units max Expansion I O Block 11 Units max The number of I O Units and Dedicated I O Units that can be connected to a CQM1 CPU Units is as follows CQM1 CPU11 21 EV1 I O Units only CQM1 CPU41 42 43 44 EV1 11 Units max I O Units or Dedicated I O Units 7 Units max Inner Boards CQM1H CPU51 61 2 slots None High speed counters Supported if CQM1H CTB41 High speed Counter Board is mounted Note When considering the restrictions on the number of connectable Units an Ana Not supported log Power Supply Unit must be counted as a Unit just like I O or Dedicated I O Units Pulse I O Supported if CQM1H PLB2 Pulse I O Board 1 is mounted Supported for CQM1 CPU43 EV1 CPU Unit Absolute encoder in terface Supported if CQ
139. an instruction as opposed to the location to which the result of an instruction is to be written The latter is called the destination An instruction input with a function code that handles data processing opera tions within ladder diagrams as opposed to a basic instruction which makes up the fundamental portion of a ladder diagram A memory area containing flags and other bits words with specific functions See SYSMAC Support Software The process of recording a program written into a display buffer permanently in memory A group of instructions placed separate from the main program and executed only when called from the main program or activated by an interrupt A definer used to identify the subroutine that a subroutine call or interrupt acti vates An input signal used to decrement a counter when the signal changes from OFF to ON See set value The maximum voltage current that a relay can safely switch on and off Execution of programs and servicing operations in which program execution and servicing are synchronized so that all servicing operations are executed each time the programs are executed The form of a program statement as opposed to its meaning An error in the way in which a program is written Syntax errors can include spelling mistakes i e a function code that does not exist mistakes in specify ing operands within acceptable parameters e g specifying read only bits as a destination and mi
140. and assign expansion instruction function codes before inputting the program The CQM1H will not operate properly if expansion instructions aren t assigned correctly An expansion instruction can be assigned to one function code only Pin 4 on the DIP switch must be ON to use user assigned function codes for ex pansion instructions If power is turned ON with pin 4 turned OFF the expansion instructions will revert to their default function code settings and any user set tings will be lost Even if the function codes change data will not be changed and the program will not execute as expected Refer to the CQM1H Programming Manual for the default function code as signments in the CQM1H 1 Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display 2 Press the EXT Key to d the ed id for the first function code 17 EXT 3 Press the Up and Down Arrow Keys to scroll through the expansion instruc tion function codes 4 Press the CHG Key to assign a different expansion instruction to the se lected function code CHG 5 Press the Up and Down Arrow Keys to scroll through the expansion instruc tions that can be assigned to the selected function code lt 155 Programming Console Operations Section 7 3 6 Press the WRITE Key to assign the displayed instruction to the function code l 7 3 6 Setting and Reading a Program Memory Address and
141. and when supplying voltage at 230 V AC the must be open When power is supplied at 230 V AC using the CQM1 PA216 remove the short circuit bar provided as an accessory that shorts the voltage selector terminals The Unit will be damaged if 230 V AC is supplied with the short circuit bar connected 117 Wiring and Connections Section 4 7 DC Power Supply Unit The following diagram shows the proper connections to a DC power supply Use Wiring a 24 V DC power supply Refer to 3 2 2 Selecting a Power Supply Unit for details on Power Supply Unit capacity Use power lines of 2 mm min Breaker 3 vane DC power supply Ou Twist Z N Caution Be sure that the DC power supply voltage remains within the allowed fluctuation range of 20 to 28 V DC Crimp Connectors Use M3 5 crimp connectors of the dimensions shown below for wiring DC Power Supply Units mm max r 7mm max Za ere r O Note Always use crimp connectors for wiring Do not connect bare stranded wires di rectly to terminals Terminal Block The following diagram shows the terminal block for the DC Power Supply Unit 118 CQM1 PD026 A DC Provide a 24 V DC power supply Noise filter neutral terminal see note 4 GR Protective earth terminal see note 5 OI0OIOIOIOIO NC 1 The wire used should be at least 2 mm 2 Provide the grounding point as close to the CQM1H PC as possible
142. ange an instruction after it has been entered simply scroll through the program until the desired instruction is displayed and press the NOT Key The symbol should be displayed next to the instruction b Press the WRITE Key to write the instruction to Program Memory The input display for the first operand will be displayed wRITE 5 Input the first operand of MOV 21 as a constant as follows a Input the constant pressing the CONT Key first The CONT Key is necessary to specify a constant because the default is for input of a memory address The display will change to 0000 when the CONT is aoa a the Eea Key to write the operand to Brogan Menen The in put display for the second operand will appear wRITE Note The operands of MOV 21 can be word addresses so the CONT Key must be pressed to input a constant 6 Input the second operand of MOV 21 as a word address as follows a k the ac geet the epee area first b ee the ae Key to write the instruction to Piagam Memory The next program address will be displayed WRITE Note It isn t necessary to press the SHIFT CH Keys when inputting an IR area bit or word address 7 Input the ADB 50 instruction as follows a Input the instruction using the function code ora FUN 5 0 b Press the WRITE Key to write the instruction to evga Memory WArITe
143. anged Input the new value and press the WRITE Key to write the changes in memory if the rightmost word will not be aa In this case it will mete Note If the CLR Key is pressed before the WRITE Key the operation will be cancelled and the three word monitor display will return without any changes in data memory 7 3 24 Force Set Reset 172 N Caution 1 2 3 This operation is used to force bits ON force set or OFF force reset and is useful when debugging the program or checking output wiring It is possible in MONITOR or PROGRAM mode only RUN MONITOR PROGRAM Before changing the contents of I O memory be sure that the changes will not cause equipment to operate unexpectedly or dangerously In particular take care when changing the status of output bits The PC continues to refresh I O bits even if the PC is in PROGRAM mode so devices connected to output points on the Output Units may operate unexpectedly 1 Monitor the status of the desired bit according to the procedure described in 7 3 12 Bit Digit Word Monitor f two or more words are being monitored the desired bit should be leftmost on the display Multiple address monitor 2 Press the SET Key to force the bit ON or press the RESET Key to force the bit OFF The cursor in the lower left corner of the display indicates that the force set reset is in progress Bit status will remain ON or
144. apacity is shown below Max switching capacity mA 4 5 20 4 26 4 External power supply voltage V 195 Pulse I O Board Section 8 2 8 1 9 Internal Circuits Pulse Inputs Phases A and B 4 4 KQ Input voltage switch x Di Internal circuit of phase A or B See Note Input voltage switch See Note Internal circuit of Z Note ON Line driver input OFF 24 V DC input External Outputs O 0 Internal circuit of Output O ouT Sourcing Sinking switching signal O o0 Note In the above figure A is active when sourcing outputs are set and B is active when sinking outputs are set 8 2 Pulse I O Board 8 2 1 Model Name Modei Specifications Pulse I O Board CQM1H PLB21 Two pulse input points and two pulse output points 8 2 2 Function The Pulse I O Board is an Inner Board that supports two pulse inputs and two pulse outputs Pulse Inputs 1 and 2 Pulse inputs 1 and 2 can be used as high speed counters to count pulses input at either 50 kHz signal phase or 25 kHz differential phase Interrupt processing can be performed based on the present values PV of the counters Input Mode The following three Input Modes are available e Differential Phase Mode 4x 196 Pulse I O Board Section 8 2 Pulse Outputs 1 and 2 Ports 1 and 2 e Pulse Direction Mode e Up Down Mode Interrupts The Board can be set to execute an interrupt subroutine when the
145. at the PC is OFF 2 On the DIP switch on the front of the CPU Unit set pin 7 to OFF to enable a Programming Console Connection and make sure pin 3 is ON for English language displays 3 Connect the Programming Console to the CPU Unit s Peripheral port See 7 2 Connecting the Programming Console for details The CPU Unit s Communications Switch setting has no effect on commu nications with the Programming Console Set the mode switch to PROGRAM mode Turn ON the PC Enter the password See 7 2 5 Entering the Password for details Clear All Clear the PC s memory See 7 3 2 Clearing Memory for details ON DOO A Read and clear all errors and messages See 7 3 3 Reading Clearing Error Messages for details 9 Start programming 7 2 5 Entering the Password 150 To gain access to the PC s programming functions you must first enter the pass word The password prevents unauthorized access to the program The PC prompts you for a password when PC power is turned ON or if PC power is already ON after the Programming Console has been connected to the PC To gain access to the system when the Password message appears press CLR and then MONTR Then press CLR to clear the display Programming Console Operations Section 7 3 If the Programming Console is connected to the PC when PC power is already ON the first display below will indicate the mode the PC was in before the Pro gramming Console was c
146. ata length data link data link area data movement instruction data sharing data trace data transfer debug decimal decrement default definer destination differentiated instruction differentiation instruction digit digit designator DIN track DIP switch 232 A floppy disk used to save user programs DM area contents comments and other user data In communications the number of bits that is to be treated as one unit in data transmissions An automatic data transmission operation that allows PCs or Units within PC to pass data back and forth via common data areas A common data area established through a data link An instruction used to move data from one location in memory to another The data in the original memory location is left unchanged The process in which common data areas or common data words are created between two or more PCs A process in which changes in the contents of specific memory locations are recorded during program execution Moving data from one memory location to another either within the same device or between different devices connected via a communications line or network A process by which a draft program is corrected until it operates as intended Debugging includes both the removal of syntax errors as well as the fine tuning of timing and coordination of control operations A number system where numbers are expressed to the base 10 Ina PC all data is
147. ations Section 7 3 1 2 3 1 Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display 2 Display the desired timer or counter B 3 Press the Down Arrow Key and then the CHG Key 4 At this point a new SV constant can be input or the SV constant can be changed to a word address designation a To input a new SV constant input the constant and press the WRITE Ge oa Ie to a word address designation input the word address and press the WRITE Key B A Incrementing and This operation can be used to increment and decrement an SV constant It is Decrementing a Constant possible only when the SV has been entered as a constant 1 2 3 1 Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display 2 Display the desired timer or counter 3 Press the Down Arrow CHG and then the EXT Key The constant on the left is the old SV and the constant on the right will be come the new SV constant in step 5 4 Press the Up and Down Arrow Keys to decrement and increment the constant on the right In this case the SV is decremented once 5 Press the CLR Key twice to change the timer s SV to the new value 7 3 19 Hexadecimal BCD Data Modification This operation is used to change the contents of memory area words includ ing timer counter present values It is possible in MONITOR or PROGRAM mode only RUN MONITOR PROGRAM Words SR 253 to SR 255 cannot be changed
148. ay code from encoder Hood Not used Note 1 Refer to Appendix A Preparing Cables for Inner Boards for information about using a compatible connector XM2D 1501 Socket with XM2S 1511 Hood to construct a cable When connecting to an absolute encoder manufactured by OMRON the E69 DC5 Absolute Encoder Interface Board Connecting Cable described below can be used 2 Only absolute encoders that produce binary gray code outputs can be used 209 Absolute Encoder Interface Board Section 8 3 8 3 7 Wiring Examples The following example shows a connection to an open collector encoder Do not share the power supply with other I O 24 V DC Power supply power supply Encoder Shielded twisted pair cable Sitetaiatatddetetaeted Absolute Encoder Interface Board Connecting to an When connecting to an Absolute Encoder manufactured by OMRON connect OMRON Absolute the cables as shown in the following diagram Encoder Applicable Models E6F AG5C C E6CP AGS5C C Absolute Encoder E6C2 AG5C C Interface Board Absolute Encoder E69 DC5 Connecting Cable m Z g Tm e Applicable Cable E69 DC5 Ab solute Encoder Interface Board Connecting Cable length 5 m 34 6 mm 5 000 mm 41 5 mm CN1 or CN2 of Absolute Encoder Interface Board To Absolute Encoder lt 4 a la l See note 4 See note 1 See note 2 200 mm See note 3 Note 1 A grease proof PVC insulated cable with external diameter of 6 12 s
149. bance Z N Caution Do not share grounds with other equipment or attaching to the beam of a build ing Improper grounding will cause adverse results Correct Incorrect Other equipment of ii CQM1H 4 7 2 Connecting the CPU Block and Expansion I O Block Expansion I O Cable A CS1 series Expansion I O Cable must be used One of these cables is shown below p Specifications Expansion I O Cable CS1W CN313 Length 0 3 m CS1W CN713 Length 0 7 m 119 Wiring and Connections Section 4 7 Note A cable longer than 0 7 m cannot be used I O Control Unit CPU Block Expansion I O Block I O Interface Unit Connecting the Cable Connect the I O Control Unit on the CPU Block to the I O Interface Unit on the Expansion I O Block Connecting the Connectors Press the locks on both sides of the connector and press in firmly until the con nector locks into place I O bus errors will occur and operation will stop if the con nector is not corrected properly Removing the Connectors Press the locks on both sides of the connector until it releases and pull the con nector straight out Cable Bending Radius The maximum bending radius of the Expansion I O Cable is 69 mm p e R gt 69 mm JA _ J o Note Place the Expansion I O Cable into a separate duct from power lines and I O lines to protect it from noise 4 7 3 VO
150. ble Startup mode nected CS1W CN114 CQM1 CIF01 02 PROGRAM mode CS1W CN118 XW2Z 200 500S V PROGRAM mode CS1W CN226 626 RUN mode CS1W CN118 XW2Z 200 500S CV RUN mode 5 2 4 Operation without a Battery Operation is still possible when there is no internal battery or the internal battery has expired by writing the required data user program PC Setup etc to a Memory Cassette In this case turn ON pin 2 on the DIP switch on the front of the CPU Unit so that data stored in the Memory Cassette is transferred to the CPU Unit automatically at startup Note If the internal battery expires the data in the CPU Unit user program settings etc will be lost when the power is turned OFF Consider the following precautions when operating with no internal battery or with an expired battery e When the internal battery expires data will be affected in the following way e HR area Timer Counter PVs DM area and AR area data will be cleared when the power is turned OFF e SR area data will become unstable when the power is turned OFF There fore do not set the I O Hold Bit SR 25212 and the Forced Status Hold Bit SR 25211 to be maintained in the PC Setup DM 6601 e The I O Hold Bit SR 25212 the Forced Status Hold Bit SR 25211 and the Output OFF Bit SR 25215 will be particularly unstable and may have an ad verse effect on operation Turn OFF these bits at the start of the program The
151. ble as an ON signal by a receiving party e g output device or PC A bit that is turned ON or OFF for a specified interval of time which is longer than one scan See 1 1 link The process of changing the program directly in the PC from a Programming Device Online editing is possible in PROGRAM or MONITOR mode In MON ITOR mode the program can actually be changed while it is being executed The values designated as the data to be used for an instruction An operand can be input as a constant expressing the actual numeric value to be used or as an address to express the location in memory of the data to be used A bit designated as an operand for an instruction A word designated as an operand for an instruction One of three PC modes PROGRAM mode MONITOR mode and RUN mode An error that occurs during actual PC operation as opposed to an initialization error which occurs before actual operations can begin A logic operation whereby the result is true if either of two premises is true or if both are true In ladder diagram programming the premises are usually ON OFF states of bits or the logical combination of such states called execution condi tions The signal sent from the PC to an external device The term output is often used abstractly or collectively to refer to outgoing signals A bit in the IR area that is allocated to hold the status to be sent to an output device An external device that receives signals from the
152. can be set as the numeric range Pulse Direction Mode 50 kHz 500 kHz Up Down Mode 50 kHz 500 kHz High speed 25 kHz Pulse I O Board High speed High speed pulse input from 50 kHz frequency counters 1 and 2 ports 1 and 2 of the High speed count Counter Board is counted For Node Beka slot 1 the PVs are stored in IR 200 to IR 207 and for slot 2 in Pulse Direction SR 232 to SR 239 Ring mode Mode 50 kHz or linear mode can be set as the Up Down Mode numeric range 50 kHz High speed counting of Absolute High speed Binary Grey code input from an signals from an Encoder counters 1 and 2 absolute rotary encoder is counted The PVs are stored in SR 232 to SR 235 absolute rotary encoder Interface Board Input modes BCD Mode and 360 Mode Resolution settings 8 bit 0 to 255 10 bit 0 to 1023 12 bit 0 to 4095 Set the resolution to match the connected encoder 32 Functions Listed by Purpose Purpose Unit Board Function Section 1 4 Details Pulse output functions Making simple pulse outputs CPU Unit PC Setup and SPED 64 PULS 65 instructions Pulse outputs can be made from standard Transistor Output Units Set the pulse output word address specify a word from IR 100 to IR 115 Frequency 20 Hz to 1 kHz Duty factor 50 Making output to pulse train input motor driver servomotor driver or stepping motor dr
153. ccurrences of the specified operand bit in the pro gram and is possible in any mode RUN MONITOR PROGRAM The ON OFF status of any displayed bit will be shown if the PC is in RUN or MONITOR mode 1 Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display 2 Input the EAE address It is not nereesay to input leading zeroes 3 Press the Ese Ss to begin the search 4 Press the SRCH Key to search for the next occurrence of the operand bit 5 The search will continue until an END instruction or the end of Program Memory is reached In this case an END instruction was reached at ad Programming Console Operations Section 7 3 dress 397 The total amount of memory used by the user program will also be displayed and is 0 4 Kwords in this case 7 3 10 Inserting and Deleting Instructions This operation is used to insert or delete instructions from the program It is pos sible in PROGRAM mode only RUN momon PROGRAM To demonstrate this operation an IR 00105 NO condition will be inserted at program address 00206 and an IR 00103 NO condition deleted from address 00205 as shown in the following diagram Original Program 4 Address Instruction Operands 00100 00101 00103 00104 a t oe dk eel 00201 00102 Delete Delete lt 00205 00103 lt lt Insert 4dr 00206 AND NOT 00104 00207 19000 END 01 oo208 END O1 00105 Ins
154. ce Life for CQM1 OC221 222 60 Service life x 10 000 operations 500 300 100 50 250 V AC or 24 V DC resistive load 250 V AC inductive load with cos 0 4 or 24 V DC inductive load with L R 7 ms 012 3 45 6 7 8 10 Switching current A Output Unit Specifications Section 2 3 Item CQM1 0C224 Name 8 point Contact Output Unit Max Switching Capacity 2 A 250 V AC coso 1 2 A 250 V AC coso 0 4 2A 24 V DC 16 A Unit Min Switching Capacity 10 mA 5 V DC Relay G6R 1A or G6RN 1A Service Life of Relay Electrical 300 000 operations Mechanical 10 000 000 operations See note ON Delay 15 ms max OFF Delay 5 ms max No of Outputs 8 points independent commons Internal Current 440 mA max at 5 V DC Consumption Weight 270 grams max Circuit Configuration Output gt LED OUTO Internal ar T W es Circuits 1 GE E T como Maximum Output 250VAC 2A gt LED 24V DC 2A OUT7 Internal dro OL 2 Circuits amp i ol TT AE 2 gees COM7 Terminal Connections ouTo 5 como co n oan Ses RCOM K eal noure Ba 5 COM2 GA OUTS SS Ba RCM Ga SA OUT4 SYN GS L B4 gt COM4 Aa ie Durs gs COMB pe n oure aa COMe ne out7 oY as he FEMT 47 Nc 5 we a8
155. ceed 5 A 5 An Analog Power Supply Unit must be counted as a Unit just like the I O and Dedicated I O Units 4 5 Inner Board Installation Use the following procedure to mount Inner Boards in the CPU Unit 1 2 3 1 Press the catch at the top of the Inner Board compartment cover Press the top catch Press the bottom catch 113 DIN Track Installation Section 4 6 2 Remove the Inner Board compartment cover N Caution Always turn the power OFF before installing or removing the Inner Board Instal ling or removing the Inner Board with the power ON can cause the CPU Unit to malfunction damage internal components or cause communications errors N Caution Before installing the Inner Board be sure to first touch a grounded metallic ob ject such as a metal water pipe in order to discharge any static build up 4 6 DIN Track Installation Use the following procedure to install a CQM1H PC on DIN Track 1 2 3 1 Mount the DIN Track securely to the control board or inside the control panel using screws in at least 3 separate locations 2 Release the pins on the backs of the CQM1H Units These pins lock the PC to the DIN Track DIN track mounting pin 114 Wiring and Connections Section 4 7 3 Fit the back of the PC onto the DIN Track by inserting the top of the track and then pressing in at the bottom of the PC as shown below 4 DIN track mounting pin 5 Install a DIN Track End Bracket
156. ch it is mounted Random variations of one or more electrical characteristics such as voltage cur rent and data which might interfere with the normal operation of a device Erasable programmable read only memory a type of ROM in which stored data can be erased by ultraviolet light or other means and reprogrammed A numeric code generated to indicate that an error exists and something about the nature of the error Some error codes are generated by the system others are defined in the program by the operator An area used to store records indicating the time and nature of errors that have occurred in the system A communication setting that adjusts the number of ON bits so that it is always even See parity Processing that is performed in response to an event e g an interrupt signal A logic operation whereby the result is true if both of the premises are true or both of the premises are false In ladder diagram programming the premises are usually the ON OFF states of bits or the logical combination of such states called execution conditions A logic operation whereby the result is true if one and only one of the premises is true In ladder diagram programming the premises are usually the ON OFF states of bits or the logical combination of such states called execution condi tions The ON or OFF status under which an instruction is executed The execution condition is determined by the logical combination of conditio
157. ck level 1 for type A and B errors and check level 2 for type A errors only Message Meaning and appropriate response The program has been damaged creating a non existent function code Re enter the program CIRCUIT ERR The number of LD instructions LD or LD NOT does not match the number of logic block instructions OR LD or AND LD Check your program OPERAND ERR A constant entered for the instruction is not within defined values Change the constant so that it lies within the proper range NO END INSTR There is no END 01 in the program Write END 01 at the end of the program LOCN ERR An instruction is in the wrong place in the program Check instruction requirements and correct the program JME UNDEFD A JME 04 instruction is missing for a JMP 05 instruction Correct the jump number or insert the proper JME 04 instruction DUPL The same jump number or subroutine number has been used twice Correct the program so that the same number is used only once for each SBN UNDEFD An SBN 92 has not been programmed with the same subroutine number as an SBS 91 instruction in the program Correct the program STEP ERR STEP 08 with a section number and STEP 08 without a section number have been used incorrectly Check STEP 08 programming requirements and correct the program B IL ILC ERR IL 02 and ILC 03 are not used in pairs Correct the program so that
158. col communications NT Links 1 1 mode 1 N mode 1 1 Data LInks protocol macros 48 Output Unit Specifications Specification Section 2 1 Serial Communications Modes CPU Unit built in ports Serial Communications general purpose external devices with a serial port e g RS 232C Note This mode is supported only by a Se rial Communications Board Built in Built in RS 232C peripheral port port Board ports Programming Used for communications with Yes SW7 ON No No Console bus Programming Consoles Peripheral bus Used for communications with Yes SW7 ON No No Programming Devices such as CX Programmer Host Link Used to access the CPU Unit s I O Yes SW7 ON Yes Yes SYSMAC memory and programs using Host Link WAY commands Supports communications with Programming Devices and OMRON PTs Communications can be initiated from the CQM1H in this mode No protocol Used for sending or receiving up to Yes SW7 ON Yes Yes 256 bytes of data using special instructions with no protocol or conversion 1 1 Data Link Used for 1 1 communications via a data No Yes Yes link with another CQM1H or with a CQM1 CPM1 C200HX HG HE or C200HS PC NT Link Used for data exchange with OMRON No Yes 1 1 mode Yes 1 1 mode or 1 1 mode PTs without program One to one or only 1 N mode 1 N mode one to many PC PT connections supported Note The 1 1 mode and 1 N mod
159. contents of the second address will be used as the actual operand An error that occurs either in hardware or software during the PC System startup i e during initialization Part of the startup process whereby some memory areas are cleared system setup is checked and default values are set The signal coming from an external device into the PC The term input is often used abstractly or collectively to refer to incoming signals A bit in the IR area that is allocated to hold the status of an input An external device that sends signals into the PC System The point at which an input enters the PC System Input points correspond physically to terminals or connector pins A change in the status of a connection entering the PC Generally an input signal is said to exist when for example a connection point goes from low to high volt age or from a nonconductive to a conductive state 235 Glossary instruction instruction block instruction execution time instruction line interface interlock interrupt Signal interrupt program inverse condition JIS jump jump number ladder diagram program ladder diagram symbol ladder instruction least significant bit word LED leftmost bit word link 236 A direction given in the program that tells the PC of the action to be carried out and the data to be used in carrying out the action Instructions can be used to simply turn a bit ON or OFF or
160. correction before operation can continue See frame checksum A dedicated bit in memory that is set by the system to indicate some type of oper ating status Some flags such as the carry flag can also be set by the operator or via the program A bit that is programmed to turn ON and OFF at a specific frequency A decimal number expressed as a number the mantissa multiplied by a power of 10 e g 0 538 x 10 5 The process of forcibly turning OFF a bit via a programming device Bits are usu ally turned OFF as a result of program execution The process of forcibly turning ON a bit via a programming device Bits are usu ally turned ON as a result of program execution The status of bits that have been force reset or force set The results of exclusive ORing all data within a specified calculation range The frame checksum can be calculated on both the sending and receiving end of a data transfer to confirm that data was transmitted correctly A two digit number used to input an instruction into the PC An error originating in the hardware structure electronic components of the PC as opposed to a software error which originates in software i e programs A code in an instruction that specifies what the instruction is to do A number system where all numbers are expressed to the base 16 In a PC all data is ultimately stored in binary form however displays and inputs on Pro gramming Devices are often expressed in hexa
161. coso 0 4 2 A at 24 V DC 16 A per Unit independent commons Transistor Output Units 2 A at 24 V DC 5 A per Unit 8 points per common 50 mA 4 5 V DC to 300 mA 26 4 V DC 16 points per common Terminal block CQM1 IA121 CQM1 1A221 1 word CQM1 0C221 CQM1 0C222 CQM1 0C224 CQM1 0D211 CQM1 0D212 16 mA 4 5 V DC to 100 mA 26 4 V DC 500 mA 24 V DC PNP output Connector CQM1 0D213 CQM1 0D216 300 mA 24 V DC PNP output 1 0 A 24 V DC PNP output 4A per Unit short circuit protection Triac Output Units 0 4 A at 100 to 240 VAC 4 points per common 2 circuits 0 4 A at 100 to 240 VAC Terminal block CQM1 0D214 CQM1 0D215 CQM1 O0A221 CQM1 OA222 1 word 2 words 13 System Configuration Section 1 2 1 2 10 Dedicated I O Units Name Specifications Model number Input words Output words allocated allocated from IR 001 from IR 100 Analog Input Unit 4 analog input points CQM1 AD041 2 or4 words 10 to 10 V 0to 10 V 1 to 5 V 4 to 20 mA Analog Output Unit 2 analog output points CQM1 DA021 2 words 10 to 10 V 0 to 20 mA Analog Power Supply Power supply for Analog Input or CQM1 IPS01 Units Output Unit required when using Supplies 1 Unit Analog Input or Output Unit CQM1 IPS02 Suppli
162. ction via a user defined protocol from the ladder program Not supported 41 Overview Application Procedure Section 1 6 em ct S Power failure detection AC power supply 10 to 25 ms time DC power supply 5 to 25 ms Standard accessories Battery Set CPM2A BAT01 Battery Set C500 BAT08 1 6 Overview Application Procedure The following procedure outlines the steps necessary to set up program and operate a CQM1H control system 1 2 3 1 Determine the system configuration Decide if one or more Inner Boards are required in the system and whether they are to be mounted in the left or right slot The following boards are avail able e Serial Communications Board for serial communications e High speed Counter Board or Pulse I O Board for high speed counter in puts e Pulse I O Board or pulse outputs e Absolute Encoder Interface Board for inputs from an absolute encoder e Analog Setting Board to input settings via variable resistors e Analog I O Board for analog I O Also decide if it will be necessary to connect to a Controller Link System 2 Allocate I O Nothing is required to allocate I O with the CQM1H I O tables are not re quired and all I O is allocated automatically Words are allocated to I O Units starting at the CPU Unit and going to the right with Input Units being allo cated words starting at IR 001 and Output Units being allocated words start ing at IR 100 3 Set settings i
163. cuit Current Characteristic Required element AC DC CR method If the load is a relay or solenoid there The capacitance of the capacitor must is a time lag between the moment the be 1 to 0 5 uF per contact current of circuit is opened and the moment the 1 A and resistance of the resistor must load is reset be 0 5 to 1 Q per contact voltage of 1 V These values however vary with the load and the characteristics of the relay Decide these values from testing and take into consideration that the capacitance suppresses spark discharge when the contacts are separated and the resistance limits the current that flows into the load when the circuit is closed again 0 O If the supply voltage is 24 or 48 V insert the surge protector in parallel with the load If the supply voltage is 100 to 200 V insert the surge protector between the contacts Inductive load The dielectric strength of the capacitor must be 200 to 300 V If the circuit is an AC circuit use a capacitor with no polarity Diode method The diode connected in parallel with The reversed dielectric strength value 5o the load changes energy accumulated of the diode must be at least 10 times by the coil into a current which then as large as the circuit voltage value flows into the coil so that the current The forward current of the diode must will be converted into Joule heat by be the same as or larger than the load the resistance
164. cular bit 167 Unsigned decimal monitor Converts hexadecimal data in a word to unsigned decimal for display 166 Changing timer counter SV 1 Changes the SV of a timer or counter 167 Changing timer counter SV 2 Makes fine adjustment changes to the SV of the timer or counter 168 Hexadecimal BCD data Changes the BCD or hexadecimal value of a word being monitored 168 modification Binary data modification Changes the status of a word s bits when the word is being monitored 169 Signed decimal data Changes the decimal value of a word being monitored as signed decimal 170 modification data within a range of 32 768 to 32 767 2 147 487 648 to 2 147 487 647 for double length data The contents of the specified word are converted automatically to signed hexadecimal two s complement format Unsigned decimal data Changes the decimal value of a word being monitored as unsigned 170 modification decimal data within a range of 0 to 65 535 0 to 4 294 967 295 for double length data A change into hexadecimal data is made automatically Three word data modification Changes the contents of one or more of the 3 consecutive words 171 displayed in the Three word Monitor operation Force set reset Forces bits ON force set or OFF force reset 172 Clear force set reset Restores the status of all bits which have been force set of reset 173 Hex ASCII display change Converts word data displays back and forth between 4 digit hexadecimal 173 data an
165. d ASCII Reading and setting the clock Reads or sets the internal clock A Memory Cassette with a clock must be 174 mounted Displaying the cycle time Displays the current average cycle time scan time 174 7 3 2 Clearing Memory This operation is used to clear all or part of the Program Memory and data areas as well as the contents of the Programming Console s memory This operation is possible in PROGRAM mode only All Clear 1 2 3 N Caution Partial Clear 152 RUN MONITOR PROGRAM Before beginning to program for the first time or when installing a new program clear all areas The following procedure is used to clear memory completely including the pro gram all data areas counter PVs Data Memory and the PC Setup DM 6600 to DM 6659 1 Bring up the initial display by pressing the CLR Key repeatedly 2 Press the SET NOT and then the RESET Key to begin the operation Note The EM area will be displayed for the CQM1H CPU61 only 3 Press the MONTR Key to clear memory completely MONTR The PC Setup DM 6600 through DM 6659 will be cleared when this operation is performed The error log in DM 6569 to DM 6599 will not be cleared It is possible to retain the data in specified areas or part of the Program Memory To retain the data in the HR TC or DM Areas press the appropriate key after Programming Console Operations Section 7 3 1 2 3
166. d IN5 10 mA typical other inputs 6 mA typical at 24 V DC ON Voltage 17 4 V DC min OFF Voltage 5 0 V DC max ON Delay Default 8 ms max can be set between 1 and 128 ms in PC Setup see note OFF Delay Default 8 ms max can be set between 1 and 128 ms in PC Setup see note No of Inputs 16 points 16 inputs common 1 circuit Circuit Configuration Input INO T LED to 3 9kQ MH i IN15 __ 2 2 kQ te MW ne ie oe es ae 7 K Internal L TCOM a ae Circuits 0 Note Figures in parentheses are for IN4 and IN5 The input power supply polarity may be con nected in either direction 50 Output Unit Specifications Section 2 2 Item CQM1H CPU11 21 51 61 Terminal Connections IR 00000 to IR 00015 are always allocated to the CPU Unit s 16 built in input points e Inputs INO to IN 3 corresponding to IR 00000 to IR 00003 can be set in the PC Setup to be used as input interrupts e Inputs IN4 to IN7 corresponding to IR 00004 to 00007 can be used as high speed counter 0 Terminal Input Input bit Function number BO INO IR 00000 Normal inputs or input interrupts Input Interrupt Mode or Counter Mode set in A IN1 IR 00001 PC Setup DM 6628 B1 IN2 IR 00002 A1 IN3 IR 00003 B2 IN4 IR 00004 Normal inputs or high speed counter 0 B3 IN
167. d Monitor 15 2 eee This operation is used to monitor the status of up to 16 bits and words al though only 3 can be shown on the display at any one time Operation is pos sible in any mode RUN MONITOR PROGRAM The PC s operating mode can be changed during the Bit Digit Word Monitor Operation without changing the display by pressing the SHIFT Key first and then changing the mode When a program address is being displayed the status of the bit or word in that address can be monitored by pressing the MONTR Key 1 Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display 2 T the desired progam address and press the Down Arrow Key 3 amp the og a to begin au MONTR If the status of a bit is being monitored that bit s status can be changed using the Force Set Reset operation Refer to 7 3 24 Force Set Reset for details If the status of a word is being monitored that word s value can be changed using the Hexadecimal BCD Data Modification operation Refer to 7 3 20 Binary Data Modification for details 4 Press the CLR Key to end monitoring and return to bit status monitoring Follow the procedure below to monitor the status of a particular bit 1 Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display 2 Input the bit address of the desired bit and press the MONTR Key oeng i The Up or Down Arrow Key can be pressed to display the status of the pre vious or next bit The displa
168. d bit masking megabyte memory area message number mnemonic code MONITOR mode most significant bit word NC input negative delay nesting NO input noise interference nonfatal error normal condition The processes of copying data either from an external device or from a storage area to an active portion of the system such as a display buffer Also an output device connected to the PC is called a load A group of instructions that is logically related in a ladder diagram program and that requires logic block instructions to relate it to other instructions or logic blocks An instruction used to locally combine the execution condition resulting from a logic block with a current execution condition The current execution condition could be the result of a single condition or of another logic block AND Load and OR Load are the two logic block instructions Instructions used to logically combine the content of two words and output the logical results to a specified result word The logic instructions combine all the same numbered bits in the two words and output the result to the bit of the same number in the specified result word A data area that is used in data links All of a program except for subroutine and interrupt programs A process in which changes in the contents of specific memory locations are recorded during program execution A bit whose status has been temporarily made ineffective Coveri
169. d bit should be leftmost on the display In this case the differentiation status of LR 00 will be monitored 2 To specify up differentiation monitoring press the SHIFT and then the Up Arrow Key The symbols U will appear To specify down differentiation monitoring press the SHIFT and then the Down Arrow Key The symbols D will appear 3 The buzzer will sound when the specified bit goes from OFF to ON for up differentiation or from ON to OFF for down differentiation Note The buzzer will not sound if it has been turned OFF 4 Press the CLR Key to end differentiation monitoring and return to the normal monitoring display 7 3 18 Changing Timer Counter SV Inputting a New SV Constant There are two operations that can be used to change the SV of a timer or counter They are possible in MONITOR or PROGRAM mode only In MON ITOR mode the SV can be changed while the program is being executed RUN MONITOR PROGRAM The timer or counter SV can be changed either by inputting a new value or by incrementing or decrementing the current SV This operation can be used to input a new SV constant as well as to change an SV from a constant to a word address designation and vice versa The following examples show how to input a new SV constant and how to change the SV from a constant to an address 167 Programming Console Oper
170. d co sensor etc R 7 2 2 4 1 3 KQ max I Device s leakage current mA R Bleeder resistance kQ W 2 3 R W min W Bleeder resistor s power rating W The equations above were derived from the following equation Input voltage 24 R X Input current 10 Pao 5 Input voltage 24 voltage 3 Input current 10 Ix W 2 Input voltage 24 R x Input voltage 24 x margin 4 125 I O Unit Wiring Precautions Section 4 8 Inrush Current The following diagram shows two methods that can be used to reduce the large inrush current caused by certain loads such as incandescent light bulbs Example 1 y Example 2 N OUT OUT WW va A R x ken R ij COM COM Generating a dark current about 1 3 of the Inserting a regulating resistance rated current through the incandescent bulb Be careful not to damage the output transistor Reducing Noise in I O Whenever possible place I O signal lines and power lines in separate ducts or Signals raceways both inside and outside of the control panel 1 I O cables 2 Power cables SGX BD 2 Yt RD Suspended duct In floor duct Conduits If the I O wiring and power wiring must be routed in the same duct use shielded cable and connect the shield to the GR terminal to reduce noise Inductive Loads When an inductive load is connected to an I O Unit connect a surge suppressor or diode in parallel with the load as shown belo
171. decimal to simplify operation Each group of four binary bits is numerically equivalent to one hexadecimal digit A computer that is used to transfer data to or receive data from a PC in a Host Link system The host computer is used for data management and overall sys tem control Host computers are generally small personal or business comput ers An interface that allows communications with a host computer An interface connecting a PC to a host computer to enable monitoring or pro gram control from the host computer A memory area that preserves bit status during power interrupts and used as work bits in programming Glossary I O bit I O capacity O delay O device I O interrupt I O point O refreshing I O response time VO Unit 1 0 word IBM PC AT or compatible increment indirect address initialization error initialize input input bit input device input point input signal A bit in memory used to hold I O status Input bits reflect the status of input termi nals output bits hold the status for output terminals The number of inputs and outputs that a PC is able to handle This number ranges from around one hundred for smaller PCs to two thousand for the largest ones The delay in time from when a signal is sent to an output to when the status of the output is actually in effect or the delay in time from when the status of an input changes until the signal indicating the change
172. der phase Directional Decrement B input signal input pulse input Note Pin numbers for negative pins are given in parentheses Differential Phase Mode Phase A Phase B w peal st ees a x dellelslelsl s Islet delili ax Le bebldslohielhhl hidslklelslbe teldli 187 High speed Counter Board Encoder input A UP input Encoder input B DOWN input 188 Section 8 1 Phase A Phase B 1x 2x T L Count up Count up Count up H al Count up L H Count up Count up L 4 Count up L T Count down T H Count down Count down H 4 Count down p L Count down Count down Count down Up Down Mode Encoder input A Pulse input LE Encoder input B v v 1 2 Ne Nee Increment Ja v 3 2 1 Decrement Direction input Pulse Direction Mode Bee EE vy 1 eee eee Increment v v 2 3 nd q Nan es SS Decrement Note The function of encoder inputs A and B in Pulse Direction Mode and Up Down Mode differs from the Pulse I O Board CQM1H PLB21 High speed Counter Board Section 8 1 Wiring Examples The following diagrams show a connection to an encoder possessing phases A B and Z C ting to 24 V DC Open collector Encoder ee p High speed Counter Board in Differential Phase Mode Pin No Counter 1 input A Counter 1 input A Counter 1 input B Counter 1 in
173. dicated I O Units Operation Manual This manual describes the system configuration and installation of the CQM1H and provides a basic explanation of operating procedures for the Programming Consoles It also introduces the capabilities of the SYSMAC Support Software SSS and SYSMAC CPT Support Software Read this manual first to acquaint yourself with the CQM1H The CQM1H Programming Manual W364 provides detailed descriptions of the CQM1H s programming functions The SYSMAC Support Software Operation Manuals Basics and C series PCs W247 and W248 provide descriptions of SSS operations for the CQM1H and other SYSMAC C series PCs The SYSMAC CPT Support Software Quick Start Guide W332 and User Manual W333 provide descrip tions of ladder diagram operation in the Windows environment The CX Programmer User Manual W361 and the CX Server User Manual W362 provide details of operations for the WS02 CXPC1 E CX Programmer Please read this manual carefully and be sure you understand the information provided before attempting to install and operate the CQM1H Section 1 describes the CQM1H s special features and functions describes the system configurations and outlines the steps required before operation It also provides a list of CQM1H functions by purpose and a comparison between the CQM1H and the CQM1 Section 2 gives specifications for the Units that go together to create a CQM1H PC and provides function al specifications of the memo
174. ds 64 points CQM1 CPU43 44 EV1 Board slot 2 Words used by Inner Board mounted to slot 4 words PVs of high speed counters 2 IR 232 to IR 243 1 and 2 are stored in IR 232 to IR 235 Other CPU Units IR 232 to IR 235 can be used as work bits 64 points CQM1 CPU43 EV1 4 words PVs of pulse outputs are stored in IR 236 to IR 239 Other CPU Units IR 236 to IR 239 are either used by the system or can be used as work bits 96 points CQM1 CPU45 EV1 Analog 6 words input conversion values and analog output values are stored in IR 232 to IR 237 Other CPU Units IR 232 to IR 237 can be used as work bits Analog set values 64 points 4 words 64 points CQM1 CPU42 EV1 4 words Analog set values are Words where analog set values are stored when using the CQM1 AVB41 Analog stored in IR 220 to IR 223 Setting Board IR 220 to IR 223 Other CPU Units IR 220 to IR 223 can be used as work bits 39 CQM1 CQMI1H Comparison Section 1 5 DM area CQM1H DM area data is accessed CQM1 DM area data is accessed CPU51 61 read write in word 16 bit CPU40O EV1 read write in word 16 bit 6 656 words units Word values are 6 656 words units only Word values are CQM1H retained when the power is CQM1 retained when the power is CPU11 21 oe he or the mode is CPU11 21 EV1 ph i or the mode is 3 584 words CNanged 1 536 words cnanged Read write CQM1H CPU51 61 Read write CQ
175. e 176 Refer to the relevant Support Software Operation Manual for details on errors that appear when operating the SSS or SYSMAC CPT Support Software 1 Inputting the Self holding Bit 1 2 3 1 Input the normally open condition IR 00000 It isn t necessary to input leading zeroes LD A i 2 Input the OR condition IR 02000 Cc A A A 3 177 Programming Example Section 7 4 3 Input the normally closed AND condition CNT 000 It isn t necessary to oa leading zeroes Ea nor ext 4 Input the OUT instruction IR 02000 Cc A A A i i 2 Inputting the One second Timer 1 2 3 1 Input the normally open condition IR 20000 LD Cc A A A i i 2 Input the normally closed AND condition TIM 002 It isn t necessary to Fy paang zeroes ES nor m WRITE 3 Input the 1 second timer TIM 001 B s o TIM EA 4 Input the SV for TIM 001 0010 1 0 s B A i 1 0 WRITE 3 Inputting the The following key operations are used to input the 2 second timer Two second Timer 1 2 3 EI the aaa open condition IR 20000 EA EA WRITE 2 Input the normally closed AND condition TIM 002 It isn t necessary to input leading zeroes AND c NOT TIM 178 Programming Example Section 7 4
176. e are not compatible Be sure to use the cor rect communications port at the PT Protocol macro Used to freely exchange data with No No Yes Clock Some Memory Cassette are equipped with a clock Note Used to store the time when errors occur Input time Used to set the ON or OFF response times for DC Input Units constants Available settings 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 ms Power OFF AC power supply 10 to 25 ms DC power supply 5 to 25 ms detection time Memory Held Areas Holding bits contents of Data Memory and Extended Data Memory and status of the protection counter Completion Flags and present values Note If the I O Hold Bit SR 25212 is turned ON and the PC Setup is set to maintain the I O Hold Bit status when power to the PC is turned ON the contents of the IR area and the LR area will be saved Sending Host Link command responses can be sent to a computer connected via the Host Link System commands to a using the TXD communications port output instruction Host Link computer Remote Host Link or peripheral bus communications via a CPU Unit s serial communications port can be programming and used for remote programming and remote monitoring of the PC through a Controller Link System monitoring This function is however not supported for the serial communications ports on the Serial Communications Board Program check Program checks are performed at the beginning of operation for
177. e eee ee 8 1 6 Pin Arrangement of Connectors CN1 and CN2 0 0 0005 8 1 7 Wiring Examples i cans ca seb aad See ee eee Ue ORAS RE 8 1 8 Speciications seinnse testere e bee be Seed see ERE DEEE BIERE OS bas 8129 internal Circuits 5 ween kk nde Poni ea eee Me aed 8 27 Pulse O Board n rinor isna ee KEERA tae aaa eis ae ae eae ee ee ae 822 1 Model 2 44 08 2 2G SR ti Se as CR ROSA AS 8 2 2 FUMCHOD v soscsc see fa sent G8 URE GAs dead Aaah Areas E NRN 8 2 3 System Configuration 0 cece eee 8 2 4 Applicable Inner Board Slot 0 ce eee eee 8 2 5 Names and Functions sesei seri 0 0 0 eee eects 8 2 6 CNI and CN2 Pin Arrangement 00 0 0 eee ee ee eee 8 2 7 Wiring Examples nra seina a ke ida As eae pea e ee ee eS 8 2 8 Specifications cic etd gape Sg acted nE teie e ual dog wed seg eee dg beh 8 3 Absolute Encoder Interface Board 0 0 2 eee eee SF Model tiers ct sins RE RE sh pie ea ate ae Sons ad ee Bi a 8 3 2 FUNCHONS ei e A Oe Oe eS a CEO BR Shee ee as 8 3 3 System Configuration ssa enrera kosi ndee eee 8 3 4 Applicable Inner Board Slots 22 0 0 0 0 0 eee eee 8 3 5 Names and Functions 00 00 8 3 6 Pin Arrangement of Connectors CN and CN2 2 0 0 0c eee eee eee 8 3 7 Wiring Examples 0 0 0 eee ene 8 3 8 Specwications e520 06 ck kee Case Read ea Oe oe ee RRS ees 8 3 9 Internal Circuit Configuration 0 0 eee eee eee ee eee 8
178. e label attached may result in malfunction N WARNING Do not touch any of the terminals while the power is being supplied Doing so may result in electric shock N Caution Tighten the terminal screws to a torque of 0 5 N e m N Caution Always use crimp connectors for wiring Do not connect bare stranded wires di rectly to terminals N Caution To satisfy the EC directives low voltage directive provide reinforced insulation or double insulation on the I O Units DC power supply N Caution Install external breakers and take other safety measures against short circuiting in external wiring Insufficient safety measures against short circuiting may re sult in burning Z N Caution Double check all the wiring before turning ON the power supply Incorrect wiring may result in burning Z N Caution Do not apply voltages exceeding the input voltages to Input Units or voltages exceeding the switching capacity to Output Units Doing so may result in dam age or destruction of the I O Unit or result in fire Leakage Current When two wire sensors such as photoelectric sensors proximity sensors or 24 V DC limit switches with LEDs are used the input bit may be turned ON erroneously by leakage current If the leakage current exceeds 1 3 mA insert a bleeder resis tor in the circuit to reduce the input impedance as shown in the following dia gram Input power supply Bleeder resistor R M1H 2 wire metho
179. e programs In a PC System the central processing unit executes the program processes I O signals communicates with external devices etc See word See word A numeric usually binary code used to represent an alphanumeric character A sum transmitted with a data pack in communications The checksum can be recalculated from the received data to confirm that the data in the transmission has not been corrupted A pulse available at specific bits in memory for use in timing operations Various clock pulses are available with different pulse widths and therefore different fre quencies A bit in memory that supplies a pulse that can be used to time operations Vari ous clock pulse bits are available with different pulse widths and therefore differ ent frequencies Data that is stored in a memory of a PC and which is shared by other PCs in the same system Each PC has a specified section s of the area allocated to it Each PC writes to the section s allocated to it and reads the sections allocated to the other PCs with which it shares the common data Cable used to transfer data between components of a control system and con forming to the RS 232C or RS 422 standards An instruction used to compare data at different locations in memory to deter mine the relationship between the data Glossary Completion Flag condition CONFIG SYS constant control bit control data control signal Control System controll
180. e the battery within one week after the first indication that the battery requires replacement Always keep a spare Battery Set on hand It will be highly unlikely that you will be able to obtain a replacement Battery Set in time other wise If the battery is not replaced in time the user program and other data may be lost The built in battery is used for retaining the status of the HR and DM areas the user s program and other specified status while power is not being supplied to the CQM1H The total number of hours that the battery can provide backup power will vary as shown below depending on the ambient temperature and whether or not a Memory Cassette with a clock is installed Memory Cassette with Total hours with no current supplied clock Guaranteed time Actual capacity see note 1 see note 2 No 11 000 h Approx 1 yr 43 000 h Approx 5 yr Yes 9 700 h Approx 1 yr 1 Total hours with no current supplied at an ambient temperature of 55 C 2 Total hours with no current supplied at an ambient temperature of 25 C Total Time with No Current Supplied in Years Note 224 Memory Cassette with clock No Memory Cassette with clock Ambient temperature 1 The values in the above graph are reference values 2 The effective life of the battery is five years Replace the battery every five years even if it could be used longer Replacement Procedure Section 9 3 9 3 Replacement
181. e to a data transmission The time a device will wait for a response to a data transmission before assum ing that an error has occurred Glossary Restart Bit result word retrieve retry return reversible counter reversible shift register right hand instruction rightmost bit word rising edge ROM rotate register RS 232C interface RUN mode rung scan scan time scheduled interrupt SCP seal self diagnosis self maintaining bit series A bit used to restart part of a PC A word used to hold the results from the execution of an instruction The processes of copying data either from an external device or from a storage area to an active portion of the system such as a display buffer Also an output device connected to the PC is called a load The process whereby a device will re transmit data which has resulted in an error message from the receiving device The process by which instruction execution shifts from a subroutine back to the main program usually the point from which the subroutine was called A counter that can be both incremented and decremented depending on the specified conditions A shift register that can shift data in either direction depending on the specified conditions See terminal instruction The lowest numbered bit of a group of bits generally of an entire word or the lowest numbered word of a group of words This bit word is often called the least si
182. eas All of the following areas are backed up using the battery If the battery expires the data for these areas will be lost The User Program The user program is made up of program instructions These instructions read and write to I O memory and are executed in order starting at the top of the pro gram After all instructions are executed the I O for all Units are refreshed and the cycle repeats again from the top of the program If pin 1 on the DIP switch on the front of the CPU Unit is set to ON the user pro gram cannot be written from a Programming Device Reading writing and comparison can be performed on the user program when a Memory Cassette is used 1 0 Memory I O memory is the area used for reading and writing from the user program or a 132 Programming Device It is comprised of both areas that are cleared when power is turned OFF and ON and areas that will retain data Operating Modes Section 5 2 PC Setup DM 6600 to DM 6655 Read only Area DM 6144 to DM 6568 Error Log DM 6569 to DM 6599 Expansion Instruction Information 5 1 2 DIP Switch I O memory is also partitioned into areas that exchanges data with all Units and areas strictly for internal use There are four times at which data can be ex changed with Units Once per instruction execution cycle on the execution of the I O refresh instruction IORF 97 input refreshing when an interrupt input is received and immediate refresh of outp
183. ecessary to set the communications mode in the PC Setup to Host Link mode Insert your fingertip or a small screwdriver in the gap on the right of the cover and pull to the left to open as shown on the left in the following illustration Lele Peripheral port 3 1 8 Built in RS 232C Port The RS 232C port built into the CPU Unit is mainly used for connecting devices other than Programming Devices It is not possible to perform communications with a Programming Console or any other Programming Device via a peripheral bus using this port The following communications modes are supported Host Link no protocol 1 1 Data Link and 1 1 mode NT link Connector Pin Assignments Pin assignments for the RS 232C port are given in the following table Pin Abbreviation Name Direction 1 FG Field ground 2 SD TXD Send data Output 3 RD RXD Receive data Input 4 RS RTS Request to send Output 5 CS CTS Clear to send Input 6 5V see note Power supply 7 Not used a 8 Not used 9 SG Signal ground Connector fitting FG Field ground Note The 5 V power supply connected via pin 6 is only for the NT ALOO1 RS 232C RS 422S Converting Link Adapter 83 CPU Units Section 3 1 Port Specifications Item Specification Communications method Half duplex Sync Start stop Baud rate 1 200 2 400 4 800 9 600 or 19 200 bps Transmiss
184. ecific function and they can be freely used within the program Controller Link status areas 96 bits IR 090 to IR 095 IR 09000 to IR 09515 Used to indicate the Controller Link data link status information Can be used as work bits when a Controller Link Unit is not connected 96 bits IR 190 to IR 195 IR 19000 to IR 19515 Used to indicate the Controller Link error and network participation information Can be used as work bits when a Controller Link Unit is not connected MACRO operand area note 2 Input area 64 bits IR 096 to IR 099 IR 09600 to IR 09915 Output area 64 bits IR 196 to IR 199 IR 19600 to IR 19915 Used when the MACRO instruction MCRO Q99 is used Can be used as work bits when the MACRO instruction is not used Inner Board slot 1 area 256 bits IR 200 to IR 215 IR 20000 to IR 21515 These bits are allocated to the Inner Board mounted in slot 1 of a CQM1H CPU51 61 Can be used as work bits when slot 1 is empty CQM1H CTB41 High speed Counter Board IR 200 to IR 213 14 words Used by the Board IR 214 and IR 215 2 words Not used CQM1H SCB41 Serial Communications Board IR 200 to IR 207 8 words Used by the Board IR 208 to IR 215 8 words Not used Analog settings area note 1 64 bits IR 220 to IR 223 IR 22000 to IR 22315 Used to store the analog settings when a CQM1H AVB41 Analog Setting Board is mounted
185. ecuted and the resulting data is stored to enable step by step analysis and debugging A memory area used to store the results of trace operations The process of moving data from one location to another within the PC or between the PC and external devices When data is transferred generally a copy of the data is sent to the destination i e the content of the source of the transfer is not changed The distance that a signal can be transmitted A signal used to activate some process e g the execution of a trace operation An address in the program that defines the beginning point for tracing The actual beginning point can be altered from the trigger by defining either a positive or negative delay The memory area used to hold the active program i e the program that is being currently executed In OMRON PC terminology the word Unit is capitalized to indicate any product sold for a PC System Most of the names of these products end with the word Unit A number assigned to some Units to facilitate identification when assigning words or other operating parameters A bit whose status is effective See masked bit A binary value that is stored in memory without any indication of whether it is positive or negative The process of transferring a program or data from a lower level or slave com puter to a higher level or host computer If a Programming Devices is involved the Programming Device is considered the host computer
186. ed system count pulse counter CPU Unit CTS CX Programmer CX Protocol CY cycle cycle time cyclic interrupt data area data area boundary A flag used with a timer or counter that turns ON when the timer has timed out or the counter has reached its set value A symbol placed on an instruction line to indicate an instruction that controls the execution condition for the terminal instruction Each condition is assigned a bit in memory that determines its status The status of the bit assigned to each condition determines the next execution condition Conditions correspond to LOAD LOAD NOT AND AND NOT OR or OR NOT instructions An MS DOS file containing environment settings for a personal computer An input for an operand in which the actual numeric value is specified Constants can be input for certain operands in place of memory area addresses Some operands must be input as constants A bit in a memory area that is set either through the program or via a Program ming Device to achieve a specific purpose e g a Restart Bit is turned ON and OFF to restart a Unit An operand that specifies how an instruction is to be executed The control data may specify the part of a word is to be used as the operand it may specify the destination for a data transfer instructions it may specify the size of a data table used in an instruction etc A signal sent from the PC to effect the operation of the controlled system Al
187. eed Counter Board Section 8 1 Input Voltage Level Switches 8 1 6 Pin Arrangement of Connectors CN1 and CN2 CN1 Pulse Input 1 and 2 Pin arrangement 8 20UT SW1 2 Counter 1 Counter 2 Counter 3 Counter 4 Status Setting SW6 1 SW6 2 SW3 1 SW3 2 ON Counter input Input voltage A Line driver level OFF 24 V DC level default SW5 1 SW5 2 SW2 1 SW2 2 ON Counter input Input voltage B Line driver level OFF 24 V DC level default SW4 1 SW4 2 SW1 1 SW1 2 ON Counter input Input voltage Z Line driver level OFF 24 V DC level default Left side of Board s6 1 Phase A High speed counter 1 ig High speed counter 2 SHE 5 1 Phase B High speed counter 1 SW5 SW5 2 Sw4 High speed counter 2 wen Phase Z High speed counter 1 High speed counter 2 SW3 sw3 1 Phase A High speed counter 3 ae High speed counter 4 sw2 1 Phase B High speed counter 3 ee High speed counter 4 1 1 Phase Z High speed counter 3 High speed counter 4 15 O00000 O00000 Pin No Name Function 1 Externaloutput2 O 2 1OUT External output 1 3 1Z Counter 1 input Z 4 1Z Counter 1 input Z 5 1B Counter 1 input B 6 1B Counter 1 input B 7 1A Counter 1 input A 8 1A Counter 1 input A 9 DC Power supply for external outputs 1 to 4 5 to 24 V DC 10 2Z Counter 2 input Z 11 2Z Counter 2 input Z 12 2B Counter 2 input B
188. en 100 and 240 V AC 50 to 60 Hz Refer to 3 2 2 Selecting a Power Supply Unit for details on Power Supply Unit capacity Do not touch any of the terminals while the power is being supplied Doing so may result in electric shock Tighten the AC power terminal screws to a torque of 0 8 N e m Loose terminal screws can cause fires or errors in operation The cross sectional area of each wire must be 2 mm min Insulating transformer Breaker C pad 2 AC power supply 2 8 Or bo An insulating transformer greatly Twist the wires reduces the noise that may be induced between the power line and ground Do not ground the secondary side of the insulating transformer Be sure that the AC power supply voltage remains within the allowable voltage range For details refer to 2 1 1 Power Supply Units The CQM1 PA216 Power Supply Unit is switchable with an input voltage range of 80 to 138 V AC or 160 to 264 V AC Refer to 3 2 2 Selecting a Power Supply Unit for details Use round M3 5 crimp connectors of the dimensions shown below for wiring AC Power Supply Units Always use crimp connectors for wiring Do not connect bare stranded wires di rectly to terminals Wiring and Connections Section 4 7 Terminal Blocks CQM1 PA203 AC input ALG GR CQM1 PA216 AC Q input OO
189. eps required before operation It also provides a list of CQM1H functions by purpose and a comparison between the CQM1H and the CQM1 Read this section first if you have not previously used the CQM1H Refer to the COM H Programming Manual for information on programming tett Features ass Sete titel 8 nt Ath Aut E r O ad wise tise a land aka atl eS 1 2 System Configuration esc eos ok pe eb A A Pee SA ee eee Corl ER 1 2 1 Basic Configuration 0 0 2c eee eee 1 2 2 Connections to Programming Devices 0 0 e eee eee eee 1 2 3 CPU Units e cau ot oad eee ed eee ohne ees See ae ee ks 1 2 4 Inner Boards cs 3 6 S243 t det Ao ha ea abe eae 1 2 5 Communications Units 0 0 eee tees 1 2 6 Memory Cassettes 0 ee eee tenes 1 2 7 Power Supply Units coses sesh hake SRN Va ge ee Mee ESA Sos 1 2 8 Products for Expansion I O Blocks 0 0 0 eee eee eee eee HY THOMAS beans phe te anes Ophea hana aie eat ae trata orate ar 122 10 Dedicated VO Units 3 6 03 ep soe gas SR SLE OR AEN Se a Ra ee E2 Accessories 08 5 ob ieht bos piirati eari enih bd ee eae Mente BS 1 2 12 Maximum Number of I O Units and I O Points 00 1 3 Expanded System Configuration 0 0 0 cee ccc te eee ne eee 1 3 1 Serial Communications System 00 cece eee eee 1 3 2 Communications Networks 0 0 0 eee eee eee 1 4 Functions Listed by Purpose 0 cece cette nent eens 1
190. erly according to the system to be controlled e Provide appropriate safety measures such as overheat prevention and alarm systems in separate circuits to ensure safety of the entire system even when the Temperature Controller malfunctions e Allow at least 10 minutes after turning ON the Temperature Controller as war mup time e Do not use thinner to clean the product Use commercially available cleaning alcohol e Mount the I O Control Unit on the right of the CPU Block e When using Expansion I O Blocks configure the system so that the current consumptions for the CPU Block and each of the Expansion I O Blocks do not exceed the specified values and that the total current consumption does not exceed the current capacity of the Power Supply Unit e Configure the system so that the number of Units in both the CPU Block and Expansion I O Blocks do not exceed the maximum number of connectable Units for the Block xvii Conformance to EC Directives 6 6 3 6 4 xviii Conformance to EC Directives Applicable Directives Concepts Note e EMC Directives e Low Voltage Directive EMC Directives OMRON devices that comply with EC Directives also conform to the related EMC standards so that they can be more easily built into other devices or ma chines The actual products have been checked for conformity to EMC stan dards see the following note Whether the products conform to the standards in the system used by the cust
191. errupt See normally closed condition An acronym for Japanese Industrial Standards A type of programming where execution moves directly from one point in a pro gram to another without sequentially executing any instructions in between A definer used with a jump that defines the points from and to which a jump is to be made A form of program arising out of relay based control systems that uses circuit type diagrams to represent the logic flow of programming instructions The appearance of the program is similar to a ladder and thus the name A symbol used in drawing a ladder diagram program An instruction that represents the conditions on a ladder diagram program The other instructions in a ladder diagram fall along the right side of the diagram and are called terminal instructions See rightmost bit worad Acronym for light emitting diode a device used for indicators or displays The highest numbered bits of a group of bits generally of an entire word or the highest numbered words of a group of words These bits words are often called most significant bits words A hardware or software connection formed between two Units Link can refer either to a part of the physical connection between two Units or a software con nection created to data existing at another location i e data links Glossary load logic block logic block instruction logic instruction LR area main program mark trace maske
192. ers Data links can be created between PCs so that data can be shared without pro gramming and FINS message communications can be performed enabling separate control and data transfer when required In particular direct setting us 27 Functions Listed by Purpose Section 1 4 ey Data links automat ically transfer data every cycle 1 4 Functions Listed by Purpose ing data links allows the creation of a flexible data link system with effective use of data areas Controller Link Unit Controller Link Unit omni J ra Controller Link wired Messages sent to other nodes whenever necessary Purpose Unit Board Function Controller Link Unit CS1 C200HX HG HE CVM1 or CV series PC Details System design Connecting 12 or more I O or Dedicated I O Units Installing a PC ina narrow space I O Control Unit and I O Interface Unit Using an Expansion I O Block You can connect up to 5 Units to the CPU Block and 11 Units to the Expansion I O Block Cycle time settings Creating a minimum CPU Unit PC Setup Cycle Set in DM 6619 cycle time Time Minimum 0001 to 9999 ms Cycle Time Stopping operation if PC Setup Cycle Set in DM 6618 00 to 99 setting the cycle time exceeds Monitor Time units 10 ms 100 ms 1 s a set time Detecting when the SR area Cycle SR 25309 turns ON cycle time exceeds Time
193. ertion Follow the procedure below to insert the IR 00105 NO condition at address 00206 1 2 3 1 Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display 2 Input the address where the NO condition will be inserted and press the Down Arrow Key It is not necessary to input leading zeroes Bee 3 Input the new instruction and press the INS Key AND B A F INS 4 Press the Down Arrow Key to insert the new instruction 2 Note For instructions that require more operands such as set values in put the operands and then press the WRITE Key Deletion Follow the procedure below to delete the IR 00103 NO condition at address 00205 1 2 3 1 Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display 2 Input the address where the NO condition will be deleted and press the Down Arrow Key It is not necessary to input leading zeroes aooga 3 Press the DEL Key 161 Programming Console Operations Section 7 3 4 Press the Up Arrow Key to delete the specified instruction If the instruction has more operands the operands will be deleted automati cally with the instruction After completing the insertion and deletion procedures use the Up and Down Arrow Keys to scroll through the program and verify that it has been changed correctly as shown in the following diagram Corrected Program H 10000 00201 00102 00205 00105 00206 AND NOT 00104
194. es 2 Units B7A Interface Units 16 output points CQM1 B7A02 1 word 16 input points CQM1 B7A12 1 word 32 output points CQM1 B7A03 2 words 32 input points CQM1 B7A13 2 words 16 input points and 16 output points CQM1 B7A21 1 word 1 word G730 Interface Units 2 wire transmission terminal G730 CQM1 G7M21 1 or 2 words 1 or 2 words Master Unit 32 inputs 32 outputs max 32 points 16 points switchable For Expansion Master Input 32 points CQM1 G7N11 1 or 2 words max 32 points 16 points switchable For Expansion Master Output 32 CQM1 G7N01 1 or 2 words points max 32 points 16 points switchable I O Link Unit SYSMAC For SYSMAC BUS Wired Slave Unit CQM1 LK501 2 words 2 words BUS Wired Slave Unit 32 input points and 32 output points Sensor Unit Sensor input points 4 max CQM1 SEN01 1 word Used with Sensor Module s Up to four Up to 5 Sensor Modules can be mounted to a words with single Sensor Unit following 4 Modules Optical Fiber For E32 series Fiber Units Automatic E3X MA11 1 word Photoelectric Module teaching is supported Photoelectric Module For E3C series Photoelectric Sensors E3C MA11 1 word with Separate Amplifier An automatic teaching function is incorporated Proximity Module with For E2C series Proximity Sensors E2C MA11 1 word Separate Amplifier Automatic teaching is supported Dummy Module Mounted as spacers to the open slots E39 M11 1 word of the CQM1 when no Sensor Module
195. es for one to one communications between the personal computer and the PC Unit Board Port Serial Model number Length Commenis Startup communications Mode see mode note CPU Unit Peripheral Peripheral bus or CS1W CN114 0 05m PROGRAM port Host Link SYS CQM1 CIF02 3 3m mode MAC WAY RS 232C Host Link XW2Z 200S CV 2m Use a connector Ignored port D Sub SYSMAC WAY for which ESD 9 pin male XW2Z 500S CV 5m countermeasures have been taken Serial RS 232C Host Link XW2Z 200S CV 2m Use a connector Communications port D Sub SYSMAC WAY for which ESD Board 9 pin XW2Z 500S CV 5m countermeasures female have been taken Note The Startup Modes in the above table are for when DM 6600 in the PC Setup is set to the default settings The Startup Mode depends on the type of cable used For details refer to 5 2 3 Startup Mode Direct Connection to Peripheral Port 98 It is possible to connect the personal computer directly to the peripheral port us ing the CS1W CN226 626 Connecting Cable dedicated cable for IBM PC AT or compatible computers If this cable is used the Startup Mode when DM 6600 in the PC Setup is set to the default settings will be RUN mode as shown in the following table Programming Devices Section 3 6 Serial communications mode Peripheral bus or Model number Length Startup Mode see note CS1W CN226 or 2mor6m RUN mode Host Link CS1W CN626 SYSM
196. et Value Comparison Interrupt is executed when the high speed counter PV counter interrupt is equal to a specified value Range Comparison Interrupt is executed when the high speed counter PV lies within a specified range Note Counting is possible for high speed counter inputs from the CPU Unit s inter nal input points Pulse I O Boards or Absolute Encoder Interface Boards The High speed Counter Board has no interrupt function and can only output bit patterns internally and externally I O allocation I O is automatically allocated in order from the Unit nearest to the CPU Unit Because there are no I O tables it is not necessary and not possible to create I O tables from a Programming Device 45 Output Unit Specifications Section 2 1 Memory Area Structure Data area IR area note 1 Input area 256 bits IR 000 to IR 015 IR 00000 to IR 01515 Function Input bits can be allocated to Input Units or I O Units The 16 bits in IR 000 are always allo cated to the CPU Unit s built in inputs Output area 256 bits IR 100 to IR 115 IR 10000 to IR 11515 Output bits can be allocated to Output Units or I O Units Work areas 2 528 bits min note 2 IR 016 to IR 089 IR 01600 to IR 08915 IR 116 to IR 189 IR 11600 to IR 18915 IR 216 to IR 219 IR 21600 to IR 21915 IR 224 to IR 229 IR 22400 to IR 22915 Work bits do not have any sp
197. ette into the grooves and press in until it engages with the Cassette connector inside the CPU Unit as shown in the following diagram Close the cover when finished Note 1 Always turn OFF power to the CQM1H before mounting or removing a Memory Cassette 2 Do not remove the battery If the batter is removed for more than 5 minutes data in the CPU Unit may be lost 81 CPU Units Section 3 1 3 Do not leave the cover open during operation CPU Unit Memory Cassette Transferring and There are two methods to read write and compare data between a Memory Cas Comparing Data sette and the CPU Unit AR area control bits flag and automatic transfer at start up Refer to the CQM1H Programming Manual for details AR Area Control Bits and Flag AR 1400 Turn ON to write data from the CPU Unit to the Memory Cassette AR 1401 Turn ON to read data from the Memory Cassette to the CPU Unit AR 1402 Turn ON to compare contents of the CPU Unit and Memory Cassette AR 1403 Turns ON when comparison shows the CPU Unit and Memory Cas sette to contain different data Automatic Transfer at Startup auto boot If pin 2 on the DIP switch on the front of the CPU Unit is ON Memory Cassette data will be automatically transferred to the CPU Unit at startup 3 1 6 Serial Communications Ports Peripheral Port Under the cover Usually used for Programming Devices Communications with Programming Consoles are supported via this port onl
198. ettings Board is stored as a 4 digit BCD between 0000 and 0200 in the analog settings words IR 220 to IR 223 By using the Analog Setting Board an operator can for example set the value of a timer instruction using an analog setting IR 220 to IR 223 and thereby slight ly speed up or slow down the speed or timing of a conveyor belt simply by adjust ing a control with a screwdriver removing the need for a Programming Device Analog Setting Board Section 8 4 8 4 3 Applicable Inner Board Slots The Analog Setting Board can be installed in either slot 1 left slot or slot 2 right slot of the CQM1H CPU51 61 CPU Unit Both slots however cannot be used at the same time Slot 1 Slot 2 Install in one slot only C000 8 4 4 Names and Functions The four analog controls of the Analog Setting Board are located on the front panel The front panel does not have any indicators The value of the setting increases as the control is rotated clockwise Use a small Philips screwdriver for this purpose Specifying IR 220 to IR 223 as the set value of a TIM instruction enables the Board to be used as an analog timer When the timer is started the analog set tings are stored as the timer set value O The value for this control is stored in IR 220 The value for this control is stored in IR 221 The value for this control is stored in IR 222 The value for this control is stored in IR 223 N Ca
199. even conductors with diameters of 0 18 and standard length of 5 m is used 2 Connect to CQM1H ABB21 3 Use 12 to 24 V DC 4 Connect to compatible encoder 210 Absolute Encoder Interface Board Section 8 3 8 3 8 Specifications Item Specifications Name Absolute Encoder Interface Board Model number CQM1H ABB21 Applicable CPU Unit CQM1H CPU51 61 Unit classification CQM1H series Inner Board Mounting locations and number of Boards 1 Board can be mounted in slot 2 Absolute Encoder inputs 2 inputs Refer to Pulse Inputs below for details Settings None Indicators Front Eight LEDs 1 each of Ready RDY Error ERR 2 each of Bit 2 ON INL Incrementing INC and Decrementing DECI Front connections Connectors CN1 and CN2 Compatible connector Sockets and Hood provided as standard accessories Current consumption Supplied from Power Supply Unit 5 V DC 150 mA max Dimensions 25 x 110 x 107 mm W x H x D Weight 90 g max Standard accessories Sockets XM2D 1501 OMRON x 2 Hoods XM2S 1511 OMRON x 2 Absolute Encoder Input Specifications Item Specifications Number of input points Two points Input code Binary gray code Operating modes BCD Mode or 360 Mode Set in PC Setup Resolutions 8 bit 10 bit or 12 bit Set in PC Setup
200. f 80 minutes Shock resistance 147 m s 118 m s2 for Contact Output Units 3 times each in X Y and Z directions Ambient temperature Operating 0 to 55 C Storage 20 to 75 C except battery Humidity 10 to 90 with no condensation Atmosphere Must be free from corrosive gases Grounding Less than 100 Q Enclosure rating Mounted in a panel Weight 5 kg max Dimensions 187 to 603 x 110 x 107 mm WxHxD without cables 44 Note 1 Disconnect the LG terminal of the Power Supply Unit from the GR terminal when performing insulation and dielectric strength tests If the tests are repeatedly performed with the LG and GR terminals short circuited the internal components may be damaged 2 98 Acceleration m s2 1 Amplitude 0 075 10 57 150 Frequency Hz Output Unit Specifications Section 2 1 2 1 2 CPU Unit Specifications Performance Specifications Item Specifications Control method Stored program method I O control method Cyclic scan and direct output immediate interrupt processing used together Programming language Ladder diagram I O capacity CQM1H CPU11 21 256 CQM1H CPU51 61 512 Program capacity CQM1H CPU11 21 3 2 Kwords CQM1H CPU51 7 2 Kwords CQM1H CPU61 15 2 Kwords Data memory capacity CQM1H CPU11 21 3 Kwords CQM1H CPU51 6 Kwords CQM1H CPU61 12 Kwords DM 6 Kwords EM 6 Kwords Instruction lengt
201. f Dedicated I O Units Power Supply Unit Width mm CPU Block only With Expansion I O 0 lt n lt 11 Block connected O lt n lt 5 CQM1 PA203 32 xn 187 32 xn 219 CQM1 PA206 32 xn 219 32 x n 251 CQM1 PA216 CQM1 PD026 Note For example if a CQM1 CPU51 61 Power Supply Unit is used and there is a to tal of four I O Units and Dedicated I O Units the width would be 347 mm W 32 x 4 219 347 mm If a Communications Unit is connected to the CQM1 CPU51 61 add 32 mm to obtain the total width External Dimensions for Expansion I O Block n Units n No of I O Units No of Dedicated I O Units W 32x n 60 2 1 lt n lt 11 108 Mounting Dimensions Section 4 3 CPU Unit The following diagrams show the dimensions of the CPU Unit and End Cover which covers the Unit at the far right side of the PC The End Cover is provided with the CPU Unit All dimensions are in millimeters CPU Unit Front View End Cover Front View CPU Unit Side View CPU Unit Connected to Programming Device A Peripheral port Approx 160 mm RS 232C port Approx 160 mm Note The depth is the same for all Units CPU Unit with Inner Board Connectors Connected E Approx 180 mm Note The depth is the same for all Units 109 Mounting Dimensions Section 4 3 Power Supply Units The following diagram
202. fferent operating modes 5 1 Internal Structure of CPU Unit oeeie eean Ta E a a Ea E Nr aS 5 1 Memory Areas eei en ini edegi a acpi E oll ace a E ats det a S 22 DIP Switch seis iia i ais ian ead ated REAA E E abe BEN S 13 Memory Cassetten aisi onar oeenn hee own E E a bed RE EEE ENS 5 2 Oper ting Mod s zrni a ee a e end 5 2 1 Description of Operating Modes 0 eee eee eee 5 2 2 Initialization of I O Memory 0 00 cee eee eee eee 5 2 3 Startup Mode cece suse koh dete eis anal SE eet halted 5 2 4 Operation without a Battery 00 cee eee eee 131 Internal Structure of CPU Unit Section 5 1 5 1 Internal Structure of CPU Unit The following diagram shows the internal structure of the CPU Unit CPU Unit User program N I O memor DIP switch Memory Cassette User programs data memory read only areas PC Setup and expan sion instruction information can be saved and read in batch except Serial Communications PC Setup DM o Board settings DM 6655 DM 6144 o Read only DM area Controller Link DM DM 6400 o parameter area D6400 DM 6450 j io Routing table area Di adoo Serial Communications DM 6550 Board settings o part of PC setup DM 6559 o DM 6568 DM 6569 Error log area o DM 6599 Expansion instructions information l Battery backup of the above areas Note There are no I O tables registered by the user for the CQM1H 5 1 1 Memory Ar
203. following instructions can be used to do this 25315 First Cycle Flag Turns ON for 1 cycle at the start of operation 135 Operating Modes Section 5 2 If the setting shown below is made in the PC Setup DM 6655 bits 12 to 15 bat tery errors a non fatal error will not be detected even if the internal battery ex pires 15 1211 0807 0403 00 DM 6655 Low Battery Error Enable 0 Hex Detected 1 Hex Not detected 136 SECTION 6 Switch Settings This section describes the setting on the DIP switch on the front of the CPU Unit Most PC operations are controlled by param eters set in the PC Setup Refer to the CQM1 H Programming Manual for information on the PC Setup 6 1 DIP Switch Scungs preiras ie ch eae alike ete aes ak alee ee Ee ee 6 2 Communications Port and Startup Modes Settings 0 000000 0 000 137 DIP Switch Settings Section 6 1 6 1 DIP Switch Settings The illustration shows the factory settings of the DIP switch The factory settings are also given in bold in the following table The tables after the following table provide details different setting combinations for pins 5 and 7 Setting Function 1 Write protection ON User program read only DM DM 6144 to DM 6568 and PC Setup DM 6600 to DM 6655 cannot be written from a Programming Device OFF User program read only D
204. gnificant bit word The point where a signal actually changes from an OFF to an ON status Read only memory a type of digital storage that cannot be written to A ROM chip is manufactured with its program or data already stored in it and can never be changed However the program or data can be read as many times as desired A shift register in which the data moved out from one end is placed back into the shift register at the other end An industry standard for serial communications The operating mode used by the PC for normal control operations See instruction line The process used to execute a ladder diagram program The program is examined sequentially from start to finish and each instruction is executed in turn based on execution conditions See cycle time An interrupt that is automatically generated by the system at a specific time or program location specified by the operator Scheduled interrupts result in the execution of specific subroutines that can be used for instructions that must be executed repeatedly at a specified interval of time See subtract count input See self maintaining bit A process whereby the system checks its own operation and generates a warn ing or error if an abnormality is discovered A bit that is programmed to maintain either an OFF or ON status until set or reset by specified conditions A wiring method in which Units are wired consecutively in a string 241 Glossary servic
205. grams max Circuit Configuration Output Fuse a TED 3 5 A LV i 4 5 r ouo 7 5 a a 26 4 LXK La 49 voce Internal Fuse Circuits 3 5 A Pager i N OUT15 oe A i O74 fe ae 4 ar oy Max Switch Capacity per Point Max Switch Capacity Total for Unit 5 0 n 4 8 lt x x t E T E E hve 0 39 55 Terminal Connections a0 a1 B2 Bs B4 5 B5 ouma 16 gt DUn 47 4 J COM a B8 AB 68 Output Unit Specifications Section 2 3 Item CQM1 0D215 Name 8 point PNP Transistor Output Unit Max Switching Capacity 1 0 A at 24 V DC 10 _15 4 A Unit Leakage Current 0 1 mA max Residual Voltage 1 2 V max ON Delay 0 2 ms max OFF Delay 0 8 ms max No of Outputs 8 points 8 points common 1 circuit Internal Current 110 mA max at 5 V DC max Consumption Service Power Supply 24 mA min at 24 V DC 10 _15 3 mA x number of ON points Weight 240 grams max Alarm Output No of outputs 2 outputs ALMO Alarm output OUT 0 to 3 ALM1 Alarm output OUT 4 to 7 Output Max switching capacity 100 mA at 24 V DC 10 _15 specifications Leakage current 0 1 mA max Residual voltage 0 7 V max Reset Input No of inputs 2 inputs RSTO Reset input OUT 0 to 3 R
206. h 1 to 4 words per instruction Number of instructions in instruction 162 14 basic 148 special instructions set Instruction execution times Basic instructions 0 375 to 1 125 us Special instructions 17 7 us MOV instruction Overseeing time 0 70 ms Mounting structure No Backplane Units are joined horizontally using connectors Mounting DIN Track mounting screw mounting not possible CPU Unit built in DC input points 16 Maximum number of Units Maximum number of I O and Dedication I O Units Analog Power Supply Units must also be counted CPU Block only 11 Units max CPU Block and Expansion I O Block CPU Block 5 Units max Expansion I O Block 11 Units max Inner Boards CQM1H CPU11 21 None CQM1H CPU51 61 2 Boards Communications Units CQM1H CPU11 21 None CQM1H CPU51 61 1 Unit Types of Input interrupts Input Interrupt Mode Interrupt is executed in response to input from an external interrupts 4 points max source to the CPU Unit s built in input points Counter Mode Interrupt is executed in response to input received a certain number of times counted down via the CPU Unit s internal built in input points 4 points Interval timer Scheduled Interrupt Mode Program is interrupted at regular intervals measured interrupts by one the CPU Unit s internal timers 3 points max One shot Interrupt Mode One interrupt is executed after a certain time measured by one of the CPU Unit s internal timers High speed Targ
207. igh speed Counter High speed counters Differential Phase Mode 4 Board mounted in 1 2 3 and 4 multiplication factor 1 2 4 slot 2 25 kHz or 250 kHz Pulse and Direction Mode Up Down Mode 50 kHz or 500 kHz Configuration B CPU Unit Decrementing Decrementing count 1 kHz 4 11 counters total counters for input interrupts Counter Mode High speed counter O Differential Phase 1 for built in inputs Mode 2 5 kHz IR 00004 to R 00006 Incrementing Mode 5 kHz High speed Counter High speed counters Differential Phase Mode 4 Board mounted in 1 2 3 and 4 multiplication factor 1 2 4 slot 1 25 kHz or 250 kHz Pulse and Direction Mode Up Down Mode 50 kHz or 500 kHz High speed Counter High speed counters 1 Differential Phase Mode 25 kHz 2 Pulse and Direction Mode Up Down Mode 50 kHz COM1 COMI1H Comparison Section 1 5 1 4 2 Pulse Outputs Unit Board Name No of pulse Standard pulse output frequency Variable duty output points Without With trapezoidal factor pulse acceleration acceleration i output deceleration deceleration requency Transistor Output Unit Pulse outputs from an output point 20 Hz to 1 kHz Pulse Output Board Pulse outputs 2 from port 1 or 2 10 Hz to 50 kHz 20 kHz for a stepping motor Acceleration or deceleration only 0 to 50 kHz 91 6 Hz 1 5 kHz 5 9 kHz Acceleration deceleration together 100 Hz to 50 kHz System Configurati
208. ill not be cleared 3 The CQM1H CPU61 CPU Unit has only one bank in the EM Area and only bank number 0 can be specified 7 3 3 Reading Clearing Error Messages Key Sequence 1 2 3 This operation is used to display and clear error messages It is possible to dis play and clear non fatal errors and MESSAGE instruction messages in any mode but fatal errors can be cleared in PROGRAM mode only RUN MONITOR PROGRAM Before inputting a new program any error messages recorded in memory should be cleared It is assumed here that the causes of any of the errors for which error messages appear have already been taken care of If the buzzer sounds when an attempt is made to clear an error message eliminate the cause of the error and then clear the error message Refer to Section 5 Test Runs and Error Processing for troubleshooting information Follow the procedure below to display and clear messages 1 Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display 2 Press the FUN and then the MONTR Key to begin the operation If there are no messages the following display will appear If there are messages the most serious message will be displayed when the MONTR Key is pressed Pressing MONTR again will clear the present mes sage and display the next most serious error message Continue pressing MONTR until all messages have been cleared These are some examples of error messages A memory error A sys
209. iming defined by the user Changing the program Online Editing during operation from Programming Device Maintenance Maintaining status of all CPU Unit SR area I O Hold Turn ON SR 25212 outputs when operation Bit stops Starting operation with I O memory in saved status Maintaining I O memory SR area Turn ON SR 25212 and set status when power is I O Hold Bit DM 6601 bits 08 to 11 in the PC turned ON PC Setup O eee i ee the I O Hold Hold Bit Status w siatus ar startup Maintain Enabling input condition DIP switch DIP Pin 6 setting is stored in the to be set using the DIP switch pin AR 0712 switch pin instead of customized for Input Units e g user operation is switching between trial stored in the AR and actual operation area Write protecting DIP switch Turn ON pin 1 on the DIP switch Program Memory and Program and data to prohibit writing read only DM data memory general purpose write protection read only area and PC Setup only from a Peripheral Device Specifying the startup PC Setup Startup Set in DM 6600 bits 00 to 07 mode Mode Counting the times AR area Power Monitor AR 23 power turned OFF OFF Counter Failure diagnosis Handling user defined CPU Unit User error FAL 06 and FALS 07 errors and continuing or stopping PC operation accordingly Performing time diagnosis and logic diagnosis for one section of the program Recording time stamped errors including user defined errors ins
210. in bits per second See binary coded decimal An arithmetic calculation that uses numbers expressed in binary coded deci mal A number system where all numbers are expressed in base 2 i e numbers are written using only 0 s and 1 s Each group of four binary bits is equivalent to one hexadecimal digit Binary data in memory is thus often expressed in hexadeci mal for convenience An arithmetic calculation that uses numbers expressed in binary A system used to represent numbers so that every four binary bits is numerically equivalent to one decimal digit The smallest piece of information that can be represented on a computer A bit has the value of either zero or one corresponding to the electrical signals ON and OFF A bit represents one binary digit Some bits at particular addresses are allocated to special purposes such as holding the status of input from external devices while other bits are available for general use in programming The location in memory where a bit of data is stored A bit address specifies the data area and word that is being addressed as well as the number of the bit within the word 229 Glossary bit designator bit number bit control instruction block building block PC bus bus bar byte call Carry Flag central processing unit CH channel character code checksum clock pulse clock pulse bit common data communications cable comparison instruction
211. in the status is received A device connected to the I O terminals on I O Units I O devices may be either part of the Control System if they function to help control other devices or they may be part of the controlled system An interrupt generated by a signal from I O The place at which an input signal enters the PC System or at which an output signal leaves the PC System In physical terms I O points correspond to termi nals or connector pins on a Unit in terms of programming an I O points corre spond to I O bits in the IR area The process of updating output status sent to external devices so that it agrees with the status of output bits held in memory and of updating input bits in memory so that they agree with the status of inputs from external devices The time required for an output signal to be sent from the PC in response to an input signal received from an external device The Units in a PC that are physically connected to I O devices to input and output signals I O Units include Input Units and Output Units each of which is available in a range of specifications A word in the IR area that is allocated to a Unit in the PC System and is used to hold I O status for that Unit A computer that has similar architecture to that is logically compatible with and that can run software designed for an IBM PC AT computer Increasing a numeric value usually by 1 An address whose contents indicates another address The
212. ing set set value shift input signal shift register signed binary software error software protect source word special instruction SR area sss store subroutine subroutine number subtract count input SV switching capacity synchronous execution syntax syntax error 242 The process whereby the PC checks a connector or Unit to see if special proces sing is required The process of turning a bit or signal ON The value from which a decrementing counter starts counting down or to which an incrementing counter counts up i e the maximum count or the time from which or for which a timer starts timing Set value is abbreviated SV An input signal whose OFF to ON transition causes data to be shifted one bit One or more words in which data is shifted a specified number of units to the right or left in bit digit or word units In a rotate register data shifted out one end is shifted back into the other end In other shift registers new data either specified data zero s or one s is shifted into one end and the data shifted out at the other end is lost A binary value that is stored in memory along with a bit that indicates whether the value is positive or negative An error that originates in a software program A means of protecting data from being changed that uses software as opposed to a physical switch or other hardware setting The location from which data is taken for use in
213. ing Console protocol macros Pulse I O Board configuration count modes indicators pulse inputs pulse outputs installation interrupts pulse input indicators pulse output indicators remote I O communications CompoBus S RS 232C communications one to one link connecting Units RS 232C port specifications RUN mode description safety circuits safety precautions See precautions search instruction Programming Console operands Programming Console self holding bit example Serial Communications Boards serial communications modes 1 1 Data Link 1 1 NT Link 1 N NT Link Host Link no protocol protocol macro signed decimal data modifying Programming Console monitoring specifications AC Input Units Contact Output Units CPU Unit CPU Unit inputs DC Input Units functions Power Supply Units Units status monitoring Programming Console SV modifying Programming Console syntax checking the program Programming Console SYSMAC WAY See Host Link system configuration Host Link NT Link T W test run example timers changing SV Programming Console example of inputting Transistor Output Unit specifications unsigned decimal data modifying Programming Console monitoring wiring AC Power Supply Units DC Power Supply Units T O Units precautions interlock circuits 247 Revision History A manual revision code appears as a
214. ing Console to the CQM1H as shown CQM1H PRO01 E below Peripheral port 142 Connecting the Programming Console Section 7 2 Connecting a CQM1 PRO01 E Connecting a C200H PRO27 E Panel Installation Connect the CQM1 PRO01 E Programming Console to the CQM1H as shown below CS1W CN114 Connecting Cable Connect the C200H PRO27 E Programming Console to the CQM1H as shown below Only one Programming Console can be connected at a time C200H CN222 or C200H CN422 Connecting Cable ee Coen CQM1H GPU Unit Connecting Cable Peripheral port CS1W CN224 or CS1W CN624 Connecting Cable as The C200H PRO27 E Programming Console can be installed in a control panel as shown in the following diagram The C200H ATT01 Mounting Bracket is sold separately Mounting hole dimensions A Mounting Bracket DIN43700 standards A HP Two screws en a 186 5 Panel thickness 1 0 to 3 2 mm le 92 58 143 Connecting the Programming Console Section 7 2 Allow at least 80 mm for the cable connector above the Programming Console At least 80 mm is required Either connector may be used SOMATA SENET ASSESSES SCEHSEMNAT SERENE About 70 mm is required 7 2 1 Compatible Programming Consoles There are two Programming Consoles that can be used with the CQM1H The CQM1H PROO1 E CQM1 PROO01 E and the C200H
215. ion method Point to point Transmission distance 15 m max Interface EIA RS 232C CPU Units Section 3 1 Connecting to a Computer The CPU Unit can be connected to an IBM PC AT or compatible computer via the RS 232C port as shown below IBM PC AT or compatible computer 9 pin male CQM1H CPU Unit RS 232C port Socket ql XM2D 0901 Recommended cable AL 9 pin male Mood Mes oats Hood XM2S 0911 E Socket XM2A 0901 Standard accessories for the CPU Unit Recommended Cables UL2464 AWG28 x 5P IFS RVV SB UL standard Fujikura Ltd AWG28 x 5P IFVV SB not UL standard Fujikura Ltd UL2464 SB MA 5P x 28AWG 7 0 127 UL standard Hitachi Cable Ltd CO MA VV SB 5P x 28AWG 7 0 127 not UL standard Hitachi Cable Ltd 3 1 9 Inner Board Slots 1 and 2 CQM1H CPU51 or CQM1H CPU61 CPU Unit has two slots for mounting Inner Boards Slot 1 left slot and slot 2 right slot Note The Inner Boards that can be mounted are different for each slot For details re fer to 3 4 Inner Boards CQM1H CPU Unit Slot 1 Left slot Slot 2 Right slot 85 Power Supply Unit Section 3 2 3 1 10 Built in Inputs The CPU Unit has 16 built in inputs The 16 input bits in IR 000 are always allo cated to these inputs For specifications refer to 2 2 1 CPU Unit s Built in 24 V DC Inputs Attaching the Cover 1 Hook the right edge of the cover onto the panel a
216. ions before starting operation Starting operation without the proper settings or data may result in an unexpected operation e Check the user program for proper execution before actually running it on the Unit Not checking the program may result in an unexpected operation e Double check all wiring and switch settings before turning ON the power sup ply Incorrect wiring may result in burning e Confirm that no adverse effect will occur in the system before attempting any of the following Not doing so may result in an unexpected operation e Changing the operating mode of the PC e Force setting force resetting any bit in memory e Changing the present value of any word or any set value in memory e Before touching a Unit be sure to first touch a grounded metallic object in order to discharge any static build up Not doing so may result in malfunction or dam age e Do not pull on the cables or bend the cables beyond their natural limit Doing either of these may break the cables e Do not place objects on top of the cables or other wiring lines Doing so may break the cables e Resume operation only after transferring to the new CPU Unit the contents of the DM Area HR Area and other data required for resuming operation Not doing so may result in an unexpected operation e Do not short the battery terminals or charge disassemble heat or incinerate the battery Do not subject the battery to strong shocks Doing any of these may resul
217. ir previous status after the PC has been switched from RUN MONITOR mode to PROGRAM mode It is possible for an output to remain ON due to a malfunction in the internal cir cuitry of the Output Unit such as a relay or transistor malfunction Be sure to add any circuits necessary outside of the PC to ensure the safety of the system in the event that an output fails to go OFF The following example emergency stop circuit controls the power supply to the controlled system so that power is supplied to the controlled system only when the PC is operating Program the Always ON Flag SR 25313 as the execution condition for an output point from an Output Unit and use this point as a RUN Installation Precautions Section 4 2 output Connect an external relay CR1 to this RUN output as shown in the fol lowing diagram Note Use the Always ON Flag SR 25213 as an execution condition for an Output from the Output Unit Power supply Controlled system CQM1H PC DC voltage YS regulator ON during operation 1 Transformer or noise filter O DC input output bie eS Surge suppressor Interlock Circuits When the PC controls an operation such as the clockwise and counterclockwise operation of a motor provide an external interlock such as the one shown below to prevent both the forward and reverse outputs from turning ON at the same time Interlock circuit 10001 o Motor clockwise 1000
218. istor malfunction Provide any circuits necessary outside of the PC to ensure the safety of the system in the event that an output fails to turn OFF or ON e f there is an overload or a short circuit in the PC s 24 V DC service power sup ply the voltage may drop and the outputs may turn OFF Take any safety mea sures necessary outside of the PC to ensure the safety of the system in the event that outputs turn OFF If the PC s power supply is turned ON after the controlled system s power supply outputs in Units such as DC Output Units may malfunction momentarily To pre vent any malfunction add an external circuit that prevents the power supply to the controlled system from going ON before the power supply to the PC itself When any of the following errors occurs PC operation will stop and all outputs from Output Units will be turned OFF e Operation of the Power Supply Unit s overcurrent protection circuit e A CPU error watchdog timer error e A fatal error memory error no END 01 instruction error I O bus error too many I O points error or FALS fatal system error Be sure to add any circuits necessary outside of the PC to ensure the safety of the system in the event of an error that stops PC operation When a fatal error occurs all outputs from Output Units will be turned OFF even if the IOM Hold Bit has been turned ON to protect the contents of I O memory When the IOM Hold Bit is ON the outputs will retain the
219. it 87 Power Supply Unit Section 3 2 Unit Model number Current consumption 5 V DC DC Input Units CQM1 ID111 85 mA CQM1 ID112 170 mA CQM1 ID211 50 mA CQM1 ID212 85 mA CQM1 1D213 170 mA CQM1 ID214 170 mA Contact Output Units CQM1 0C221 430 mA CQM1 0C222 850 mA CQM1 00224 440 mA Transistor Output Units CQM1 0D211 90 mA CQM1 0D212 170 mA CQM1 0D213 240 mA CQM1 0D214 170 mA CQM1 0D215 110 mA CQM1 0D216 240 mA Triac Output Unit CQM1 OA221 110 mA CQM1 OA222 250 mA B7A Interface Units CQM1 B7A 100 mA G730 Interface Units CQM1 G7Ma21 250 mA Master CQM1 G7N11 01 80 mA Expansion Master AC Input Units CQM1 1A121 221 50 mA I O Link Unit CQM1 LK501 150 mA Analog Input Unit CQM1 AD041 80 mA Analog Output Unit CQM1 DA021 90 mA Power Supply Units CQM1 IPS01 420 mA CQM1 IPS02 950 mA Sensor Unit CQM1 SENO1 600 mA max Linear Sensor Interface Unit CQM1 LSE01 380 mA CQM1 LSE02 450 mA Temperature Control Units CQM1 TC00 220 mA CQM1 TC10 CQM1 TC20 190 mA CQM1 TC30 CompoBus Units CQM1 SRM21 180 mA CQM1 DRT21 80 mA VO Control Units CQM1H IC101 2 mA I O Interface Units CQM1H II101 3mA Unit Limits for Expansion The current consumption limits for the CPU Block and Expansion I O Block are I O Blocks given in the following table Be sure that c
220. items such as no END 01 instruction and instruction errors CX Programmer can also be used to check programs The level of program checking can be set 49 Output Unit Specifications Section 2 2 Specification Battery life 5 years at 25 C Depends on the ambient temperature and power supply conditions Minimum 1 year Battery replacement must be performed within 5 minutes Self diagnostics CPU errors watchdog timer I O verification errors I O bus errors memory errors FALS system errors FALS instruction execution or cycle monitor time over FAL system errors FAL instruction execution or PC Setup error etc battery errors Cycle Time Over errors and communications port errors Other functions Storage of number of times power has been interrupted Stored in AR area Internal current CQM1H CPU21 51 61 5 V DC 840 mA max consumption CQM1H CPU11 5 V DC 820 mA max Dimensions CQM1H CPU11 21 187 to 571 x 110 x 107 mm W x H x D CQM1H CPU51 61 187 to 603 x 110 x 107 mm W x H x D Standard One connector for RS 232C port Except CQM1H CPU11 accessories Socket XM2A 0901 Hood XM2S 0911 E One CPM2A BAT01 Battery Set installed in CPU Unit at time of delivery 2 2 Input Unit Specifications 2 2 1 CPU Unit s Built in 24 V DC Inputs Input Voltage 24 V DC 10 _15 Input Impedance IN4 and IN5 2 2 KQ other inputs 3 9 KQ Input Current IN4 an
221. iver for positioning Performing time proportional control of temperature using variable duty factor pulse output function Pulse I O Board Ports 1 and 2 Single phase pulse output with without accelera tion deceleration using SPED 64 instruction Trapezoidal single phase pulse output with same acceleration and deceleration rates using PLS2 instruction Trapezoidal single phase pulse output with different accelera tion deceleration rates using ACC instruc tion Frequency 10 Hz to 50 kHz for servodriver 10 Hz to 20 kHz for stepping motor Duty factor 50 Pulse output PVs stored in SR 236 to SR 239 Ports 1 and 2 Variable duty factor pulse output using PWM instruction Frequency 5 9 kHz 1 5 kHz 91 6 Hz Duty factor 1 to 99 Pulse output PVs stored in SR 236 to SR 239 Analog setting By setting the time for Analog Setting Analog setting Values indicated by the adjuster which a conveyor belt is Board function are converted to digital values temporarily stopped between 0 to 200 BCD and are the low speed feed rate stored in IR 220 to IR 223 over a fixed distance can be simply controlled using the adjuster Analog I O Obtaining temperature Analog I O Analog I O Two input points and one output data pressure data Board function point for analog values 0 to 5 V etc Analog control also possible when used in combination
222. l Pin Pin Signal Abb No No Abb FG Hood Hood FG SD 2 Ea ee 2 SD RD 3 p fe pe 3 RD RTS 4 4 RTS CTS 5 5 CTS lt 6 6 7 7 8 8 SG 9 9 SG 4 Recommended Cables UL2464 AWG28x5P IFS RVV SB UL approved Fujikura Ltd AWG28x5P IFVV SB not UL standard not UL approved Fujikura Ltd UL2464 SB MA 5Px28AWG 7 0 127 UL approved Hitachi Cable Ltd CO MA VV SB 5Px28AWG 7 0 127 not UL approved Hitachi Cable Ltd Applicable Connectors Standard Accessories for CQM1H Socket XM2A 0901 OMRON Hood XM2S 0911 E OMRON If a PC and Programmable Terminal PT are connected together using RS 232C or RS 422A 485 the allocations for the PT s status control area sta tus notify area and objects such as touch switches indicators and memory maps can be allocated in the I O memory of the PC The NT Link System allows the PT to be controlled by the PC and the PT can periodically read data from the status control area of the PC to perform necessary operations if there are any changes in the area The PT can communicate with the PC by writing data to the status notify area or the I O memory of the PC from the PT The NT Link system allows the PT status to be controlled and monitored without using the PC s lad der program There are two NT Link modes One is for communications between one PC and one PT 1 1 mode and the other is for communications between one PC and one or many PTs 1 N mode These modes suppo
223. l of the hardware and software components used to control other devices A Control System includes the PC System the PC programs and all I O devices that are used to control or obtain feedback from the controlled system The devices that are being controlled by a PC System The signal counted by a counter A dedicated group of digits or words in memory used to count the number of times a specific process has occurred or a location in memory accessed through a TIM CNT bit and used to count the number of times the status of a bit or an execution condition has changed from OFF to ON See central processing unit An acronym for clear to send a signal used in communications between elec tronic devices to indicate that the receiver is ready to accept incoming data Windows based Support Software for programming SYSMAC PCs Windows based Support Software for the protocol macro function of SYSMAC PCs See Carry Flag One unit of processing performed by the CPU Unit including ladder program execution peripheral servicing I O refreshing etc The time required to complete one cycle of CPU Unit processing See scheduled interrupt An area in the PC s memory that is designed to hold a specific type of data The highest address available within a data area When designating an operand that requires multiple words it is necessary to ensure that the highest address in the data area is not exceeded 231 Glossary data disk d
224. lues when the MONTR Key is pressed repeatedly These differences are caused by changing execution conditions Note MS indicates milliseconds 174 Programming Example Section 7 4 7 4 Programming Example This section demonstrates all of the steps needed to write a program with the Programming Console 7 4 1 Preparatory Operations Use the following procedure when writing a program to the CQM1H for the first time 1 2 3 1 Set the Programming Console s mode switch to PROGRAM mode and turn ON the CQM1H s power supply The password input display will appear on the Programming Console MONITOR RUN PROGRAM N 7 a 2 Enter the password by pressing the CLR and then the MONTR Key MONTR 3 Clear the CQM1H s memory by pressing the CLR SET NOT RESET and then the MONTR Key Press the CLR Key several times if memory errors are displayed CLR i MONT 4 Display and clear error messages by pressing the CLR FUN and then the MONTR Key Continue pressing the MONTR Key until all error messages have been cleared CLR FUN MONTR 5 Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial programming display program ad dress 00000 The new program can be written at this point CLR N Caution Check the system thoroughly before starting or stopping the CQM1H to prevent any accidents that might
225. ly RUN ERR ALM 012 34567 INH PRPHL COMM 8 9101112131415 E Error Alarm Indicator Red Flashes when there is a non fatal error The CPU Unit will continue operating Lights when there is a fatal error The RUN indicator will go OFF CPU Unit operation will stop and all outputs will turn OFF Input Status Indicators Indicates the ON OFF status of the input bits in IR 000 corresponding to the CPU Units built in input points Output Inhibited Indicator INH Yellow Lights when the Output OFF Bit SR 25212 turns ON Outputs from all the Output Units will turn OFF Peripheral Port Indicator PRPHL Yellow Flashes when the CPU Unit is communicating with another device via the peripheral port Built in RS 232C Port Indicator COMM Yellow Flashes when the CPU Unit is communicating with another device via the RS 232C port Not supported by CQM1H CPU11 Indicator Color Status Meaning RUN Green Lit PC is operating normally in MONITOR or RUN mode Not lit PC has stopped operating while in PROGRAM mode or has stopped operating due to a fatal error ERR ALM Red Lit A fatal error has occurred The CPU Unit will stop operating and the outputs from all Output Units will turn OFF Flash A non fatal error has occurred The
226. mA 10 to 10 V 2 points Serial Communications Board One RS 232C port and one RS 422A 485 port CQM1H SCB41 Mounting Combinations CPU Unit and slot Inner Board High speed Pulse I O Absolute Analog Analog I O Serial Com Counter Board Encoder Setting Board munications Board Interface Board Board Board CQM1H CQM1H CQM1H CQM1H CQM1H CQM1H CTB41 PLB21 ABB21 AVB41 MAB42 SCB41 CQM1H Slot 1 OK Not possible Not possible OK Not possible OK CPU61 51 left slot Slot 2 OK OK OK OK OK Not possible right slot CQM1H CPU21 11 Not possible Not possible Not possible Not possible Not possible Not possible Note 1 High speed Counter Boards can be mounted in both slots of the CQM1H CPU51 61 simultaneously 10 System Configuration Section 1 2 2 Analog Setting Boards cannot be mounted in both slots of the CQM1H CPU51 61 simultaneously CQM1H CPU Unit acca eae Slot 1 for Inner Boards left slot Slot 2 for Inner Boards right slot 1 2 5 Communications Units Specifications Controller Link Unit wired Data link Maximum number of words per node 8 000 CQM1H CLK21 Message communications SEND RECV CMND instructions Note A Communications Unit is connected between the Power Supply Unit and the CPU Unit Communications Units cannot be connected to Expansion I O Blocks 1 2 6 Memory Cassettes Model number
227. mming Console supported Communications settings determined by PC Setup DM 6645 to DM 6649 OFF ON Device other than Programming Console Communications settings determined by PC supported Communications settings determined Setup DM 6645 to DM 6649 by PC Setup DM 6650 to DM 6654 ON OFF Programming Console supported Standard communications settings used ON ON Device other than Programming Console Standard communications settings used supported Standard communications settings used Effect of Pin 5 and Pin 7 on Serial Communications Mode via Peripheral Port Serial Communications Mode for peripheral port Programming Host Link Console bus Peripheral bus No 1 1 Data Link NT Link 1 1 mode No protocol No YES see note Controlled by PC Setup YES No No YES Standard setting YES Standard setting Note When connecting Support Software to the peripheral port via a peripheral bus use the following settings The serial communications mode is Host Link PC Setup DM 6650 0000 Hex standard settings or 0001 Hex custom settings Ignored standard settings Serial Communications Mode for built in RS 232C port Programming Peripheral Host Link Console bus bus No No YES 1 1 Data Link NT Link 1 1 mode No protocol YES Controlled by PC Setup No No YES YES Controlled by PC Set
228. n PC means Programmable Controller and is not used as an abbreviation for any thing else Visual Aids The following headings appear in the left column of the manual to help you locate different types of information Note Indicates information of particular interest for efficient and convenient operation of the product 1 2 3 1 Indicates lists of one sort or another such as procedures checklists etc OMRON 1999 All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means mechanical electronic photocopying recording or otherwise without the prior written permis sion of OMRON No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein Moreover because OMRON is constantly striving to improve its high quality products the information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual Nevertheless OMRON assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the informa tion contained in this publication TABLE OF CONTENTS PRECAU PIONS ssc0nsteiseakeie toque ee ase din 1 Intended Audience 20 sch ctakaeege Lackacd epitaph Ried eos aes peed bo ane edged A General Precautions 4 0 5 exe etait A Saget ek A ee RR BEARERS RAS FLEE ROS 3 Safety Precautions A
229. n the CPU Unit will be executed when power is turned ON if the operating mode is not set to PROGRAM Enter the password Press the CLR and MON Keys Clear all memory Read and clear error messages Start programming Oo CON O 7 2 Connecting the Programming Console A Programming Console can be connected to the CQM1H series CPU Units peripheral port It cannot be connected to the RS 232C port Before connecting the Programming Console turn OFF pin 7 on the DIP switch on the front of the CPU Unit Pin 7 OFF Peripheral port set for connection to Programming Console ON Peripheral port set for connection to other device Note 1 Do not change the setting of DIP switch pin 7 while a Programming Console is connected Changing the setting will interrupt communications and cause a communications error If a Programming Console is connected it will be come unresponsive key inputs won t be received and the display will not change 2 Refer to 6 1 DIP Switch Settings for the settings of other pins 3 If the Programming Console s cable is disconnected and then reconnected within 2 seconds it won t be necessary to reenter the password and the pre vious display status will remain In some cases it won t be necessary to re enter the password if the Programming Console s cable is disconnected while a time consuming operation such as a program check is being per formed Connecting a Connect the CQM1H PROO1 E Programm
230. n the PC Setup The PC Setup can be used to control the functions of the CPU Unit and Inner Boards The default settings in the PC Setup must be confirmed and if any changes are required they must be made from a Programming Device be fore starting operation The PC Setup must be changed to use Inner Boards Assemble the PC Turn ON the power supply Write the ladder program Transfer the program to the CPU Unit ON OO Ff Test operation The following steps must be performed in trial operation a Check I O wiring b Set the required bits in memory such as the I O Hold Bit c Monitor operation and debug the system in MONITOR Mode 9 Correct the program and return to step 7 above 10 Store print the program 11 Begin actual operation 42 SECTION 2 Specifications This section gives specifications for the Units that go together to create a CQM1H PC and provides functional specifications of the memory areas 271 Umit Specifications 4 sts nary ei ao oe RS RE SERS SOE kh ee dea 2 1 1 Power Supply Units sssr ners ra eee eee 2 1 2 CPU Unit Specifications s sensas a i ioia ed eee nee ee es 2 2 Input Unit Specifications se cee 0 0 cc ccc e 2 2 1 CPU Unit s Built in 24 V DC Inputs 0 00 0 0 02 eee eee 2 222 DC Input Units scseae Hosa at sales Seo 4 ead ob boty SANA ORG SR haw cee Hae 2 2 3 AC Input Units oct en 6h aint et A A ee Sade Deed 2 3 Output Unit Specifications 0 0 cece eens 2
231. nctions to Memory AR area Clock Use a Memory Cassette with a store data such as error logs with time of error occurrence Cassette with clock function clock to store time data minutes hours seconds day of month month year day of week in AR 17 to AR 21 Others Reducing influence from chattering of input points and external noise CPU Unit PC Setup Input Time Constants Set input time constants for DC Input Units in DM 6620 to DM 6627 Settings available 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 ms 30 Functions Listed by Purpose Unit Board Function Section 1 4 Details Interrupt functions Purpose Processing interrupt when an input turns ON Example Cut to length processing sending instruction to a tool when interrupt input is received from a proximity or photoelectric sensor Processing interrupts at regular intervals Example Sheet speed calculation calculates speed using input signals from an encoder at regular intervals Processing interrupt after a fixed time Example Stopping conveyor belt with high precision after workpiece detected independent of cycle time Processing interrupt when the PV of a low speed 1 kHz counter reaches 0 Example Counting workpieces e g chip components and stopping feeding when a set value is reached CPU Unit built in inputs Input interrupts 4 inputs Input Interrupt Mode Input inte
232. nd monitor machine control from a PT while monitoring or programming from a Programming Console or a personal computer Programming Console Personal computer Peripheral port on CPU Unit RS 232C port on Serial im Communications Board RS 422A 485 port ey Simultaneous connection possible RS 232C port on CPU Unit Temperature controller or other device PT You can also program and monitor from a personal computer at a remote loca tion via a modem When used in combination with the protocol macro function it is also possible to call the personal computer from the CQM1H using the PMCR instruction and when the connection is made switch the serial com munications mode to Host Link for remote programming monitoring using the STUP instruction If an Analog Setting Board is mounted fine adjustments of settings such as rotational speed or timer settings are possible on site using the adjustments on the front of the Board The ON OFF status of a user programmable DIP switch pin is stored in the AR area The setting of this pin can be used on site to switch between trial operation and actual operation to switch set values or to perform any other function that can be programmed in response to the changes in status of the AR bit corre sponding to this DIP switch pin Features Section 1 1 Easier Programming with a Complete Instruction Set and Interrupt
233. nd then 2 rotate the cover to the left to close it Input terminals for CPU Unit s built in inputs Removing the Cover Open the cover from the left side so that it pivots about the right edge _ E E E Q 3 2 Power Supply Unit There are three AC Power Supply Units available the CQM1 PA203 the CQM1 PA206 and the CQM1 PA216 There is also one DC Power Supply Unit available the CQM1 PD026 Select a Power Supply Unit that matches the cur rent requirements of the system 3 2 1 Power Supply Unit Components The following diagram shows the basic components of a Power Supply Unit Power Indicator Lit when power is being supplied External terminals Crimp Terminals Use the crimp terminals shown below for Power Supply Unit wiring The connec tors should be less than 7 mm wide and the wires should be between 1 04 and 2 63 mm2 86 Power Supply Unit Section 3 2 Model number CQM1 PA203 CQM1 PA206 CQM1 PA216 CQM1 PD026 Power supply Crimp terminal 7 0 mm max O o 7 0 mm max O o max gt 7 0 mm max 3 2 2 Selecting a Power Supply Unit As mentioned previously there are three AC Power Supply Units and one DC Power Supply Unit Select the appropriate Power Supply Unit based on the total 5 V DC current requirements of the Units in the configured system and the 24 V DC ou
234. nen 6 4 Relay Output Noise Reduction Methods 0 00 00 e eee eee xi Safety Precautions 1 2 3 xii Intended Audience This manual is intended for the following personnel who must also have knowl edge of electrical systems an electrical engineer or the equivalent e Personnel in charge of installing FA systems e Personnel in charge of designing FA systems e Personnel in charge of managing FA systems and facilities General Precautions N WARNING The user must operate the product according to the performance specifications described in the operation manuals Before using the product under conditions which are not described in the manual or applying the product to nuclear control systems railroad systems aviation systems vehicles combustion systems medical equipment amusement ma chines safety equipment and other systems machines and equipment that may have a serious influence on lives and property if used improperly consult your OMRON representative Make sure that the ratings and performance characteristics of the product are sufficient for the systems machines and equipment and be sure to provide the systems machines and equipment with double safety mechanisms This manual provides information for programming and operating the PC Be sure to read this manual before attempting to use the PC and keep this manual close at hand for reference during operation It is extremely importa
235. nents connected in the system CompoWay F commands are executed by using the CompoWay F send receive sequences in one of the stan dard protocols provided in the protocol macros 1 3 2 Communications Networks CompoBus S Network Controller Link Network With the CQM1H CPU Unit networks can be created using the following Com munications Units e CompoBus S Master Unit e Controller Link Unit CQM1H CPU51 61 only CompoBus S is a high speed ON OFF bus for remote I O communications Connecting a CQM1 SRM21 V1 CompoBus S Master Unit a Dedicated I O Unit to the network allows remote I O communications without programming in the CPU Unit between the PC and Slaves High speed communications are performed with 256 points in a cycle time of 1 ms max With the CQM1H SRM21 V1 a long distance communications mode is also available in addition to the previous high speed communications mode enabling communications on a trunk line of up to 500 m CompoBus S Master Unit RI al Remote I O CQM1H CompoBus S lt a A a ae Remote I O and other Slaves The Controller Link Network is the basic network of the OMRON PC FA Net works When using a CQM1H CPU51 61 CPU Unit the CQM1H can be con nected to the network using a Controller Link Unit This enables the flexible and simple transfer of large amounts of data with other OMRON PCs e g CQM1H CS1 C200HX HG HE CVM1 and CV series PCs or with personal comput
236. ng an interrupt signal so that the interrupt is not effective until the mask is removed A unit of storage equal to one million bytes Any of the areas in the PC used to hold data or programs A number assigned to a message generated with the MESSAGE instruction A form of a ladder diagram program that consists of a sequential list of the instructions without using a ladder diagram A mode of PC operation in which normal program execution is possible and which allows modification of data held in memory Used for monitoring or debug ging the PC See leftmost bit word An input that is normally closed i e the input signal is considered to be present when the circuit connected to the input opens A delay set for a data trace in which recording data begins before the trace signal by a specified amount Programming one loop within another loop programming a call to a subroutine within another subroutine or programming one jump within another An input that is normally open i e the input signal is considered to be present when the circuit connected to the input closes Disturbances in signals caused by electrical noise A hardware or software error that produces a warning but does not stop the PC from operating See normally open condition 237 Glossary normally closed condition normally open condition NOT OFF OFF delay offset ON ON delay one shot bit one to one link online edit
237. ng Console MONITOR mode description example test run monitoring 3 word monitor Programming Console binary monitor Programming Console differentiation monitor Programming Console signed decimal monitor Programming Console status Programming Console unsigned decimal monitor Programming Console no protocol communications NT Links operating environment precautions operating modes description operating mode at startup operation preparations panel Programming Console installation password entering on Programming Console PC mode changing PC Setup peripheral port connecting devices power supply wiring precautions Power Supply Units components dimensions emergency stop specifications precautions applications general ground interlock circuits operating environment safety safety circuits program programming example program memory setting address and reading content Pro gramming Console PROGRAM mode description programming checking the program checks for syntax Programming Console Index inserting and deleting instructions Programming Console preparation for searching Programming Console setting and reading a memory address Programming Con sole Programming Console connecting keys models operations using Programming Consoles Programming Devices programming example programs entering and editing Programm
238. ng table The CPU Unit has 16 built in inputs for which one word is allocated 19 System Configuration Section 1 2 CPU Unit Max no of I O Input allocation Output Requirements points allocation CPU Unit Connected Units Connected Units CQM1H CPU61 512 32 words 1 word n words m words 1 n m lt 32 CQM1H CPU51 n m lt 16 CQM1H CPU21 256 16 words 1 word n words m words 1 n m lt 16 CQM1H CPU11 n m lt 16 Refer to the CQM1H Programming Manual for the number of words allocated to each Unit and other information on memory allocation to Units Note 1 Itis possible to exceed the maximum number of Units without exceeding the maximum number of I O points and words allocated For example with the CQM1H CPU61 if 12 Units that are allocated 1 word each are connected the total number of words allocated will be 13 including the 1 word allocated for the CPU Unit built in inputs which is less than the specified maximum The number of Units however exceeds the maximum of 11 2 It is also possible to exceed the maximum number of I O points and words allocated without exceeding the maximum number of Units For example with the CQM1H CPU61 if 8 Units that are allocated 4 words each are con nected the maximum number of Units is not exceeded However the total word allocation will be 4 x 8 1 33 words including the 1 word allocated for the CPU Unit built in inputs and so consequently the ma
239. nications with a host Communications speed lower than peripheral bus One to one or one to many communications are possible Connections to a modem or Optical Link Adapter are Programming Devices Section 3 6 Note Note port via the peripheral bus protocol The serial communications mode must be set to Host Link DIP switch pin 5 DIP switch pin 7 PC Setup DM 6650 OFF ON 0000 Hex standard settings or 0001 Hex custom settings ON ON Ignored standard settings Always turn ON pin 7 on the DIP switch when connecting Support Software run ning on a computer using the peripheral bus You will not be able to connect if pin 7 is OFF Host Link Connection Make the following settings when connecting Support Software via the Host Link protocol Peripheral Port Use the following settings for the standard communications settings in the PC Setup DIP switch pin 5 DIP switch pin 7 PC Setup DM 6650 OFF ON 0000 Hex standard settings Use the following settings to make custom communications settings in the PC Setup DIP switch DIP switch pin 5 5 DIP switch DIP switch pin 7 7 PC PCSetup DM6650 DM 6650 0001 Hex Geto selingg Satie baud ralo din Geto selingg Satie baud ralo din Set the baud rate data Ee etc in DM 6651 Use the following settings for communications according to pin 5 default set tings DIP switch pin 5 DIP switch pin 7 PC Setup DM 6650 ON O
240. nits Provided as accessory 11 Unit max with I O Interface Unit There is no Backplane for the CQM1H The PC is constructed by connecting Units together using the connectors on the sides Z N Caution Attach the End Cover to the Unit on the far right side of the PC The PC will not operate properly if the End Cover is not connected CPU Unit CPU Block Only CPU Block and Expansion I O Block CPU Block Expansion I O Block Communica I O and Dedi Communica Inner Boards I O and Dedi I O and Dedi tions Unit cated I O tions Unit cated I O cated I O Units Units Units CQM1H CPU61 1 11 max See 1 2 max 5 max See 11 max See CQM1H CPU51 note 1 note 2 note 3 CQM1H CPU21 Cannot be Cannot be Cannot be CQM1H CPU11 connected connected mounted Note 1 The connected Units CPU Unit Communications Unit Inner Boards I O Units and Dedicated I O Units must be selected so that the maximum cur rent capacity of the Power Supply Unit is not exceeded 2 The connected Units CPU Unit Communications Unit Inner Boards I O Units Dedicated I O Units and I O Control Unit must be selected so that the current consumption does not exceed 3 0 A 3 The connected Units I O Interface Unit I O Units and Dedicated I O Units must be selected so that the current consumption does not exceed 2 0 A 4 The combined current consumption of the CPU Block and the Expansion I O Block must not ex
241. nk Communications YES YES YES SYSMAC WAY with a host computer or PT Protocol macro Sending and No No YES receiving messages according to the communications specifications of external devices No protocol No protocol YES YES YES communications with general purpose devices 1 1 Data Link Data links with No YES YES YES other CPU Units NT Link 1 1 One to one No YES See note YES YES mode communications with PT NT Link 1 N One to one or No No YES YES mode one to many communications with PTs 22 Note Programming Console functions are possible with a PT They are however not possible when pin 7 on the DIP switch on the front of the CPU Unit is OFF Expanded System Configuration Section 1 3 Protocols Protocol Programming Console bus The serial communications port protocol can be switched in the CPU Unit s PC Setup Depending on the protocol selected the following systems can be config ured to support serial communications Main connection Programming Console Application Communications between Programming Console and Applicable commands communications instructions None Peripheral bus see note Programming Devices e g CX Programmer Communications between Programming Devices and the PC from the computer None Host Link Personal computer OMRON Programmable Terminals Communications between the host computer and the PC Commands can be
242. nput points 256 max Output points 256 max Power Supply Unit 1 O Control Unit Communications Unit O Units or Dedicated P ES VO Units End cover Up to five Units con Two Inner Board slots nectable as required CPU Unit 16 inputs built in Up to eleven Units con nectable as required 1O Interface Unit Exceeding the Maximum When only a CPU Block is used a maximum of 11 I O Units and Dedicated I O Number of I O Units Units can be connected to the CQM1H series CPU Unit When an Expansion I O Block is also used a maximum of 5 I O Units and Dedicated I O Units can be connected to the CQM1H series CPU Unit and a maximum of 11 I O Units and Dedicated I O Units can be connected to the Expansion I O Block If these limits are exceeded the CQM1H may not operate properly because of drops in the voltage of the 5 V internal power supply The CQM1H will detect if the maximum number of I O points has been exceeded as explained below but will not detect if the maximum number of Units has been exceeded Therefore design the sys tem so that the maximum number of Units is not exceeded Exceeding Maximum When the maximum number of I O points is exceeded an I O UNIT OVER Number of I O Points message will be displayed and operation will stop For details on I O UNIT OVER errors refer to the CQM1H Programming Manual The relationship between the maximum number of I O points and Unit word al location is shown in the followi
243. ns ASCII converting displays Programming Console battery service life Battery Set replacement binary data modifying Programming Console bit status force set reset Programming Console bits searching Programming Console buzzer operation Programming Console C C200H PRO27 E Programming Console cabinet Programming Console installation cables checking program syntax Programming Console clearing memory areas Programming Console clock reading and setting the clock CompoBus S CompoWay F Contact Output Units specifications counters changing SV Programming Console example of inputting CPU Unit dimensions internal structure specifications weight CQM1H PROOI E Programming Console current consumption cycle time displaying Programming Console Index D data modifying Programming Console DC Input Units specifications decimal data with sign See signed decimal data decimal data without sign See unsigned decimal data differentiated instructions entering dimensions CPU Unit End Plate T O Units DIP switch settings displays converting between hex and ASCII Programming Console cycle time Programming Console E EC Directives EEPROM ICs See Memory Cassettes electrical noise EMC emergency stop circuit End Cover dimensions errors reading clearing messages Programming Console expansion instructions reading and changing function
244. ns on the same instruction line and up to the instruction currently being executed The cycle used to execute all processes required by the CPU Unit including pro gram execution I O refreshing peripheral servicing etc The time required for the CPU Unit to execute either an individual instruction or an entire program A counter created in a program by using two or more count instructions in suc cession Such a counter is capable of counting higher than any of the standard counters provided by the individual instructions 233 Glossary extended timer FA factory computer FAL error FALS error fatal error FCS flag flicker bit floating point decimal force reset force set forced status frame checksum function code hardware error header code hexadecimal host computer host interface host link HR area 234 A timer created in a program by using two or more timers in succession Such a timer is capable of timing longer than any of the standard timers provided by the individual instructions Factory automation A general purpose computer usually quite similar to a business computer that is used in automated factory control An error generated from the user program by execution of an FAL 06 instruc tion An error generated from the user program by execution of an FALS 07 instruc tion or an error generated by the system An error that stops PC operation and requires
245. nt that a PC and all PC Units be used for the specified purpose and under the specified conditions especially in applications that can directly or indirectly affect human life You must consult with your OMRON representative before applying a PC System to the above mentioned applications Safety Precautions N WARNING Z N WARNING N WARNING N WARNING The CPU Unit refreshes I O even when the program is stopped i e even in PROGRAM mode Confirm safety thoroughly in advance before changing the status of any part of memory allocated to I O Units Dedicated I O Units or Inner Board Any changes to the data allocated to any Unit may result in unexpected operation of the loads connected to the Unit Any of the following operation may result in changes to memory status e Transferring I O memory data to the CPU Unit from a Programming Device e Changing present values in memory from a Programming Device e Force setting resetting bits from a Programming Device e Transferring I O memory from a host computer or from another PC on a net work Do not attempt to take any Unit apart or touch the interior while the power is being supplied Doing so may result in electric shock Do not touch any of the terminals or terminal blocks while the power is being supplied Doing so may result in electric shock Provide safety measures in external circuits i e not in the Programmable Controller including the following items in order to en
246. o be quickly and easily mounted to it Dual in line package switch an array of pins in a single package that is mounted to a circuit board and is used to set operating parameters Glossary direct output distributed control DM area DM word downloading EEPROM electrical noise EPROM error code Error Log Area even parity event processing exclusive NOR exclusive OR execution condition execution cycle execution time extended counter A method in which program execution results are output immediately to elimi nate the affects of the cycle time A automation concept in which control of each portion of an automated system is located near the devices actually being controlled i e control is decentralized and distributed over the system Distributed control is a concept basic to PC Systems A data area used to hold only word data Words in the DM area cannot be accessed bit by bit A word in the DM area The process of transferring a program or data from a higher level or host com puter to a lower level or slave computer If a Programming Device is involved the Programming Device is considered the host computer Electrically erasable programmable read only memory a type of ROM in which stored data can be erased and reprogrammed This is accomplished using a special control lead connected to the EEPROM chip and can be done without having to remove the EEPROM chip from the device in whi
247. o change without notice Printed in Japan
248. o mounted the PC in two tiers in a narrow location Expansion I O Blocks are supported by all CQM1H CPU Units Name Model Specifications 1 O Control Unit CQM1H IC101 Connects to right end of CPU Block I O Interface Unit CQM1H 11101 Connected to left end of Expansion I O Block An End Cover is included Expansion I O CS1W CN313 Length 0 3 m Connects the I O Cables Control Unit to the CS1W CN713 Length 0 7 m O Interface Unit CQM1H IC101 CQM1H 1I101 I O Control Unit I O Interface Unit End Cover provided with the CPU Unit End Cover provided with the I O Interface Unit I O Interface Unit Note 1 Connect the I O Control Unit to the right end of the CPU Block 2 Connect the End Cover provided with the CPU Unit to the I O Control Unit 3 An End Cover is provided with the I O Interface Unit Connect this End Cover to the right end of the Expansion I O Block 4 Use either the CS1W CN331 0 3 m or the CS1W CN731 0 7 m Expan sion I O Cable Do not use a cable that is longer than 0 7 m 92 Programming Devices Section 3 6 3 6 Programming Devices There are two types of Programming Devices that can be used Hand held Pro gramming Consoles and Support Software that is run on a Windows computer Support Software is usually used to write the programs and a Programming Console is then used to change operating modes edit programs and monitor a limited number of points The
249. o the RS 232C port on a Serial Communications Board Programming Console CQM1 PRO01 E tat C200H PRO27 E CPU Unit CS1W CN114 pels CS1W CN or CS1W CN114 C200H CNLJ22 Peripheral port Connecting cable provided as accessory 1 2 3 CPU Units Basic Specifications Model Number Program CPU DM EM Built in serial Inner Communica of O capacity Unit capacity capacity communications Boards tions Units points words external words words ports see input Peripheral RS 232C note points port port CQM1H 512 15 2 K DC 16 6K 6K With With Supported Supported CPU61 CQM1H 7 2K 6K None CPU51 CQM1H 256 3 2 K 3K Not Not CPU21 supported supported CQM1H Without CPU11 Note Number of I O points Number of input points lt 256 Number of output points Maximum Number of Units lt 256 CPU Block Onl CPU Unit CQM1H CPU61 Maximum number of Units connectable CQM1H CPU51 Communications Units Inner Boards CQM1H CPU21 CQM1H CPU11 1 0 Units Dedicated 1 0 Units System Configuration Section 1 2 CPU Block and Expansion I O Block CPU Unit Maximum number of Units connectable Communications Inner Boards I O Units Dedicated Units 1 0 Units CQM1H CPU61 5 on CPU Block CQM1H CPU51 11 on Expansion I O CQM1H CPU21 Block CQM1H CPU11
250. o4 0V 190 High speed Counter Board Section 8 1 Note Switching between sourcing PNP outputs and sinking NPN outputs is accom plished using the PC Setup DM 6602 DM 6611 Example External Output Lines Sourcing PNP Output High speed Counter Board 5 to 24 V DC power supply 5to24V S To n Internal Circuits Sinking NPN Outputs High speed Counter Board Internal Circuits 191 High speed Counter Board Section 8 1 8 1 8 Specifications Name Specifications High speed Counter Board Model number CQM1H CTB41 Applicable CPU Units CQM1H CPU51 61 Unit classificatiion CQM1k series Inner Board Mounting locations and number of Boards Maximum of two Boards can be mounted simultaneously in slots 1 and 2 Pulse inputs 4 inputs Refer to High speed Counter Specifications below for details External outputs 4 outputs Refer to External Output Specifications below for details Settings Input voltage level switch Indicators Front 18 LEDs 1 each of Ready RDY and Error ERR 4 each of phase A ALI phase B BLI phase Z Z and external output OUTI Front connections Connectors CN1 and CN2 Compatible connectors Sockets amp Hoods provided as standard accessories Current consumption Supplied from Power Supply Unit 5 V DC 400 mA
251. ocedure listed below to connect PC components Always turn OFF the CQM1H when connecting or disconnecting Units Replace Units only after shutting down the CQM1H system 111 Connecting PC Components Section 44 1 2 3 1 The following diagram shows the connection of two Units that make up a CQM1H PC Join the Units so that the connectors fit exactly Connector 2 The yellow locking tabs at the top and bottom of each Unit lock the Units to gether Slide these locking tabs towards the back of the Units as shown be low until they click into place Note If the locking tabs are not secured properly the CQM1H may not func tion properly Be sure to slide the locking tabs until they are securely in place Slide the locking tabs until they click into place 3 Attach the End Cover to the Unit on the far right side of the PC CPU Block Onl CPU Unit Communications Unit End Cover l If required Sup a io Provided as accessory ported only by Unit with CPU Unit CPU51 61 CPU Unit tS 11 Unit max CPU Block for Connection to Expansion I O Block Power Communications Unit CPU Unit 1 0 Units or 1 0 Control End Cover Supply If required Supported Dedicated I O Unit Provided as accessory Unit only by CPU51 61 Units with CPU Unit CPU Unit 5 Units max 112 Inner Board Installation Section 4 5 Expansion I O Block O Inter O Units or Dedicated End Cover face Unit 1O U
252. odes 1 to 3 All high speed counter Mode functions are enabled AA See Trapezoidal acceleration deceleration for pulse outputs is limited Simple Pulse output given Yes No Yes Yes Yes 0001 Position priority Hex ing All pulse output functions Mode are enabled Interrupts for the high speed counter are disabled Note 1 Mode 0 Acceleration Independent Mode Mode 1 Acceleration Contin uous Mode Mode 2 Deceleration Independent Mode Mode 3 Decelera tion Continuous Mode 2 The port modes for both ports 1 and 2 is always set to the same mode i e either High speed Counter Mode and Simple Positioning Mode The mode cannot be set separately for each port 197 Pulse I O Board Section 8 2 8 2 3 System Configuration vo Pulse I O Board Pulse input 2 UILE Pulse input 1 Pulse Pulse output 2 output 1 Motor Motor driver driver Incremental encoder Motor Motor Incremental encoder Cc 8 2 4 Applicable Inner Board Slot The Pulse I O Board can only be mounted in slot 2 right slot of the CQM1H CPU51 61 CPU Unit Slot1 No Slot 2 OK Pulse I O Board 8 2 5 Names and Functions The CQM1H PLB21 Pulse I O Board has a CN1 connector for pulse input 1 and pulse output 1 and a CN2 connector for pulse input 2 and pulse output 2 CQM1H PLB21 Pulse I O Board CN1 Pulse input output 1
253. olute encoder 1 Compatible connector Socket XM2D 1501 OMRON Hood XM2S 1511 OMRON CN2 Two Socket Hood sets are provided Input from absolute encoder 2 as standard accessories 208 Absolute Encoder Interface Board Section 8 3 LED Indicators m Ready green Lit when the Absolute Encoder Interface Board is ready m Encoder input orange Refer to the following table Error red Lit when there is an error in the PC Setup for the Absolute Encoder Interface Board Encoder input Function indicators Port 1 Port 2 Lit when input bit 0 is ON Lit when value input is incremented Lit when value input is decremented 8 3 6 Pin Arrangement of Connectors CN1 and CN2 CN1 and CN2 have identical pin arrangements Pin arrangement 1 Common input ne 2 Bit 211 of binary gray code from encoder O 3 Bit 29 of binary gray code from encoder oO 4 Bit 27 of binary gray code from encoder O 5 Bit 25 of binary gray code from encoder O 6 Bit 23 of binary gray code from encoder O 7 Bit 21 of binary gray code from encoder O 8 Not used LO 9 Common input 10 Bit 210 of binary gray code from encoder 11 Bit 28 of binary gray code from encoder 12 Bit 26 of binary gray code from encoder 13 Bit 24 of binary gray code from encoder 14 Bit 22 of binary gray code from encoder 15 Bit 20 of binary gr
254. omer however must be checked by the customer EMC related performance of the OMRON devices that comply with EC Direc tives will vary depending on the configuration wiring and other conditions of the equipment or control panel in which the OMRON devices are installed The cus tomer must therefore perform final checks to confirm that devices and the over all machine conform to EMC standards Applicable EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility standards are as follows EMS Electromagnetic Susceptibility EN61131 2 EMI Electromagnetic Interference EN50081 2 Radiated emission 10 m regulations Low Voltage Directive Always ensure that devices operating at voltages of 50 to 1 000 V AC or 75 to 1 500 V DC meet the required safety standards for the PC EN61131 2 Conformance to EC Directives 1 2 3 The CQM1H series PCs comply with EC Directives To ensure that the machine or device in which a CQM1H series PC is used complies with EC directives the PC must be installed as follows 1 The PC must be installed within a control panel 2 Reinforced insulation or double insulation must be used for the DC power supplies used for the communications and I O power supplies 3 PCs complying with EC Directives also conform to the Common Emission Standard EN50081 2 When a PC is built into a machine however noise can be generated by switching devices using relay outputs and cause the overall machine to fail to meet the Standard
255. on Supporting Pulse Outputs System Configuration Unit Board Function Output No of points Configuration A CPU Unit Pulse outputs from Standard pulse output 1 with no acceleration deceleration 20 Hz to 1 kHz Standard pulse output 2 with no acceleration deceleration 10 Hz to 50 kHz Standard pulse output with trapezoidal acceleration deceleration 0 Hz to 50 kHz Variable duty factor pulse output 3 outputs total Transistor Output Unit output point Pulse I O Board in slot 2 Pulse outputs 1 and 2 1 5 CQM1 CQM1H Comparison The differences between the CQM1H and the CQM1 are listed in the following table CQM1H No Backplane use connectors for mounting Mounting structure Mounting DIN Track mounting screw mounting not possible I O capacity CQM1H CPU11 21 256 points CQM1 CPU11 21 EV1 128 points CQM1H CPU51 61 512 points CQM1 CPU41 42 43 44 45 EV1 256 points Program capacity CQM1H CPU11 21 3 2 Kwords CQM1 CPU11 21 EV1 3 2 Kwords CQM1H CPU51 7 2 Kwords CQM1 CPU41 42 43 44 45 EV1 7 2 Kwords CQM1H CPU61 15 2 Kwords Data memory capacity CQM1H CPU11 21 3 Kwords CQM1 CPU11 21 EV1 1 Kword CQM1H CPUS51 6 Kwords CQM1 CPU41 42 43 44 45 EV1 6 Kwords CQM1H CPU61 12 Kwords DM area 6 Kwords EM area 6 Kwords Instruction lengths 1 step per instruction 1 to 4 words per instruction Number of instructions in instruction set 162 14 basic 148 speci
256. on each side of the PC To install a Bracket hook the bottom of the Bracket on the bottom of the track rotate the Bracket to hook the top of the Bracket on the top of the track and then tighten the screw to lock the Bracket in place DIN Track End Brackets DIN Track and Use the DIN Track and DIN Track End Brackets shown below Accessories DIN Track Model numbers PFP 50N 50 cm DIN Track End Brackets 2 required Model number PFP M PFP 100N 100 cm PFP 100N2 100 cm 4 7 Wiring and Connections This section provides basic information on wiring the Power Supply Unit and I O Units and on connecting Programming Devices 115 Wiring and Connections Section 4 7 4 7 1 Power Supply Unit Wiring N WARNING Z N Caution N Caution N Caution AC Power Supply Unit Wiring N WARNING N Caution N Caution Crimp Connectors Note 116 Do not attempt to take any Unit apart while the power is being supplied Doing so may result in electric shock Disconnect the LG terminal of the Power Supply Unit when performing dielectric strength tests Use crimp connectors for wiring Do not connect bare stranded wires directly to terminals Do not remove the seal from the top of the Power Supply Unit until wiring has been completed Remove the seal before operating the Unit to prevent over heating The following diagram shows the proper connections to an AC power supply The AC voltage should be betwe
257. onnected Ensure that the PC is in PROGRAM mode before you enter the password When the password is entered the PC will shift to the mode set on the mode switch causing PC operation to begin if the mode is set to RUN or MONITOR The mode can be changed to RUN or MON ITOR with the mode switch after entering the password CLR Indicates the mode set by the mode selector switch 7 3 Programming Console Operations 7 3 1 Overview The following table lists the programming and monitoring operations that can be performed from a Programming Console Refer to the rest of this section for details on operational procedures Function Clearing memory Clears all or part of the Program Memory and any data areas that are not 152 read only as well as the contents of the Programming Console s memory Reading clearing error Displays and clears error messages and displays MESSAGE instruction 154 messages messages Buzzer operation Turns ON and OFF the buzzer that sounds when Programming Console 154 keys are pressed Reading and assigning Reads or changes the function codes assigned to expansion instructions 155 expansion instruction Pin 4 on the DIP switch must be ON to assign function codes to function codes expansion instructions Setting a program memory Sets the specified program memory address when reading writing 156 address inserting and deleting programs Reading a program memory Reads the
258. onnected up to but not including the I O devices The boundaries of a PC System are the PC and the program in its CPU Unit at the upper end and the I O Units at the lower end See printed circuit board A group of operating parameters set in the PC from a Programming Device to control PC operation Devices connected to a PC System to aid in system operation Peripheral devices include printers programming devices external storage media etc Processing signals to and from peripheral devices including refreshing com munications processing interrupts etc A connector on a PC or computer that serves as a connection to an external device A delay set for a data trace in which recording data begins after the trace signal by a specified amount A Unit that connected to a PC that provides power at the voltage required by the other Units The current value registered in a device at any instant during its operation Pres ent value is abbreviated as PV The use of this term is generally restricted to tim ers and counters A board onto which electrical circuits are printed for mounting into a computer or electrical device A mode of operation that allows inputting and debugging of programs to be car ried out but that does not permit normal execution of the program A computerized device that can accept inputs from external devices and gener ate outputs to external devices according to a program held in memory Pro grammable
259. operand operand bit operand word operating modes operating error OR output output bit output device 238 A condition that produces an ON execution condition when the bit assigned to it is OFF and an OFF execution condition when the bit assigned to it is ON A condition that produces an ON execution condition when the bit assigned to it is ON and an OFF execution condition when the bit assigned to it is OFF A logic operation which inverts the status of the operand For example AND NOT indicates an AND operation with the opposite of the actual status of the operand bit The status of an input or output when a signal is said not to be present The OFF state is generally represented by a low voltage or by non conductivity but can be defined as the opposite of either The delay between the time when a signal is switched OFF e g by an input device or PC and the time when the signal reaches a state readable as an OFF signal i e as no signal by a receiving party e g output device or PC A positive or negative value added to a base value such as an address to specify a desired value The status of an input or output when a signal is said to be present The ON state is generally represented by a high voltage or by conductivity but can be defined as the opposite of either The delay between the time when an ON signal is initiated e g by an input device or PC and the time when the signal reaches a state reada
260. own Mode differs from the High speed Counter Board CQM1H CTB41 Wiring Example The example below shows connections to an encoder with phases A B and Z Pulse I O Board Differential Phase Mode Pin No Encoder Black Phase A Power supply 12 V DC White Phase B O 19 10 Encoder input A 12 V DC 4 11 Encoder input B a 9 Pulse input Z 12 V DC Ex E6B2 CWZ6C TT 1 4 Common input COM NPN Open collector output 12 V DC power supply ov 12V Do not share the power supply with other I O Power supply Encoder Pulse I O Board 200 Pulse I O Board Section 8 2 Pulse Output Connections Pulse I O Board ee a a a oa ar R ae nara I Low voltage circuit Pin No 12 24 V DC power supply for output Supply either 5 V or 24 V power 5 V DC power supply for output Do not supply both at the same 5 V DC power supply for output time See caution below CCW pulse output with 1 6 kQ resistance CCW pulse output CW pulse output PWM output with 1 6 KQ resistance CW pulse output PWM output Common output 0 V N Caution Do not supply both 5 V and 24 V DC power at the same time Doing so will dam age the internal circuits Wiring Examples The following examples show a Pulse I O Board connected to a motor driver with a 5 V input Example 1 5 V DC Power Supply 5 V DC power supply Pulse I O Board 24 V DC inpu
261. pacity 512 points and twice the data memory capacity 12 Kwords e Use new instructions e Maintain compatibility with previous models of PC The CQM1H does not require a Backplane and is constructed by connecting Units via connectors on the sides of the Units allowing flexible system configu ration The CPU Unit contains 16 built in DC input points Two Inner Boards can be mounted in the CPU Unit One Controller Link Unit a Communications Unit and a combined maximum of eleven I O Units and Dedicated I O Units can also be connected If an Expansion I O Block is used a maximum of 16 Units can be connected See 1 2 1 Basic Configuration 1 The CQM1H is mounted to DIN Track 2 Only the CQM1H CPU51 61 CPU Units support Inner Boards and the Con troller Link Unit Units assembled via connectors on their sides mari Power Supply Controller Inner Boards 16 built in I O Units and Dedi End Cover Unit Link Unit inputs cated I O Units Ns ey CPU Unit Execution times have been reduced to 0 375 us for the LOAD instruction from 0 50 us for the CQM1 to 17 7 us for the MOVE instruction from 23 5 us and to 0 70 ms for overseeing from 0 80 ms reducing the total cycle time by approxi mately 25 e The program capacity the I O capacity and the data memory capacity have all been approximately doubled The program capacity has been increased to 15 2 Kwords from 7 2 Kwords for the CQM1 the I O capacity to 512 points from
262. ports Unit see input Peripheral RS 232C note points port port DC 16 6 6 YES YES Supported Supported 6 None 3 Not Not supported supported No Note 1 O capacity No of input points lt 256 No of output points lt 256 CPU Unit Components Sliders Battery Compartment Cover Used to secure adjacent Units Open this cover to access the battery DIP switch and Memory Cassette Peripheral Port CED Indicators Used to connect to Programming De vices such as a Programming Console or a computer running CX Programmer Also supports Host Link and no protocol communications Connector Add on Units horizontally by joining connectors bo RS 232C Port except CQM1H CPU11 E s EA Used for Host Link no protocol 1 1 Data Link or NT link 1 1 mode communications with external devices or other PCs 16 Inputs Built into CPU Unit Inner Board Covers Remove these covers when mounting Inner Boards Inner Board Slot 2 right slot Use this slot to mount a High speed Counter Board Pulse O Board Absolute Encoder Interface Board Analog Setting Board or Analog I O Board Inner Board Slot 1 left slot Use this slot to mount a High speed Counter Board Analog Setting Board or Serial Communications Board 76 CPU Units Section 3 1 3 1 1 Indicators r RUN Indicator Green Lights when the CPU Unit is operating normal
263. power supply Power is provided by the RS 232C port on the Serial Communications Board when the Link Adapter is connected to it but must be provided separately when connecting the Link Adapter to other devices 222 Serial Communications Board ii RS 422A 485 H H Programming Device excluding Programming Console Host Link Host computer Host Link 8 6 SECTION 9 Battery Maintenance This section describes the maintenance of the battery that backs up memory in the CPU Unit including the replacement proce dure 9 1 Battery Replacement ossiani rer oien Boe 6A E aes he ae eh Eee sR 9 2 Battery Tite tsten teo ni 24 A Aye petne de ph tug degree ede a a addi dacd S 9 3 Replacement Procedure 33 s 0 2 cos ni oot eae Sen E lhe Sais a Dee ee oa 223 Battery Life Section 9 2 9 1 Battery Replacement N Caution 9 2 Battery Life Note The CPU Unit contains a CPM2A BAT01Battery Set that must be replaced when its effective life has expired The effective life under normal conditions is approxi mately 5 years The effective life will be reduced at higher temperatures A battery error will occur when the voltage of the battery starts to drop causing the ERR ALM indicator to flash causing SR 25308 to turn ON and generating a battery error message readable from Programming Devices The battery must be replaced within one week after a battery error is indicated Replac
264. pressing the TIM or CNT Key fo 3 Input the timer instruction llowed by the timer or counter number TIM as follows a Input the second instruction and operand In this case it isn t necessary to enter the timer number because it s 000 Press the WRITE Key to write the instruction to Program Memory rm prime number b Input the second operand 123 to specify 12 3 seconds and press the WRITE Key The next program address will be displayed agag 1 2 3 WRITE If a mistake was made inputting the operand press the Up Arrow Key to return to display the mi staken operand and input the operand again Note a Counters are input in the same basic way as timers except the CNT Key is pressed instead of the TIM Key 157 Programming Console Operations Section 7 3 b Timer and counter SVs are input in BCD so it isn t necessary to press the CONT Key 4 Input the MOVE instruction MOV 21 as follows a Input the third instruction and its operands First input the instruction by pressing the FUN Key and then the function code 21 in this case FUN 2 1 To input the differentiated version of an instruction press the NOT Key after the function code FUN 2 1 NOT The symbol will be displayed next to differentiated instructions Press the NOT Key again to change back the instruction back to a non differentiated instruction The symbol will disappear To ch
265. prior to the input Then enter the correct input Note The buzzer will sound if the input value is not within range 7 3 22 Unsigned Decimal Data Modification 170 This operation is used to change the decimal value of a data area word being monitored as unsigned decimal data within a range of 0 to 65 535 0 to Programming Console Operations Section 7 3 N Caution 1 2 3 4 294 967 295 for double length data A change into hexadecimal data is made automatically Words SR 253 to SR 255 cannot be changed RUN MONITOR PROGRAM Before changing the contents of I O memory be sure that the changes will not cause equipment to operate unexpectedly or dangerously In particular take care when changing the status of output bits The PC continues to refresh I O bits even if the PC is in PROGRAM mode so devices connected to output points on the Output Units may operate unexpectedly 1 Monitor unsigned decimal the status of the word for which the present val ue is to be changed Unsigned decimal monitor 2 Press the CHG Key to begin decimal data modification CHG 3 Input the new PV and press the WRITE Key to change the PV The operation will end and the decimal without sign monitoring display will return when the WRITE Key is pressed The PV can be set within a range of 0 to 65 535 0 to 4 294 967 295 for double er data oe an error is og press Lee an Key to restore
266. put B Counter 1 input Z Counter1 input Z Encoder Power supply 24 V DC White Phase B E Orange Phase Z Ex E6B2 CWZ6C NPN Open collector outputs ov 24V Power supply Encoder 24 V DC power supply High speed Counter Board Shielded twisted pair cable om 189 High speed Counter Board Section 8 1 Connecting to an Encoder with a Line driver Output Am26LS31 High speed Counter Board in Differential Phase Mode CN1 Pin No Counter 1 input A Black A bs Black A striped O 7 Counter 1 input A se ae Counter 1 input B White B striped 6 5 Counter 1 input B 4 O N Q Ex E6B2 CWZ1X Orerige A7 eyfiped 3 Countert input Z line driver outputs Encoder Counter 1 input Z Brown 5 V DC Power supply Encoder High speed Counter Board External Output The comparison results of high speed counters 1 to 4 generate four external bit Connections patterns An OR is taken of corresponding bits in these 4 bit patterns and the result is then output on external outputs 1 to 4 The bit patterns are set by the user when programming the comparison operation Connector Content External output 1 External output 2 Power supply for external outputs 1 to 4 24V DC External output 3 External output 4 Power supply for external outputs 1t
267. r pulse inputs Four external outputs of comparison result The High speed Counter Board is an Inner Board that handles four pulse inputs 8 1 2 Functions High speed Counter Pulse Inputs 1 to 4 The High speed Counter Board counts high speed pulses from 50 to 500 kHz entering through ports 1 to 4 and performs tasks according to the number of pulses counted Input Modes The following three Input Modes are available e Differential Phase Mode 1x 2x 4x e Up Down Mode e Pulse Direction Mode Comparison Operation When the PV present value of the high speed counter matches a specified tar get value or lies within a specified range the bit pattern specified in the compari son table is stored in internal output bits and external output bits A bit pattern can be set for each comparison result and the external output bits can be output through an external output terminal as described below External Outputs Up to four external outputs can be produced when either the target value is matched or a range comparison condition is satisfied Note The High speed Counter Board does not provide high speed counter interrupts It simply compares the PV to target values or comparison ranges and produces internal and external bit outputs 8 1 3 Example System Configuration High speed Counter Board High speed Counter Board Incremental encoders 8 maximum 18
268. rns Execute online edit only after confirming that no adverse effects will be caused by extending the cycle time Otherwise the input signals may not be readable Confirm safety at the destination node before transferring a program to another node or changing contents of the I O memory area Doing either of these without confirming safety may result in injury Tighten the screws on the terminal block of the AC Power Supply Unit to the torque specified in the operation manual The loose screws may result in burning or malfunction xiii Application Precautions 4 5 xiv Operating Environment Precautions N Caution N Caution N Caution Do not operate the control system in the following locations e Locations subject to direct sunlight e Locations subject to temperatures or humidity outside the range specified in the specifications e Locations subject to condensation as the result of severe changes in tempera ture e Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases e Locations subject to dust especially iron dust or salts e Locations subject to exposure to water oil or chemicals e Locations subject to shock or vibration Take appropriate and sufficient countermeasures when installing systems in the following locations e Locations subject to static electricity or other forms of noise e Locations subject to strong electromagnetic fields e Locations subject to possible exposure to radioactivity
269. rrupt permitted by clearing mask using the INT 89 instruction with CC 000 Interrupt subroutine is executed when CPU Unit built in input IR 00000 to IR 00003 turns ON Interval timer interrupt Scheduled Interrupt Mode Specified with the first operand of the STIM 69 instruction Interrupt subroutine is executed at regular intervals Interval timer interrupt One shot Mode Three interval timers 0 to 2 Interval timer 2 cannot be used at the same time as high speed counter 0 Specified with the first operand of STIM 69 Interrupt subroutine is executed once when the time expires Input interrupts 4 inputs Counter Mode decrementing Counter Mode set value updated and masking cleared using the INT 89 instruction with CC 003 Decrements the PV every time CPU Unit built in input IR 00000 to IR 00003 turns ON and executes the subroutine when the PV reaches 0 Processing interrupt when the high speed counter PV matches a certain value Example Performing processing required for cutting a workpiece e g wire when itis a certain length Processing interrupt when the high speed counter PV is within a certain range Example Picking workpieces e g wires within specified lengths at high speed CPU Unit built in inputs Pulse I O Board Absolute Encoder Interface Board High speed counter interrupt Target value Interrupt subroutine is executed
270. rt built in or on the Serial Communications Board using an RS 232C cable the Cable following connection methods are possible Unit Board Port Serial Model number Length Commenis Startup Mode communications see note mode CPU Unit Built in Host Link XW2Z 200S V 2m ca Ignored RS 232C port SYSMAC WAY D Sub 9 pin XW2Z 500S V 15m female Serial RS 232C port XW2Z 200S V 2m Communications D Sub 9 pin Board female XW2Z 500S V 5m Note The Startup Mode in the above table is for when DM 6600 in the PC Setup is set to the default setting The Startup Mode depends on the type of connecting cable used For details refer to 5 2 3 Startup Mode 99 Programming Devices Section 3 6 One to many The following table shows the connections methods for communications be Communications tween one personal computer and many PCs Serial RS 232C cable RS 232C to RS 422A 485 Connecting cable Port at PC communications atthe personal RS422A 485 to RS 232C mode computer Converting Converting Length Model Link Adapter Link Adapter number Host Link Make your own 3G2A9 NT ALO01 E XW2Z 070T 1 RS 232C port cable See AL004 E D Sub 9 pin below XW2Z 200T 1 female Prepare the RS 232C cable between the 3G2A9 AL004 E Link Adapter and the computer as shown below IBM PC AT or compatible 3G2A9 AL004 E Link Adapter re Pin Ne ji RD 2 SD sD 3
271. rt completely different com munications NT Link 1 1 Mode This mode is used for communications between one PC and one PT This mode is supported by the RS 232C port on the CPU Unit as well as the RS 232C port and RS 422A 485 port on the Serial Communications Board The 1 1 NT Link 25 Expanded System Configuration Section 1 3 NT Link 1 N Mode mode is supported for communications between only one PC and one PT Set the PT communications settings for a 1 1 NT Link CPU Unit Link Mode 1 N Mode This mode is used for communications between one PC and n 8 gt n gt 1 PTs This mode is supported by the RS 232C port on the CPU Unit as well as the RS 232C port and RS 422A 485 port on the Serial Communications Board The 1 N NT Link mode is supported for communications between one PC and one or more PTs Set the PT communications settings for a 1 N NT Link NT Link 1 1 Mode ra Serial Communications Board us port Connection to RS 232C port of Connection to RS 422A 485 port Serial Communications Board of Serial Communications Board Serial Communications Board No i i RS 422A J NT AL001 Protocol Macros 26 Serial Communications Board Te RS 4224 acme 485 port amp RS 422A 485 RS 422A 485 RS 232C to RS 422 485 Conversion Adapter Note The 1 1 NT Link mode and 1 N NT Link mode use different types of
272. ry areas Section 3 provides details on functions and nomenclature for the Units that make up the CQM1H and provides information on Programming Devices and communications specifications Section 4 describes how to install the CQM1H PC including how to mount Units wire I O and connect Programming Devices Installation precautions and mounting dimensions are also provided Follow the instructions carefully to ensure proper operation Improper installation can cause the PC to malfunction Section 5 gives a general overview of CQM1H operation and includes details on the internal structure of the CPU Unit and describes the different operating modes Section 6 describes the setting on the DIP switch on the front of the CPU Unit Most PC operations are controlled by parameters set in the PC Setup Refer to the CQM1H Programming Manual for information on the PC Setup Section 7 provides information on connecting and using a Programming Console Refer to 7 4 2 Pro gramming Console Error Messages for details on errors that might occur during Programming Console operations Section 8 describes hardware information for the following Inner Boards Serial Communications Board High speed Counter Board Pulse I O Board Absolute Encoder Interface Board Analog Setting Board and Analog I O Board Refer to the CQM1H Programming Manual for information on software application Section 9 describes the maintenance of the battery that backs up memory in the CPU
273. s The signal ranges that can be used for each of the four analog input points are 10 to 10 V 0 to 5 V and 0 to 20 mA A separate range is set for each point The settings in DM 6611 determine the signal ranges The signal ranges that can be used for each of the two analog output points are 10 to 10 V and 0 to 20 mA A separate signal range can be selected for each point Either a voltage output or current output is selected using the terminal pins connected on the connector Note Analog Input Averaging Function The Analog I O Board does not provide an averaging function such as the one provided by the CQM1 AD041 If data averaging is required use the AVG AVERAGE instruction in the CPU Unit program 214 Analog I O Board Section 8 5 8 5 3 System Configuration y Analog I O Board Four analog input points Two analog output points 8 5 4 Applicable Inner Board Slot The Analog I O Board can only be mounted in slot 2 right slot of the CQM1H CPU51 61 CPU Unit Slot 1 Slot 2 8 5 5 Names and Functions The Analog I O Board has a CN1 connector for the four analog inputs and a CN2 connector for 2 analog outputs CQM1H MAB42 Analog I O Board CN1 Analog inputs 1 to 4 Compatible connector Socket XM2D 1501 OMRON Hood XM2S 1511 OMRON CN2 Two Socket Hood sets are pro Analog outputs 1 to 2 vided as standard accessories 215 Analog I O Board LED Indicators
274. s If this occurs surge killers must be connected or other measures taken external to the PC The following methods represent typical methods for reducing noise and may not be sufficient in all cases Required countermeasures will vary de pending on the devices connected to the control panel wiring the configu ration of the system and other conditions Relay Output Noise Reduction Methods The CQM1H series PCs conforms to the Common Emission Standards EN50081 2 of the EMC Directives However noise generated by relay output switching may not satisfy these Standards In such a case a noise filter must be connected to the load side or other appropriate countermeasures must be pro vided external to the PC Countermeasures taken to satisfy the standards vary depending on the devices on the load side wiring configuration of machines etc Following are examples of countermeasures for reducing the generated noise Conformance to EC Directives 6 Countermeasures Refer to EN50081 2 for more details Countermeasures are not required if the frequency of load switching for the whole system including the PC is less than 5 times per minute Countermeasures are required if the frequency of load switching for the whole system including the PC is 5 times or more per minute Countermeasure Examples When switching an inductive load connect a surge protector diodes etc in par allel with the load or contact as shown below Cir
275. s con Two Inner Boards nectable as required mountable Expansion I O Cable End Cover Up to eleven Units con nectable as required I O Interface Unit System Configuration Section 1 2 CQM1H CPU11 21 The CQM1H CPU11 and CQM1H CPU21 CPU Units do not support Inner Boards or Communications Units The configuration is shown below CPU Block Onl Power Supply Unit CPU Unit I O Units or Dedicated I O Units Va End Cover Inner Boards Up to eleven Units connectable not mountable as required 16 inputs built into CPU Unit CPU Block and Expansion I O Block Power Supply Unit 1 O Control Unit CPU Unit End Cover Two Inner Boards Up to five Units con not mountable nectable as required Up to eleven Units con nectable as required I O Interface Unit 1 2 2 Connections to Programming Devices Connections to personal computers running Support Software and connections to Programming Consoles are shown below Personal Computer Connecting to CPU Unit s Peripheral Port IBM PC AT or compatible Ladder Support Software SYSMAC Support Software CQM1 CIF Peripheral port System Configuration Section 1 2 Connecting to CPU Unit s RS 232C Port IBM PC AT or compatible Ladder Support Software SYSMAC Support Software XWeZ RS 232C port Note You can also connect t
276. s may not eau e N operate correctly NC e Ba 2 Do not reverse the connections nel GD 4 for DC and the common If DC NG A eS and the common are connected nel lt incorrectly internal circuits may NC ie on be damaged 63 Output Unit Specifications Section 2 3 Item CQM1 0D212 Name 16 point Transistor Output Unit Max Switching Capacity 50 mA at 4 5 V DC to 300 mA at 26 4 V see diagram below Leakage Current 0 1 mA max Residual Voltage 0 8 V max ON Delay 0 1 ms max OFF Delay 0 4 ms max No of Outputs 16 points 16 points common 1 circuit Internal Current Consumption 170 mA max at 5 V DC Fuse 5 A one per common one used Fuse is not user replaceable Service Power Supply 40 mA min at 5 to 24 V DC 10 2 5 mA x number of ON points Weight 180 grams max Circuit Configuration as a ele V 2 Output Q LED mr a ouzo Bat to Internal 4 N OUTI5 Circuits M a gt gt i E i i 45 Ww I 0 COM to Fuse 26 4 5A VDC Max Switch Capacity Total for Unit 5 0 po 4 8 B z x z 3 0 l Eog b et ee Ee 2 2 i i 0 45 55 C Terminal Connections p o feo L HeBo L OUT1 ao 4 j Onn B1 pours C D sO He 4 Py Outs a2 O OUT6 3 OVT rag
277. s show the dimensions of the Power Supply Units All di mensions are in millimeters CQM1 PA203 CQM1 PA206 PA216 PD026 m a a 5 ry 110 114 5 110 114 5 J 4 y LoT y a 53 5 m 85 5 Units for Expansion I O The following diagrams show the dimensions of the I O Control Unit and I O Blocks Interface Unit All dimensions are in millimeters I O Control Unit 110 117 5 110 117 5 110 Connecting PC Components Section 44 1O Units The following diagrams show the dimensions of the I O Units All dimensions are in millimeters 1 0 Unit Front View Connector type I O Unit Side View 3 ar i 110 117 5 re A 107 mm L 32 Approx 140 mm See note CQM1 0C224 Output Unit Side View 107 mm 131 7 mm Note The depth of connector type I O Units is approx 120 mm when pressure welded connectors are used Terminal Block The following diagram shows the dimensions of the terminal block for the termi nal block type I O Units All dimensions are in millimeters 8 0 8 0 Unit mm 4 4 Connecting PC Components The Units that make up a CQM1H PC can be connected simply by pressing the Units together and sliding the locking tabs towards the back of the Units The End Cover is connected in the same way to the Unit on the far right side of the PC Follow the pr
278. sed in a 1 N NT Link 4 The Programming Console functions of the PT Expansion Mode cannot be used when connected to Serial Communications Board ports They can be used only by connecting to the RS 232C port on the CPU Unit Turn ON pin 7 on the DIP switch on the CPU Unit when using the Program ming Console function of the PT 5 Set a unique unit number for each PT connected to the same PC If the same unit number is set for more than one PT malfunctions will occur Use the following cables to connect to the PT For details refer to the relevant operation manual 128 Connecting Programmable Terminals Section 4 10 Cables for 1 1 Connections between PC and PT PC Unit or Board PC port PT PT port Serial Length Model communications mode see note CPU Unit or Serial RS 232C port NT20S NT600S RS 232C port Host Link or NT 2m XW2Z 200T Communications D Sub 9 pin NT620S D Sub 9 pin Link 1 1 mode or Board female NT620C female 1 N mode 5m XW27Z 500T For the CPU Unit NT625C the mode will be NT30 NT30C RS 232C port Host Link or NT 2m XW2Z 200T 1 1 for the Serial D Sub 9 pin Link 1 1 mode Communications female 5m XW2Z 500T ae i m NT31 NT31C Port A Host Link orNT 2m XW2Z 200T nee et BRIE NT631 NT631C RS 232C port Link 1 1 mode or D Sub 9 pin 1 N mode 5m XW2Z 500T female Port B Host Link or NT 2m XW2Z 200S RS 232C port Link 1 1 mode or D Sub 25 pin 1
279. sible Device other than Programming Console PROGRAM mode Communications with connected device not possible Either PROGRAM mode or RUN mode depending on connecting cable See note Note The following table shows the relationship between the Startup Mode and connecting cables when a device other than a Programming Console is con nected pin 7 on the DIP switch is set to ON and bits 08 to 15 in DM 6600 of the PC Setup are set to 00 Hex CS1W CN114 CQM1 CIF01 02 CS1W CN118 XW2Z 200 500S V CS1W CN226 626 CS1W CN118 XW2Z 200 500S CV RUN mode 140 PROGRAM mode PROGRAM mode RUN mode SECTION 7 Using a Programming Console This section provides information on connecting and using a Programming Console Refer to 7 4 2 Programming Console Error Messages for details on errors that might occur during Programming Console operations 7 1 7 2 7 3 7 4 Proprammins ieee is sae a etna ed eine Wi et epee he aaah naan ee ata aes Connecting the Programming Console 0 00 c cece eee eee eee 7 2 1 Compatible Programming Consoles 0 0 0 0 e eee eee eee eee 7 2 2 Changing the CQM1H s Mode with the Mode Switch 7 2 3 Operating Mode at Startup 00 0 0 eee eee 7 2 4 Preparation for Operation 0 0 0 eee eee eee 7 2 5 Entering the Password 2 0 0 c eee cece ee nee ee Programming Console Operations
280. sole s mode switch setting if a Programming Console is connected 149 Connecting the Programming Console Section 7 2 PC Setup setting Operating mode Word Bits Setting DM 6600 08 to 15 00 Hex Programming Console not connected PROGRAM Programming Console connected Mode set on the Programming Console s mode switch 01 Hex Startup mode is the same as the operating mode before power was interrupted 02 Hex Startup mode is determined by bits 00 to 07 00 to 07 00 Hex PROGRAM mode 01 Hex MONITOR mode 02 Hex RUN mode Note If pin 7 on the DIP switch is ON the above information may change depending on other settings in the PC Setup Refer to section 6 2 Communications Port and Startup Modes Settings for details 7 2 4 Preparation for Operation N Caution 1 2 3 This section describes the procedures required to begin Programming Console operation when using the Programming Console for the first time Always confirm that the Programming Console is in PROGRAM mode when turning ON the PC with a Programming Console connected unless another mode is desired for a specific purpose If the Programming Console is in RUN mode when PC power is turned ON any program in Program Memory will be executed possibly causing a PC controlled system to begin operation The following sequence of operations must be performed before beginning ini tial program input 1 Be sure th
281. sso r ninna ets Mea as ed site ARES Mees wR om a ee LS 4 Operating Environment Precautions 0 0 0 cee eee gt Application Precautions eyar es Wn nae be ea he Oe Pee Ee Ae ae ee ea ee 6 Conformance to EC Directives cgasi nia nran ccc eee eee eee beens SECTION 1 Introduction 365 6345 ees as os6s Se ee Sees ees Teli F af res wim 4c dah es Ss E eee eae Se Seba ad Hee te Bey teed 1 2 System Configuration serere e eer Ee E EEE ccc eee eee E E 1 3 Expanded System Configuration 00 eee eee eee eee 1 4 Functions Listed by Purpose 0 0 cece eee e nen nee 1 5 CQMI1 CQMI1H Comparison 0 0 cece eee een eens 1 6 Overview Application Procedure 0 00 cece ee eee SECTION 2 Specifications yas ias wees Si lee ee es cas wees ba sleas 2 1 Unit Specifications e oreen cid hla ated ace ede glace tase abode cea eee do 2 2 Input Unit Specifications reos r sietnie eee eee eee eee ee eens 2 3 Output Unit Specifications 2 0 2 cence eee SECTION 3 Units eooeoeoeveeeveeeeeeeeeweeeeee eee eee eee em em mC mC OCC OCU OCC Oc Ol OL Ole SEL SCP ULUDIUS se 6 6 oho ae eee eee Gea Shs See We Seed Gee tie Be RG let 322 Power Supply Unit sssini shah oes eb SAS EOS Ri oes SS SS RS 3237 MOUNIS e Ae Bi ee Ae ee ae eh a ae 34 Inner Boards oane a ce ae CEG FESS SEES SSO OG ee 3 5 Products for Expansion I O Blocks 0 0 3 6 Programming Devices ari des itis dee hE CA ee es lea a ily
282. stakes in actual application of instructions e g a call to a subroutine that does not exist Glossary SYSMAC Support Software system configuration system error system error message terminal instruction timer TR area TR bit trace trace memory transfer transmission distance trigger trigger address UM area Unit unit number unmasked bit unsigned binary uploading watchdog timer A software package installed on a IBM PC AT or compatible computer to func tion as a Programming Device The arrangement in which Units in a System are connected This term refers to the conceptual arrangement and wiring together of all the devices needed to comprise the System An error generated by the system as opposed to one resulting from execution of an instruction designed to generate an error An error message generated by the system as opposed to one resulting from execution of an instruction designed to generate a message An instruction placed on the right side of a ladder diagram that uses the final execution conditions of an instruction line A location in memory accessed through a TIM CNT bit and used to time down from the timer s set value Timers are turned ON and reset according to their execution conditions A data area used to store execution conditions so that they can be reloaded later for use with other instructions A bit in the TR area An operation whereby the program is ex
283. suffix to the catalog number on the front cover of the manual Cat No W363 E1 2 Revision code The following table outlines the changes made to the manual during each revision Page numbers refer to the previous version Revision code Date Revised content 1 September 1999 Original production 2 May 2000 Modifications for the addition of an Expansion I O Block as follows Page xvi Expansion cable changed to Expansion I O Cable Page 2 Processing speeds changed at bottom of page Pages 2 6 7 8 9 10 15 23 32 41 83 84 86 100 102 104 105 110 Information on Expansion I O Block added Page 9 Table added on clock accuracy Pages 15 35 and 88 Added information on Temperature Control Units Page 40 Noise immunity specification changed Pages 59 62 65 and 67 Note added to Terminal Connections Pages 61 68 210 Circuit configuration corrected Pages 75 and 77 Information added on write life expectancy Page 93 Information added for Link Adapter cables Page 110 Dimensions corrected Page 128 Note added under table Page 181 Function codes for JMP and JME corrected Page 204 Note added and last sentence on page corrected Page 206 Graphic corrected Page 207 Table corrected Page 209 Words deleted from Analog input storage words specification 249 omron Authorized Distributor Ne S Cat No W363 E1 2 Note Specifications subject t
284. sure safety in the system if an abnormality occurs due to malfunction of the PC or another external factor affecting the PC operation Not doing so may result in serious accidents Safety Precautions 3 N WARNING Z N WARNING N Caution N Caution N Caution e Emergency stop circuits interlock circuits limit circuits and similar safety measures must be provided in external control circuits e The PC will turn OFF all outputs when its self diagnosis function detects any error or when a severe failure alarm FALS instruction is executed As a coun termeasure for such errors external safety measures must be provided to en sure safety in the system e The PC outputs may remain ON or OFF due to deposition or burning of the output relays or destruction of the output transistors As a countermeasure for such problems external safety measures must be provided to ensure safety in the system e When the 24 VDC output service power supply to the PC is overloaded or short circuited the voltage may drop and result in the outputs being turned OFF As a countermeasure for such problems external safety measures must be provided to ensure safety in the system Do not attempt to disassemble repair or modify any Units Any attempt to do so may result in malfunction fire or electric shock Do not touch the Power Supply Unit while power is being supplied or immediately after power has been turned OFF Doing so may result in bu
285. t 5 V DC input CCW pulse output CW pulse output Do not share the power supply with other I O Motor driver for 5 V input Ex R 220 Q Shielded twisted pair cable 201 Pulse I O Board Section 8 2 Example 2 24 V DC Power Supply 24 V DC power supply Do not share the power supply with other I O Pulse I O Board Motor driver for 5 V input 24 V DC ji Ex R 220 Q input ji 5 V DC input CCW pulse output CW pulse output Note Here a 5 V input motor driver is being used with a 24 V power supply The internal resistance at the Pulse I O Board 1 6 kQ is thus used Care must be taken to avoid problems caused by the drive current at the motor driver N Caution The 5 V DC or 24 V DC power supply for the outputs must be connected correctly Pulse Output Connection Precautions e Connect a 7 to 30 mA load to the pulse output Use a bypass resistor if the load is smaller than 7 mA e The pulse output circuits on pins 13 and 14 have a built in resistance of 1 6 KQ 1 2 W Connect the pulse outputs as shown below according to the power supply and the motor driver specifications Open Collector Output Output from Open Collector 1 6 kQ Series Resistance AW lt 710 30ma Output Output transistor 202 Pulse I O Board Section 8 2 The internal 1 6 kQ 1 2 W resistance can be used as bypass resistance in the following way Example 7 mA output transistor current 4 mA load current
286. t Unit Specifications Terminal Connections CQM1 ID213 j JN jo oO A Jo n J gt NC NC The polarity of the input power supply can be either plus or minus The polarity of all the commons however must be the same The COM terminals are internally connected but they all must be wired Number of Simultaneously ON Inputs for CQM1 ID214 Section 2 2 CQM1 ID214 j JN jo oO A Jo r J gt j N Jo Jo a Jw ro Jw Oo The polarity of the input power supply can be either plus or minus The polarity of all the commons however must be the same The COM terminals are internally connected but they all must be wired Ambient Temperature for Simultaneously ON Points Input voltage 24 0 V DC 32 Simultaneously ON points Ambient temperature C Input voltage 26 4 V DC Simultaneously ON points 33 Ambient temperature C HL one a Bee e Set en 55 C 4345 49 57 Output Unit Specifications Section 2 2 2 2 3 AC Input Units CQM1 1A121 CQM1 1A221 Name 100 to 120 V AC 8 point Input Unit 200 to 240 V AC 8 point Input Unit Input Voltage 100 to 120 V AC 10 _15 50
287. t end of CPU Block I O Interface Unit CQM1H II101 Connected to the left end of Expansion I O Block An End Cover is provided Expansion I O CS1W CN313 Length 0 3 m Connects the I O Cable Control Unit to the CS1W CN713 Length 0 7 m VO Interface Unit 1 O Control Unit End Cover provided with CPU Unit End Cover provided with I O Interface Unit I O Interface Unit 12 System Configuration Section 1 2 1 2 9 DC Input Units 1O Units Specifications 12 to 24 V DC independent commons 1 point per common 8 circuits 12 V DC 16 points per common 1circuit 24 V DC 16 points per common 1 circuit Connection method Terminal block Model number CQM1 ID211 CQM1 ID111 CQM1 ID212 Input words allocated from IR 001 1 word Output words allocated from IR 100 32 12 V DC 82 points per common 24 V DC 32 points per common 24 V DC 32 points per common Connector CQM1 ID112 CQM1 ID213 CQM1 ID214 2 words AC Input Units 100 to 120 V AC 8 points per common 200 to 240 V AC 8 points per common Contact Output Units 2 A at 250 V AC coso 1 0 2 A at 250 V AC cos 0 4 2 A at 24 V DC 16 A per Unit independent commons 2 A at 250 V AC cos 1 0 2 A at 250 V AC coso 0 4 2 A at 24 V DC 8 A per Unit 2 A at 250 V AC cos 1 0 2 A at 250 V AC
288. t in leakage rupture heat generation or ignition of the battery Dis pose of any battery that has been dropped on the floor or otherwise subjected to excessive shock Batteries that have been subjected to shock may leak if they are used e UL standards required that batteries be replaced only by experienced techni cians Do not allow unqualified persons to replace batteries e When replacing parts be sure to confirm that the rating of a new part is correct Not doing so may result in malfunction or burning e When transporting or storing circuit boards cover them in antistatic material to protect them from static electricity and maintain the proper storage tempera ture e Do not touch circuit boards or the components mounted to them with your bare hands There are sharp leads and other parts on the boards that may cause injury if handled improperly e Before touching a Unit or Board be sure to first touch a grounded metallic ob ject to discharge any static build up from your body Not doing so may result in malfunction or damage e Provide sufficient clearances around the Unit and other devices to ensure proper heat dissipation Do not cover the ventilation openings of the Unit Application Precautions 5 e For wiring use crimp terminals of the appropriate size as specified in relevant manuals e Do not allow metallic objects or conductive wires to enter the Unit e Set the operating settings of the Temperature Controller prop
289. t to operate unexpectedly or dangerously In particular take care when changing the status of output bits The PC continues to refresh I O bits even if the PC is in PROGRAM mode so devices connected to output points on the Output Units may operate unexpectedly 1 Monitor the status of the desired word according to the procedure described 7 3 13 Binary Monitor Bit 00 is on the right and bit 15 is on the left Binary monitor 5 MoO bP kpo if 2 Press the CHG Key to begin binary data modification CHG A flashing cursor will appear over bit 15 The cursor indicates which bit can be changed 3 Three sets of keys are used to move the cursor and change bit status a Use the Up and Down Arrow Keys to move the cursor to the left or right ng b Use the 1 and 0 Keys to change a bit s status to ON or OFF The cursor will move one bit to the right after one of these keys is pressed B 169 Programming Console Operations Section 7 3 c Use the SHIFT SET and SHIFT RESET Keys to force set or force re set a bit s status The cursor will move one bit to the right after one of these keys is pressed The NOT Key will clear force set or force reset status Note Bits in the DM and EM Area cannot be force set or force reset 4 Press the WRITE Key to write the changes in memory and return to the binary monitor 7 3 21 Signed Decimal Data Modification Z N Ca
290. tem error MONTR lt O Z g x A message displayed with MSG 46 MONTR All messages cleared MONTR 7 3 4 Buzzer Operation 154 This operation is used to turn ON and OFF the buzzer that sounds when Pro gramming Console keys are pressed This buzzer will also sound whenever an error occurs during PC operation Buzzer operation for errors is not affected by this setting This operation is possible in any mode RUN MONITOR PROGRAM Programming Console Operations Section 7 3 Key Sequence 1 2 3 Follow the procedure below to turn the key input buzzer ON and OFF 1 Press the CLR SHIFT and then the CLR Key to bring up the mode display In this case the PC is in PROGRAM mode and the buzzer is ON 2 Press the SHIFT di then the 1 Key to turn OFF the buzzer BZ will disap pear from the display and the buzzer will not sound f 3 Press the SHIFT and then the 1 Key agan to turn the buzzer back ON sur f 7 3 5 Reading and Assigning Expansion Instruction Function Codes N Caution 1 2 3 This operation is used to display or change the expansion instructions assigned to expansion instruction function codes The assignments can be displayed in any mode but can be changed in PROGRAM mode only Omero RUN MONTOR PROGRAM Read assignment OK Change assignment OK Turn ON pin 4 on the DIP switch
291. ter RUN mode automatically if a Programming Console isn t connected when the CQM1H is turned ON MONITOR MONITOR MONITOR RUN PROGRAM RUN PROGRAM RUN PROGRAM N 7 N 7 N 7 Operation ciR Operation SHIFT CLR Initial display Operating Modes PROGRAM Mode The CQM1H program isn t executed in PROGRAM mode Use PROGRAM mode to create and edit the program clear memory or check the program for errors MONITOR Mode The CQM1H program is executed in MONITOR mode and I O is processed just as it is in RUN mode Use MONITOR mode to test system operations such as monitoring CQM1H operating status force setting and resetting I O bits chang ing the SV PV of timers and counters changing word data and online editing RUN Mode This is the CQM1H s normal operating mode The CQM1H s operating status can be monitored from a Programming Device but bits can t be force set force reset and the SV PV of timers and counters can t be changed Z N Caution Check the system thoroughly before changing the operating mode of the PC to prevent any accidents that might occur when the program is first started N Caution Never change the mode while pressing any of the keys 7 2 3 Operating Mode at Startup The operating mode of the CQM1H when the power is turned ON depends upon the PC Setup settings and the Programming Con
292. th RS 232C or RS 422A 485 port Both RS 232C and RS 422A 485 ports are provided The RS 422A 485 port en ables 1 N connections to general purpose external devices without going through Converting Link Adapters The 1 N connections can be used with proto col macros or 1 N mode NT Links 221 Serial Communications Board 8 6 4 System Configuration The following serial communications modes are supported by the Serial Com munications Board Host Link SYSMAC WAY protocol macro no protocol 1 1 Data Links 1 N mode NT Link and 1 1 mode NT Link modes The devices shown in the following diagram can be connected Note The 1 1 mode NT Link and 1 N mode NT Link communications modes use dif Section ferent protocols that are not compatible with each other General purpose Programmable external device Terminal PT C series PC NT Link 1 1 Pr macr y otocol macros Data Link Programming Device excluding Programming Console Host computer H No protocol RS 232C Ua Host Link Host Link CQM1H series CPU Unit Co a General purpose Programmable C series PC external device Terminal PT Protocol macros NT Link 1 1 Data Link No protocol Note An NT AL001 E Converting Link Adapter can be used to convert between RS 232C and RS 422A 485 This Link Adapter requires a 5 V
293. that the program has been input correctly 1 2 3 1 Press the CLR Key to oe up the initial display CLR 2 Press the SRCH Key An input prompt will appear requesting the desired check level SRCH 3 Input the desired check level 0 1 or 2 The program check will begin when the check level is input and the first error found will be displayed If no errors are found the following display will appear gt oO Check levels are specified as follows 0 Levels A B and C are checked Levels A and B are checked 2 Level A is checked O w gt Note A list of programming errors is provided at the end of this section 4 Press the SRCH Key to continue the search The next error will be dis played Continue pressing the SRCH Key to continue the search 180 Programming Example The search will continue until an END 01 instruction or the end of Program Section Memory is reached If errors are displayed edit the program to correct the errors and check the pro gram again Continue checking the program until all errors have been corrected 7 4 Three levels of program checking are available The desired level must be des ignated to indicate the type of errors that are to be detected The following table provides the error types displays and explanations of all syntax errors Check level 0 checks for type A B and C errors che
294. the status prior to the input Then enter the correct input Note The buzzer will sound if the input value is not within range 7 3 23 Three word Data Modification N Caution 1 2 3 This operation is used to change the contents of one or more of the 3 con secutive words displayed in the Three word Monitor operation It is possible in MONITOR or PROGRAM mode only RUN MONITOR PROGRAM Before changing the contents of I O memory be sure that the changes will not cause equipment to operate unexpectedly or dangerously In particular take care when changing the status of output bits The PC continues to refresh I O bits even if the PC is in PROGRAM mode so devices connected to output points on the Output Units may operate unexpectedly 1 Monitor the status of the desired words according to the procedure de scribed in 7 3 14 Three word Monitor Three word monitor 2 Press the CHG Key to begin three word data modification The cursor will appear next to the contents of the leftmost word CHG 3 Input the new value for the leftmost word on the display and press the CHG Key if more changes will be made 171 Programming Console Operations Section 7 3 Input the new value and press the WRITE Key to write the changes in memory if no more changes will be made B 4 Input the new value for the middle word on the display and press the CHG Key if the rightmost word will be ch
295. there will be no adverse effects on equipment before changing the operating mode 5 2 2 Initialization of I O Memory Note 5 2 3 Startup Mode 134 Note The following table shows which data areas will be cleared when the operating mode is changed from PROGRAM mode to RUN MONITOR mode or vice ver sa Held Areas Note 2 Retained Non held Areas Note 1 Cleared See notes 3 and 5 Mode change RUN MONITOR gt PROGRAM PROGRAM RUN MONITOR Cleared Retained See notes 4 and 5 Retained RUN MONITOR Retained 1 Non held areas IR area LR area Timer PVs Timer Completion Flags The statuses of some addresses in the AR area and SR area are held and others are cleared 2 Held areas HR area DM area EM area Counter PVs and Counter Completion Flags 3 The status of Timer PVs and Timer Completion Flags will be held when the operating mode is changed from RUN mode or MONITOR mode to PRO GRAM mode 4 The status of Timer PVs and Timer Completion Flags will be cleared when the operating mode is changed from PROGRAM mode to RUN mode or MONITOR mode 5 Data in I O memory will be retained when the I O Hold Bit SR 25212 is ON When the I O Hold Bit SR 25212 is ON and operation is stopped due to a fatal error including FALS 07 the contents of I O memory will be retained but outputs on Output Units will all be turned OFF Refer to the CQM1H Pro gramming Manual for details on
296. they can perform much more complex actions such as converting and or transferring large blocks of data A group of instructions that is logically related in a ladder diagram program A logic block includes all of the instruction lines that interconnect with each other from one or more lines connecting to the left bus bar to one or more right hand instructions connecting to the right bus bar The time required to execute an instruction The execution time for any one instruction can vary with the execution conditions for the instruction and the operands used in it A group of conditions that lie together on the same horizontal line of a ladder dia gram Instruction lines can branch apart or join together to form instruction blocks Also called a rung An interface is the conceptual boundary between systems or devices and usu ally involves changes in the way the communicated data is represented Inter face devices perform operations like changing the coding format or speed of the data A programming method used to treat a number of instructions as a group so that the entire group can be reset together when individual execution is not required An interlocked program section is executed normally for an ON execution condi tion and partially reset for an OFF execution condition A signal that stops normal program execution and causes a subroutine to be run or other processing to take place A program that is executed in response to an int
297. tions limitations mode Microsoft Peripheral CQM1H No Windows _ bus or Host 95 or 98 Link Microsoft Host Link CQM1 Yes see Windows CPU43 note V3 1 Microsoft Peripheral CQM1 DOS bus or Host V 3 2 or Link higher 95 Programming Devices Restrictions when Using Support Software Section 3 6 Item CX Programmer SYSMAC CPT SYSMAC Support Software SSS V1 2 or later PC model Select CQM1H Select CQM1 CPU43 E Select CQM1 CPU Unit models None The CQM1H CPU61 CPU Unit The CQM1H CPU61 CPU Unit that are not cannot be used An error message cannot be used An error message supported will appear when you attempt to will appear when you attempt to connect connect The CQM1H CPU11 21 51 CPU The CQM1H CPU11 21 51 CPU Units can be used Units can be used Instructions that None The following instructions are not The following instructions can be cannot be used supported by the CQM1 CPU Units used on the SSS by transferring and cannot be used on the them to the SSS from the SYSMAC CPT If an attempt is CQM1H series CPU Unit as made to transfer a program expansion instructions Use the containing any of them to the transfer operation for expansion SYSMAC CPT an error will occur instructions under the expansion Timer Instructions functions menu TTIM Network Communications Serial Communications Instructions Ae PMCR and STUP nti Floating point Instructions a G FIX FIXL FLT FLTL F F F F DEG
298. to set the CPU Unit so that when power is turned ON data stored in the Memory Cassette user s program DM expansion instruction information is automatically transferred in one block to the CPU Unit auto boot Two way transfer and comparison of data between the CPU Unit and Memory Cassette is possible using AR area settings In addition to 4 Kword and 8 Kword EEPROM Memory Cassettes 15 2 Kword flash memory Memory Cassettes are also available 4 Kword and 8 Kword EEPROM Memory Cassettes are available Trace memory 1 024 words trace comparison data 12 points 3 words CQM1 CPU4 EV1 1 024 words trace comparison data 12 points 3 words 40 CQM1 CQMI1H Comparison Section 1 5 New instructions TTIM TOTALIZING TIMER instruction SEND 90 RECV 98 CMND network communications instructions PMCR PROTOCOL MACRO instruction STUP CHANGE RS 232C SETUP instruction and 19 floating point math instructions available The instructions on the left are not supported by the CQM1 Serial communications ports One built in peripheral port Supports the following communications Peripheral bus Programming Console bus Host Link no protocol One built in CQM1H CPU61 51 21 One built in Supports Host Link and RS 232C port Supports Host Link RS 232C port no protocol no protocol NT Link 1 1 communications except mode
299. tput terminals PA206 PA216 Calculation Example To calculate the capacity required for a PC configuration consisting of the CPU Unit e g CPU21 two 16 point DC Input Units and three 16 point Contact Out put Units perform the following calculation CPU Unit CPU21 current capacity 16 point Input Unit current capacity x 2 16 point Contact Output Unit current capacity x 3 0 82 0 085 x 2 0 85 x 3 3 54 A Power Supply Unit with a capacity of at least 3 54 A is required Model number Capacity CQM1 PA203 5 V DC 3 6 A 18 W CQM1 PA206 5 V DC 6 0 A 24 V DC output 0 5 A 30 W total CQM1 PA216 The total power consumption from the 5 V DC supply and 24 V DC output must be less than 30 W In other words 5 V DC current consumption x 5 24 V DC current consumption x 24 lt 30 W CQM1 PD026 5 V DC 6A 30 W Current Consumptions The following table shows the current consumption of the CPU Unit and I O Units Unit Model number Current consumption 5 V DC CPU Units CQM1H CPU11 800 mA CQM1H CPU21 820 mA CQM1H CPU51 840 mA CQM1H CPU61 840 mA Inner Boards Pulse I O Board CQM1H PLB21 160 mA Absolute Encoder CQM1H ABB21 150 mA Interface Board High speed CQM1H CTB21 400 mA Counter Board Analog Setting CQM1H AVB41 10 mA Board Analog I O Board CQM1H MAB42 400 mA Serial CQM1H SCB41 200 mA Communications Board Communications Controller Link CQM1H CLK21 270 mA Unit Un
300. tructions FPD instruction Error log A logging function for input bits using FAL 06 and FALS 07 instruction is also supported 29 Functions Listed by Purpose Section 1 4 Purpose Unit Board Function Details Instructions Creating step control CPU Unit Step programming programs instructions Performing Floating point floating point math math instructions Performing trigonometric logarithmic or exponential functions on numerical data Creating ladder MACRO MCRO 99 subroutines that can be instruction used at different places in the ladder program changing only the operands Memory Cassette Changing systems Memory DIP switch Turn ON pin 2 on the DIP switch when changing Cassette Automatic transfer for automatic transfer of Memory processes or machines of Memory Cassette contents At startup Cassette contents user programs part of the DM area read only DM and PC Setup and expansion instruction information will be automatically read from the Memory Cassette to the CPU Unit Transferring and AR area Backup Turn ON AR 1400 to transfer verifying data between functions data from the CPU Unit to the Memory Cassette and Memory Cassette rl Unit Sa to Turn ON AR 1401 to transfer arga selngs data from the Memory Cassette to the CPU Unit Turn ON AR 1402 to compare contents of Memory Cassette and CPU Unit data Results output to AR 1403 Using clock fu
301. ts 0 to 4095 The resolution should be set to match that of the encoder connected Interrupts An interrupt subroutine can be executed when the PV present value of the ab solute high speed counter matches a specified target value or lies within a speci fied comparison range The use of an absolute encoder means that the position data can be retained even during power interrupts removing the need to perform an origin return when power is returned In addition the origin compensation function allows the user to specify any position as the origin 207 Absolute Encoder Interface Board Section 8 3 8 3 3 System Configuration lm Absolute Encoder Interface Board Workpieces Processing table Motor driver Inverter Absolute Encoder E69 DC5 connector cable Detects angle of rotation and controls processing table 8 3 4 Applicable Inner Board Slots The Absolute Encoder Interface Board can only be mounted in slot 2 right slot of the CQM1 CPU51 61 CPU Unit Slot 1 Slot 2 Absolute Encoder Interface Board 8 3 5 Names and Functions The Absolute Encoder Interface Board is provided with port 1 connector CN1 and port 2 connector CN2 to receive binary gray code input from absolute rotary encoders CQM1H ABS02 CN1 Input from abs
302. up No No YES Standard setting No YES Standard setting 139 Communications Port and Startup Modes Settings Section 6 2 Effect of Pin 5 and Pin 7 on the Startup Mode If the Startup Mode setting in the PC Setup DM 6600 bits 08 to 15 is set to 00 Hex Startup Mode governed by setting of pin 7 on the DIP switch the Start up Mode will be determined by the setting of pin 7 as soon as the presence or absence of a Programming Console connection is determined The operating mode depends on the PC Setup the status of DIP switch pin 7 and the device connected to the peripheral port when power is turned ON in the way shown in Note the following tables PC Setup Operating mode Word Bits Value DM 6600 08 to 15 00 Hex See note below 01 Hex Operating mode last used before power was turned OFF 02 Hex Operating mode specified in bits 00 to 07 00to07 00 Hex PROGRAM mode 01 Hex MONITOR mode 02 Hex RUN mode When bits 08 to 15 in DM 6600 of the PC Setup are set to 00 Hex the Startup Mode will depend on the setting of pin 7 on the DIP switch and the type of device connected in the way shown in the following table Device connected at Pin 7 power ON OFF ON Nothing connected PROGRAM mode RUN mode Programming Console Determined by Programming Console mode switch PROGRAM mode Communications with Programming Console not pos
303. urned OFF and only the internal output status will be maintained Install the Units properly as specified in the operation manuals Improper installation of the Units may result in malfunction Mount Units only after checking terminal blocks and connectors completely When assembling the Units or mounting the end cover be sure to lock them securely as shown in the following illustrations If they are not properly locked desired functionality may not be achieved Be sure to mount the end cover to the rightmost Unit Be sure that all the mounting screws terminal screws and cable connector screws are tightened to the torque specified in the relevant manuals Incorrect tightening torque may result in malfunction Be sure that the terminal blocks Memory Units expansion I O cables and oth er items with locking devices are properly locked into place Improper locking may result in malfunction Be sure to confirm the orientation and polarities when connecting terminal blocks and connectors Leave the label attached to the Unit when wiring Removing the label may re sult in malfunction if foreign matter enters the Unit Remove the label after the completion of wiring to ensure proper heat dissipa tion Leaving the label attached may result in malfunction e Wire all connections correctly e When supplying power at 200 to 240 V AC from a CQM1 PA216 Power Supply Unit always remove the metal jumper from the voltage selector terminals
304. urned off Available in the CQM1H CPU61 CPU Unit only Note 1 work bits 2 A minimum of 2 528 bits are available as work bits Other bits can be used as work bits when they are not used for their allocated functions so the total number of available work bits depends on the configuration of the PC 3 When accessing a PV TIM CNT numbers are used as word address when accessing Completion Flags they are used as bit addresses 4 DM 6144 to DM 6655 cannot be written from the program IR and LR bits that are not used for their allocated functions can be used as 47 Output Unit Specifications Section 2 1 Other Memory Specifications Item Details Memory Cassette EEPROM or flash memory Mounted from the front of the CPU Unit Memory Cassettes are used to store and read the user s program DM read only DM and PC Setup and expansion instruction information as one block It is possible to set the CPU Unit so that when power is turned ON data stored in the Memory Cassette user s program DM expansion instruction information is automatically sent to the CPU Unit auto boot Two way transfer and comparison of data between the CPU Unit and Memory Cassette are possible using AR area control bits Trace memory 1 024 words trace comparison data 12 points 3 words Function Specifications Item Specification Macro instructions Subroutines called by instructions containing arguments
305. urrent consumption of the connected Units does not exceed the following limits Block Number of Units Maximum current consumption CPU Block 3 0 A max See note 1 5 0 A max total Expansion I O 2 0 A max See note 2 See note 4 Block Note 1 The CPU Block current consumption includes the CPU Unit Communica tions Unit Inner Boards and I O Control Unit 2 The Expansion I O Block current consumption includes I O Interface Unit 88 Section 3 2 Power Supply Unit 3 2 3 Unit Weights CPU Units Power Supply Units Inner Boards Communications Unit 1O Units 3 An Analog Power Supply Unit must be counted as a Unit just like I O or Ded icated I O Units 4 The maximum current consumption will be 3 6 A if the CQM1 PA203 Power Supply Unit is used Model number Weight CQM1H CPU11 CQM1H CPU21 CQM1H CPU51 CQM1H CPU61 CQM1 PA203 CQM1 PA206 CQM1 PA216 CQM1 PD026 Inner Board Model number Weight Pulse I O Board CQM1H PLB21 90 g max Absolute Encoder CQM1H ABB21 Interface Board High speed Counter CQM1H CTB21 Board Analog Setting Board CQM1H AVB41 60 g max Analog O Board CQM1H MAB42 100 g max Serial Communications CQM1H SCB41 90 g max Board Unit Model number Weight Controller Link Unit CQM1H CLK21 170 g max Unit Model number Weight DC Input Units CQM1 ID111 180 g max CQM1
306. ution 1 2 3 This operation is used to change the decimal value of a data area word being monitored as signed decimal data within a range of 32 768 to 32 767 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 for double length data The contents of the specified word are converted automatically to signed hexadecimal two s complement format RUN MONITOR PROGRAM Words SR 253 to SR 255 cannot be changed Before changing the contents of I O memory be sure that the changes will not cause equipment to operate unexpectedly or dangerously In particular take care when changing the status of output bits The PC continues to refresh I O bits even if the PC is in PROGRAM mode so devices connected to output points on the Output Units may operate unexpectedly 1 Monitor signed decimal the status of the word for which the present value is to be changed Signed decimal monitor 2 Press the CHG Key to begin decimal data modification CHG 3 Input the new PV and press the WRITE Key to change the PV The operation will end and the signed decimal monitoring display will return when the WRITE Key is pressed The PV can be set within a range of 32 768 and 32 767 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 for double length data Use the SET Key to input a positive number and use the RESET Key to input a negative number rec pd Likl WRITE 6 a If an error is made press the CLR Key to restore the status
307. ution While the power is turned ON the contents of IR 220 to IR 223 are constantly refreshed with the values of the corresponding controls Be sure that these words are not written to from the program or a Programming Device 213 Analog I O Board Section 8 5 8 4 5 Specifications Item Specifications Name Analog Setting Board Model number CQM1H AVB41 Applicable CPU Unit CQM1H CPU51 61 Unit classification CQM1H series Inner Board Mounting locations and number of Boards 1 Board can be mounted in either slot 1 or slot 2 Note Both slots cannot be used at the same time Settings 4 analog variable resistor controls on front panel Adjustable using Phillips screwdriver The setting of each control 0 to 3 is stored as a 4 digit BCD between 0000 and 0200 in IR 220 to IR 223 respectively Indicators None Front connections None Current consumption Supplied from Power Supply Unit 5 V DC 10 mA max Dimensions 25 x 110 x 107 mm W x H x D Weight 60 g max Standard accessories None 8 5 Analog I O Board 8 5 1 Model 8 5 2 Function Specifications 4 analog inputs 10 to 10 V 0 to 5 V 0 to 20 mA separate signal range for each point Analog I O Board CQM1H MAB42 2 analog outputs 10 to 10 V 0 to 20 mA separate signal range for each point The Analog I O Board is an Inner Board featuring four analog inputs and two analog output
308. uts on execution of instructions The PC Setup is used to set various initial or other settings through software switches or parameters Reading writing and comparison can be performed on this area using a Memory Cassette This area can be read by but not written from the user program A Programming Device must be used to write to this area If pin 1 on the DIP switch on the front of the CPU Unit is ON a Programming Device will also not be able to write to this area The data in this area is retained when the power is turned OFF This area includes the Controller Link DM parameter area the routing table area and Serial Communications Board settings area Reading writing and comparison can be performed on this area using a Memory Cassette The error log stores the times of occurrence and error codes of both fatal and non fatal errors that occur in the CPU Unit Up to 10 errors can be stored This area contains the function code allocations for expansion instructions in structions for which function codes can be changed or allocated If pin 4 on the DIP switch on the front of the CPU Unit is OFF the default allocations for the ex pansion instructions will be used These allocations cannot be changed while pin 4 is set to OFF Reading writing and comparison can be performed on this area using a Memory Cassette The DIP switch is used to set initial or other settings 5 1 3 Memory Cassette The user program data memory read onl
309. value of the high speed counter matches a specified target value or an interrupt subroutine when the PV falls within a specified comparison range Two 10 Hz to 50 kHz pulses can be output from port 1 and port 2 Both fixed and variable duty factors can be used e The fixed duty factor can raise or lower the frequency of the output from 10 Hz to 50 kHz smoothly e The variable duty factor enables pulse output to be performed using a duty fac tor ranging from 1 to 99 While pulse inputs and pulse outputs can be performed simultaneously it is not possible to use all high speed counter and pulse output functionality at the same time The Port Mode Setting High speed Counter Mode Simple Positioning Mode in the PC Setup DM 6611 will determine which has full functionality en abled Two pulse inputs high speed counter and two pulse outputs can be used simul taneously via ports 1 and 2 To determine which has functional priority the ap propriate Port Mode setting must be entered in the PC Setup DM 6611 Mode Content High speed counter Pulse output functions DM 6611 functions setting Reading High No Identical Separate PV with speed trapezoidal acceleration acceleration PRV 62 counter acceleration deceleration deceleration interrupts deceleration rates rates with SPED 64 PLS2 ACC CTBL 63 High High speed counter Yes Yes Yes Mode 0 0000 speed given priority disabled Hex Counter M
310. vanced PID control time proportional control 35 Section 1 4 Functions Listed by Purpose 1 4 1 High speed Counters CPU Unit No of Max counting rate for each input mode Board counters Differential Pulse Up Down Incrementing Decrementing Phase Direction CPU Unit Input interrupts 4 1 kHz Input interrupts Counter Mode Counter Mode CPU Unit High speed 1 2 5 kHz 5 kHz Built in counter 0 high speed counter High speed High speed 4 25 kHz or 50 kHz or 50 kHz or Counter Board counters 1 2 3 250 kHz 500 kHz 500 kHz and 4 multiplication factor 1 2 4 Pulse I O High speed 2 25 kHz 50 kHz 50 kHz Board counters 1 and 2 System Configurations Supporting High speed Counters 36 Board mounted in slot 2 and 2 System Unit Board Function Input modes and No of configuration max counting rate counters Configuration A CPU Unit Decrementing Decrementing counter 1 kHz 4 13 counters total counters for input interrupts Counter Mode High speed counter O Differential Phase Mode 1 for built in inputs 2 5 kHz IR 00004 to i R 00006 Incrementing Mode 5 kHz High speed Counter High speed counters Differential Phase Mode 4 Board mounted in 1 2 3 and 4 multiplication factor 1 2 4 slot 1 25 kHz or 250 kHz Pulse and Direction Mode Up Down Mode 50 kHz or 500 kHz H
311. w Relay output or triac output Relay output or transistor output 126 Connecting Programming Devices Section 4 9 Note Use surge suppressors and diodes with the following specifications Surge killer 9 EEE Resistance 50 Q Capacitor 0 47 uF Voltage 200 V Diode SS Peak inverse voltage Minimum of 3 times load voltage Average rectifying current 1 A 4 9 Connecting Programming Devices Programming Devices can be connected to the CQM1H When connecting to the peripheral port be sure to insert the connector securely Host Computer The CQM1H CPU Unit can be connected to an IBM PC AT compatible computer Connection running Support Software using a compatible connecting cable Note When connecting the CQM1H to Support Software turn ON pin 7 on the DIP switch If pin 7 is OFF it will not be possible to use Support Software and only Programming Console connections will be supported When communicating via a peripheral bus it is also necessary to turn OFF pin 5 on the DIP switch and make the communications settings in the PC Setup for Host Link For details re fer to 3 6 Programming Devices Personal computer RS 232C connector Peripheral port Personal computer RS 232C port Programming Console The CQM1H CPU Unit can be connected to a Programming Console as shown Connection below 127 Connecting Programmable Terminals Section 4 10 Note When connecting the CQM1H to
312. when the PV matches a value registered in the comparison comparison table High speed Interrupt subroutine is executed counter interrupt when the counter PV lies Range between set upper and lower comparison limits Interrupting program when data is received via serial communications Serial Communications Board Protocol macro interrupt notification 31 Functions Listed by Purpose Section 1 4 Purpose Unit Board Function Details High speed counter Detecting position and length when input is received from incremental rotary encoder functions Low speed 1 kHz CPU Unit Input interrupt CPU Unit built in inputs frequency count built in inputs Counter Mode IR 00000 to IR 00003 can be used as high speed counters decrementing maid 1 kHz without executing interrupt PVs are stored in SR 244 to SR 247 Low speed 2 5 kHz High speed High speed pulse input from 5 kHz frequency counter 0 CPU Unit built in inputs count Differential Phase IR 00004 to IR 00006 is Mode 2 5 kHz counted PVs are stored in SR 230 and SR 231 Incrementing Mode 5 kHz High speed 25 kHz High speed High speed High speed pulse input from 50 kHz or 250 kHz Counter Board counters 1 to 4 ports 1 2 3 and 4 of the 500 kHz frequency Differential Phase High speed Counter Board is count Mode a R Ua as arty stored in to an BE E for slot 2 in SR 232 to SR 239 factor 1 2 4 Ring mode or linear mode
313. ximum number of 32 words is exceeded 20 Expanded System Configuration Section 1 3 1 3 Expanded System Configuration 1 3 1 Serial Communications System The CQM1H system configuration can be expanded by using the following serial communications ports e CPU Unit built in ports 2 ports Peripheral port and RS 232C port e Serial Communications Board ports 2 ports RS 232C port and RS 422 485 port CQM1H CPU51 61 only Personal computer Programming Console Peripheral port CPU Unit va RS 232C port Serial Communications Board Programming Console bus Peripheral bus Host Link No protocol Host Link No protocol 1 1 Data Link NT Link 1 1 mode 1 N mode RS 232C port CPU Unit RS 422A 485 port Serial Commu nications Board Protocol Macro Host Link Protocol Macro No protocol Host Link 1 1 Data Link No protocol NT Link 1 1 1 1 Data Link mode 1 N mode NT Link 1 1 mode 1 N mode 21 Expanded System Configuration Section 1 3 Communications Ports and Serial Communications Modes Protocols Serial Application CPU Unit CQM1H SCB41 Serial communications Communications Board protocol Peripheral port RS 232C port RS 232C port RS 422A 485 Not on port 1 port port 2 CQM1H CPU11 Programming Communications YES No No Console bus with Programming Consoles Peripheral bus Communications YES No No with Programming Devices Host Li
314. xternal sources 4 points Counter Mode Interrupts are executed from the CPU Unit s internal built in input points 4 max points in response to inputs received a certain number of times counted down Interval Scheduled Interrupt Mode Program is interrupted at regular intervals measured by internal timer in clock terrupts a 3 points One shot Interrupt Mode One interrupt is executed after a certain time measured by the max internal clock High Target value comparison Interrupts are executed when the high speed counter PV is equal speed to a specified value Saati Range Comparison Interrupts are executed when the high speed counter PV lies within me pts specified ranges Counting is possible for high speed counter Counting is possible for high speed counter input from the CPU Unit s internal input input from the CPU Unit s internal input points points Pulse I O Boards or Absolute and for the CQM1 CPU43 44 EV1 for input Encoder Interface Boards to ports 1 and 2 Interrupts Interrupt subroutines can be called from Not supported from Seri Serial Communications Board using the al Com interrupt notification function munica tions Board 1 0 bits CQM1H CPU11 21 256 points CQM1 CPU11 21 EV1 128 points CQM1H CPU51 61 512 points CQM1 CPU41 42 43 44 45 EV1 256 points I O points for Inner 256 points 16 words None Board slot 1 Words used by Inner Board in slot 1 IR 200 to IR 215 I O points for Inner 192 points 12 wor
315. y Built in RS 232C Port Not on CQM1H CPU11 Usually used for devices other than Programming Devices Commu nications with Programming Consoles and peripheral bus com munications are not supported via this port Serial Communications Modes and Ports Device and mode Peripheral port Built in RS 232C port Programming Console in Programming Console Bus Mode Yes Pin 7 OFF Programming Device running on personal computer in Yes Pin 7 ON Peripheral Bus Mode Host computer or PT in Host Link Mode Yes Pin 7 ON General purpose external device in No protocol Mode Yes Pin 7 ON C series PC in 1 1 Data Link Mode No PT in 1 1 NT Link Mode No 3 1 7 Peripheral Port The peripheral port is mainly used for connecting Programming Devices such as Programming Consoles and personal computers running Support Software 82 CPU Units Section 3 1 Opening the Peripheral Port Cover Programming Consoles can be connected only to this port Host Link and no protocol communications are also supported for this port 1 When connecting a Programming Console to the peripheral port turn OFF pin 7 on the DIP switch on the front of the CPU Unit 2 When connecting a device to the peripheral port other than a Programming Console such as a personal computer running Support Software be sure to turn ON pin 7 on the DIP switch on the front of the CPU Unit When connect ing to a peripheral bus it is also n
316. y Use M3 crimp connectors of the dimensions shown below for wiring terminal block type I O Units 2D CH 6 2 i 6 2 mm max mm max O Tighten the terminal screws to a torque of 0 5 N m Crimp connectors are required by UL and CSA standards Connect either a cable prepared by the user or a dedicated cable to the I O Unit connectors Name No of Specifications Model points DC Input Unit 32 12 V DC 32 points per common CQM1 ID112 24 V DC 32 points per common CQM1 ID213 CQM1 ID214 Transistor 32 4 5 V DC 16 mA to 26 4 V 100 mA CQM1 0D213 Output Unit 24 V DC 500 mA PNP CQM1 OD216 Connector Position Wiring and Connections Section 4 7 Note When using a cable connector with a locking mechanism check that the lock is secure before use Prepare a cable for use with connector type I O Units 32 point Input or Output Units in one of the following ways e Prepare a cable using a soldered type socket and a connector cover provided as accessories e Prepare a cable using a crimp type or pressure welded type socket and a con nector cover purchased separately e Use an OMRON Terminal Block Conversion Unit dedicated cable or an I O relay terminal connector cable 4 7 4 Preparing Cables for 32 point Input and Output Units Recommended Connectors Cable Side Wiring and Assembly Note Prepare cables for connectors on 32 point Input and Output I O
317. y area and PC Setup and expansion instruction information can be saved using the Memory Cassette If pin 2 on the DIP switch on the front of the CPU Unit is ON the data stored in the Memory Cassette is automatically transferred to the CPU Unit when power is turned ON 5 2 Operating Modes 5 2 1 Description of Operating Modes PROGRAM Mode MONITOR Mode RUN Mode The following 3 operating modes are available in the CPU Unit These modes control the entire user program Program execution stops in PROGRAM mode This mode is used for the follow ing operations e Changing PC Setup and other settings e Transferring and checking programs e Force setting and resetting bits to check wiring and bit allocation I O refreshing is performed in PROGRAM mode The following operations can be performed while the program is executing in MONITOR mode This mode is used to make test runs or other adjustments e Online editing e Force setting and force resetting bits e Changing values in I O memory This mode is used for normal program execution Some Programming Device operations like online editing force set force reset and changing I O memory 133 Operating Modes Section 5 2 Z N Caution values are disabled in this mode but other Programming Device operations like monitoring the status of program execution monitoring programs and monitor ing I O memory are enabled This mode is used for actual operation Confirm that
318. y except when replacing it If the battery is not replaced within 5 minutes after removal internal data may be lost For details on the re placement method refer to 6 2 Battery Replacement 3 1 4 DIP Switch The DIP switch is used to set the following Memory write protection auto trans fer of data from Memory Cassette the Programming Console display language the expansion instruction setting communications settings a user determined setting and the device connected to peripheral port Refer to 6 1 DIP Switch Settings for details 3 1 5 Memory Cassettes A Memory Cassette can be mounted in the CPU Unit to transfer or compare the following data between the CPU Unit and the Memory Cassette e User program e Data memory Read only DM DM 6144 to DM 6568 PC Setup DM 6600 to DM 6655 e Expansion instruction information It is not necessary to specify the areas to be read or written All the data is trans ferred in one batch A Memory Cassette must be purchased separately CPU Unit User program 1 i I O memory Ii o o Memory Cassette Data memory Transfer or Memory Cassette read only DM comparison PC Setup Expansion instruction information Memory Cassette Types There are three types of Memory Cassette EEPROM EPROM and Flash Memory The models of Memory Cassette that are available are listed in the fol lowing tables Memory Specifications CQM1
319. yed bits status can be changed using the Force Set Reset opera tion Refer to Refer to 7 3 24 Force Set Reset for details 3 Press the CLR Key to end monitoring Follow the procedure below to monitor the status of a particular word 1 Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display 2 Input the word address of the desired word x B i SHIFT M4 TR 3 Press the MONTR Key to begin monitoring MONTR 163 Programming Console Operations Section 7 3 The Up or Down Arrow Key can be pressed to display the status of the pre vious or next word The displayed word s status can be changed using the Hexadecimal BCD Data Modification operation Refer to Refer to 7 3 20 Binary Data Modifica tion for details 4 Press the CLR Key to end monitoring Note The PC s operating mode can be changed during the Bit Digit Word Monitor Operation without changing the display by pressing the SHIFT Key first and then changing the mode Multiple Address The status of up to six bits and words can be monitored simultaneously although Monitoring only three can be shown on the display at any one time 1 2 3 1 Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display 2 Input the address of the first bit or word and press the MONTR Key TIM MONTRI 3 Repeat step 2 up to 6 times to display the next addresses to be monitored B k sHiFT CONT MONTRI If 4 or more bits
320. ype of ROM into which the program or data may be written after manufacture by a customer but which is fixed from that time on A message or symbol that appears on a display to request input from the opera tor The parameters and procedures that are standardized to enable two devices to communicate or to enable a programmer or operator to communicate with a device See present value Random access memory a data storage media RAM will not retain data when power is disconnected An acronym for reliability assurance safety A memory area from which the user can read status but to which data cannot be written The process of updating output status sent to external devices so that it agrees with the status of output bits held in memory and of updating input bits in memory so that they agree with the status of inputs from external devices The forerunner of PCs In relay based control groups of relays are intercon nected to form control circuits In a PC these are replaced by programmable cir cuits A bit that is not available for user application A word in memory that is reserved for a special purpose and cannot be accessed by the user The process of turning a bit or signal OFF or of changing the present value of a timer or counter to its set value or to zero A code sent with the response to a data transmission that specifies how the transmitted data was processed A format specifying the data required in a respons

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

GEBRAUCHSANWEISUNG  Whirlpool GCGM2991TQ0 User's Manual    Trane Round In/Round Out Catalogue  Samsung GT-P7320 Lietotāja rokasgrāmata  LG US990 Specification Sheet  nanoloop 2.3  Racisme et discrimination 2006 pdf1  Hansgrohe 31609821 Installation Guide  Monte Carlo Fan Company 5PAR52 User's Manual  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file